


7B 308 4455 

















teste OUT 


a 
AOS 
< 40S 
ae is PS ST 
y Ce aS == 
y CS 
y, Cs “4 
2” =F 


ef 











ba 


OY t 
a LO“ Z 
z LY 

ee the Z Y es 

= AEE Zz > 

= + A= <* 

Sap ies om = = 
hed eA A Lae! xehae ake, 


yom 
Aim Piri 3 


SS > 
aS S 
POs P uss ie 
























































the Internet 











— Hational Guard Manual, 


BY 


STEPHEN R. PINCKNEY, 


Gol. 95th H. BH. Rational Guwrd. 


Mew-Tork: 
PUBLISHED BY FRANK McELROY, PRINTER, 


No. 113 Nassav-Srreexr. 


1864. 


Ula 


oy es 


eS, 
TnunsfE sasned lanoits 


Ta 


YEA AE 


tered. according to Act of rongteat in the vear 18€2, by 


S'tRPHEN R. PINCKNEY, ? 
ériw® Jangsinlf EE dick lod 
ta the Clerk’s Office of the District. Court of the United States for the” 
eve esecndy Distzet of New York. 


f 


e Leet 
} 








"One ate € fie 
y o @ * 4° 5 ) w ’ \ a x M 
ié ,e @ ;* - ae € @« _ 
#59 3 ee "oe © o 4 € © 
} » Je ) 6 6'-* a ee ° . 
Fa 
permease m= el ee At Ap Pe agar nom oot crn 
7 * 
Davies & Kent, “a ; Frank MoELRoy 
OTERKOTYPERS AND ELEOTROTYTEUS, ; |" - PRINTER, 
He Peeege Bret IE Ts wd, OR: way 113 Nasoau Street, WY. 
: * rs — sat . i 


4 


SATKIAG YORIGoM HAART YS GRRL 


‘kn are-vaewa Mt BIL 10h 


oh a ._ 


PORE 


oe 





* 
: : 
2 INDEX. 
} Paar 
‘The School Manual.......... <gaedees ae on I 7 SR ME. bes oe 
Schad ot tie. Goldter 1. isis sie ns dak em eea een meee ens es ' 45 
Bay ottet: Hxercige batia mes]a Gist, « 0.0 0.s.00 Es cds wee wice es a i's os OE 
School of the Company...... eeeee die Beste i ceria: he 111 : 
Skirmtsy Peet Pe ieee vs cov ees, ESSER ete 184 
Meme irks bridicprs. ve ois as an, 221 
Signal Drill without the Musket......... TR ORARE .o3 280 
Signal Drill with the Musket.............. ees gictuaitine es 231 
Arm Manual.. = aes adie EPROP I, OOM ey iMag Ma memes 233 
Notened ail a ayetem.of wilifacr.cparsiic: s,. OF 34 
CUM LER N o cgs i Gas ode eae oe TATU RN eias 2 EE 239 
ee ot ann arte alage eats Nea oe MOR NR Se ne 260 
| ip a a 


M1'76635 


rE On e 
ite & & apeth ee 
We etre hs 


n: * ee * * - 
j ome 5 





THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


THE SCIENCE OF MILITARY SIMPLIFIED. 


Wuart is military ? 

Military is the art of organizing, disciplining, 
and maneuvering an army. 

How is it divided ? 

Into two branches. 

What are they ? 

Tactics and strategy.. 

Define the meaning of tactics. | 

It is a system of handling troops under rules pre- 
scribed by governments, for their exercise and 
training. 

Explain what strategy is. 

It is the art of concerting a plan of campaign, 
sombining a system of military uperations, offensive 
and defensive. 

What constitutes an army ? 


An effective body of troops biieling all the appli- 
ances of war for attack or defense. 


ORGANIZATION. 
What does an army consist of, in the United States? 
Of infantry, cavalry, artillery, pera engineers, 
and pontoniers. 
_ What is infantry ? 
Light troops acting as a moving battery. 


8 THE SCHOOL MANUAL, | 
What is cavalry ? ) ‘e 


os 


Mounted troops. 


nf hs “Jssfeuba Ib op] * with! Fegone Spbeien 


of cannon. 
What are riflemen ? pagetembistinc. 2 


Troops drilled for ee. 

What areenpinéeiete yaaTiiM so @UxeIOe BEY 

' A corps organized for surveying positions for. de- 
fense(iforothe exainination ‘of roads,jand routes iby 

land or. water, and for they construction, ‘of, roads. 

and bridges for the use of the army. 


What is topography ? geal ad Gia] 
The art of surveying and drafting the natural 
condition of places. i ay 
e goa vi ry 
charge! 


What department of the army has Sihis duty a charge | 


iii i+ vii Ne 


the, topographical, engineers..." bi wiataie A os 


| oh SS 


ress peer alecygete: 1Ol widen Havoc vd ‘bediros 
A. corps especially assigned to the hares, of, and 
management of, portable brides mode, aS aad 
rubber or, boat floats, unitesonos 
8 tiznefto MU0NSI9GoO Tisdilice 3 moieva p 


INFANTRY. 2" tek | vite 


Which is the most important branch of, thes army t > fad W 

“Infantry. | wii! resi BOOS to thed svPisette A. 

Why ? saeiod iO donde t0? tRw ‘to BOE 
_ Because it is more ¢ shis of endurance, and can 
be maneuvered on rp ground? 


be iat! / rrr ries » f . Bee 
hid gs ig it! of a ately 1 ) YER Oa seed Jad W 
gomroltr: ‘Wielliise valves ov pitaehat YO 


(i Og imtog baa 


vib of Bl We Hi | 


a is oa divided ? ‘; 
It is di Auto af infantry of t vines “light 
infantry,” aii “ yiflemien.” "2" lon eqoon! tigi 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 9. 
{UI GE OOHRS SH ui 


rs 
What is infantry of the line? ; 
Troops organized a as Hig and moving in masses. 
How are they class a? vf i, aes 6 
Into- divisions, brigades, ‘regiments, ‘p Higodina 
and companies. et, heli aes ei 
What is a. diyision % gpa, 91 Fe gala etoibiag 
‘tt consists of two, or, 7s iy hoattest,, 


109 bas 


How many regiments constitute abrigade? .- jemoloe 
Two or more. Lvheagoieg.é Hi.easeads ota 7 es ROLL 
How many companies are ies in &@ regiment Oi A 


Ten. The proposed change in,our .army.,is, the 
French system, of 3; Paattalionsss of 8, SOTRETHES) each, 
with, 2, additional IWMOKSHuoosa Jeti bue ; ates oy oR 


‘ ‘What number of companies are Kore in a  batelion Og 
Two or more. + KGTIAGSY {oe 5 5 it} asiinly 6 j sia dad VW 


2 


What constitutes a company?) on a9 0 ee fon 0) 
Sixty-four officers, non- ‘enidliiadat officers, and 


privates. ‘at Let JLid 1] oe at 10 es ad osit 2B J3O8 Ot 
Op RIO 
SThs i THYOLI 


Who ction a division? . 
. : TisgH ini deoil ; { ea WF 
A mpl ore eneral.. ‘gre idgil ei tad 
pO teoqine Dis tedsig Yor bsiseisa eqoorl 

What Efcer commands a brigade 


A brigadier-general, , a 


- Ydeogino odd al tad W 
iH ve oe *y gee 7.4 cl + as +7 
paw eh +4 ig ? eo ig : stig Gi d 


Who commands aregiment? .; ai Te ninlice 
APM OMehctai 10 vileveo to as raifontoh 2 vi fl 

‘Name thé!officer in command of a battalion, b Isqioniig 
ap major. | aig 


iaeny boonevbe aa ef ded W 
Who commands a company. pagers SeonavD: vig 


di sobooe1g Hottw aqoott totaeurdosiob A 
A’ captain. " 7° eB T disor agit Go 
What other officers are attached to a com pany f i sadur ates 


cnt afi tosane Hert gt: + oh tno toate A. 


10 - ‘ff SCHOOL MANUAL. 


ty 


What is the meaning of a commissioned officer f. 

It is a soldier imposed with command, under thie 
authority of government, by the power of a com- 
mission. 

What is a non-commissioned officer ? 

Soldiers serving in the ranks, having authority 
and command by virtue of a warrant given by the 
colonel. 

How many are there in 4 company ? 

Nine. 

What are their titles ? 

First or orderly, second, third, fourth, and fifth 
sergeants; and first, second, third, and fourth cor- 
porals. 

What are the duties of the sergeants ? 

To act as guides and instructors. 

What are the corporals’ duties ? | 

To act as the base of the front rank. © 


LIGHT INFANTRY. 


What is light infantry ? ; 

Troops selected for picket and So duty. 

What is the outpost ? 

It is the nearest approach to the enemy. 

Explain what the picket is, : 

It is a detachment of cavalry or infadity whose 
principal duty it is to guard an army from. sur- 
prise. : : 

What is an advanced guard ? 

A detachment of troops which precedes the march 
of the main body. 

State what a rear guard is, 

A detachment marching in the rear of the army 


* 


4 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 11 


to protect it from the enemy and to pick up strag- 
gling soldiers. 


. RIFLEMEN. 
What are riflemen? © 


Troops disciplined in the practice of sharp- 
shooting. 


What are they used for? 

As skirmishers or advanced troops, to annoy the 
enemy. 

How are they organized ? 

In companies. 


CAVALRY. 
What is cavalry ? 


Mounted soldiers, second ‘in importance to in- 
fantry. 


What is it used for ? 


For watching the enemy, and assisting the in- 
fantry and artillery on the advance or the retreat. 


How is it organized # 

Into regiments, squadrons, aes companies. 

What comprises a regiment ? 

Five squadrons. 

How many companies are there in a squadron ? 

Two. , 

How many men constitute a company ? 

Sixty. 

OFFICERS. 

What feli-ofticers’ are there in a cavalry or artillery regie 

went ? 


One calles one lieutenant-colonel, and first 
and second majors. 


2: Saas 


1 THRE scHOoL MAN UAL. 
“SHOW bh y”offleeth’ ard there ‘in’ a avalry or artillery’ Gom- 


pany ? tte 


One captain, one first lieutenant, a junior and 
senior second lieutenarith 


¢ goryaitin ere dad ¥/ 
How. many smeae. to a compan rae 


Hefei, 


fe EERE ee 
aad oat Te” baswilyteaid “eqoorl 


? 
. | 
ME LI OCIS 


pe 3 
LETELERE %izt haeit youll ages jad" vi 
« 


OF RAG Tiley POO" beotavba to eiodeiontinla aA 


y 
An arm of the service designed to to use co mould 
field, and heavy ordnance. siteyto yedt oe woH 


<8) LRG NLOD ai 
How is it divided ? : 


Into siege, garrison, seacoast, and mountain ar- 
tillery. 


Gy iieveo of jad 


-(What issiege’ artillery @: [Plate 24]. ov botawoll 


Cannon carrying from 18 to o4 pounds shot; for 
attack on places. 


oi 
; té baau 2: BL ve 


“OW hat-is parriséh’ artillery [Plate 2: yi LD sant dots. 5 aii iL 


Gains employed iti the defense of ear ‘ti wi guide 
esinayio ti al woHl 
Explain what Bensoogst artillery is ) ee J 
Guns°éf'4he ‘heaviest caliber in’ ron carrying 
from 32 to 42 pound shot, and'8 “to 10°irich’ shell, 
BiTO OD BE pe oy7tt 


_ {soibaupa 2. at owt! oie seinegqatoo vasa woH 
ORGANIZATION. 


How is garrison artillery, organized ? :....,. nih t viectewel 
By regiments, batteries, and éompanies, 


bre constitutes a regiment, 


atteries. % 
ish? Wott Ma W VisrTss Ben! 


ow f 


VIRIG 


+ OR aIBOT _f Loy i aw 
How ae uns and men are in a battery ? inser 
y* 


**Six euhs and 110 officers, noteommissioned of 
cers, and privates. SIC DtOo9e DOP 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. Je 
What is mountain artillery? [Plate 3.] . 
Light howitzers, mounted on ‘fies hand car- 
riages and on the; back of horses. ee : 
«How are mountain. howitzers, alae on ‘horses’, backs 
Ona pack-saddle. .{[ed [esinoo s eaivrtss ¥ 


Describe a howitzer. 

JTtvis: a-chambered: cannon need for projecting 
shell or canister and grape-shot. it | lish 

What is a mortar? [Plate 4.] . 

Mortars differ-from guns in the ‘construction of 
their bore, their chamber being in the shape of a 
frustrum of a cone, by which means the’ ‘powder i is 
confined ' and the shell fits close +6 phe sides. (a 


“Describe a columbiad gun. 3 

It is an American cannon, invented by Colonel 
Bumford, of very lar e caliber, used for throwing 
solid shot or shell. alt iss mounted on a high car- 
riage with. traverses, andis.used. in, forts,and water 
batteries. ome 

What are its peculiar advantages #ro 28 by ! 

That it acquires a vertical, field of fire fies so ae 
pression to 39 elevation, and a horizontal field of 
36°, | 

What are the dimensions and weight of one of them ?” 

The 10-inch weighs 15,400 pounds, and Beayects a 
shell of that:size. Its length 3 is 126 inches. 


4 Pi{it 3 


GUNS DESCRIBED. 


Do you know the size ‘of Rodman’s columbiad gun? ‘Plate 5.] 

Its length is 190 inches, its weight 49,100 pounds, 
and carries a’ shot’ ~weighing® 320 pret i 
yards. i 


14 {HE SCHOOL MANUAL. 
What description of guns have been introduced in the army 


recently ? 
Rifled cannon. 


How are ‘they constructed ? 

With smaller cylinders, grooved, for the purpose 
of obtaining a longer range and more accuracy in 
fire, by carrying a conical ball. | 


Describe Wiart’s cannon, 
It'is made of steel, welded together, then turned, 
drilled, and rifled. 


How far will it carry a shot? | 
Four and a half miles with accuracy. 


How are cannons rifled ? 

By cutting a groove one inch wide and_ three 
quarters thick in the interior of the chamber, mak- 
ing one twist in six feet. | 


WEIGHT OF SHOT, 


What description of shot are discharged from siege and gar- 
rison guns? 


12, 18, and 24 pound shot. 


What is thrown from sea-coast columbiads? 


32 and 42 pound shot. | 
How heavy ‘is the shot of a siege or garrison howitzer ? 
_ 8-inch shell and 24-pound:shot.. 


What description of shot is discharged from a sea-coast 
oolumbiad ? 


8-inch and 10-inch shat. 


What is the weight of a 12-inch shot? 
283 pounds. 


_ What is the weight of a 13-inch mortar shell? 
197 pounds. 


~~ 


{HE SCHOOL MANUAL. | 16 


What is the meaning of windage? © 

The difference between the true diameter of the 
bore and the ball. 

What is meant by the “piece ?” 

Any species of cannon that is mounted on a 
carriage. 
_ What is a caisson 2? 

It is an ammunition-wagon whith follows a 
piece on the field. 

What is the limber of a piece ? 

The fore part of the gun- carriage, connected to 
the piece by a pintel. 

What is understood by the caliber of the piece? . 

The diameter of the bore. 

What is a battery ? 

It is a term applied to one or more pieces, or to 
the place where they are served. 

What size rifled cannon are used in the’service ? 

3 inch and 4% inch. 

How do they prove guns ? 

By heavy charges of powder ignited by a fuse, to 
prevent danger. 

How much powder is used ? 

15-inch columbiad, 50 pounds of powder and 1 
shell ; 12-pounder, 4 pounds of powder, and 3-inch 
rifled with 14 pounds of powder and a 11-pound 
shot. 

What is the best. method of spiking a gun? 

Drive in the vent a hardened steel spike or file. 


MORTARS. 
How many kinds of mortars are there? 


8 and 10 inch siege, 10 and 13 sea-coast, 16-inch 
stone, and 24-pound Coehorn. 


16° THE: SCHOOL! MANUAL: | 
What i is a Coehorn mortar?) W.10 os gull ab ted W 
“Tt is made'of a: composition of | brass rere other 
metal. . wit Dire onmd 
DESCRIPTION OF PROJECTILES. «.: 


‘What are the usual projectiles ised in warfare? (6 yl 
‘For unrifled ordnance, solid shot or shell; sifox: 
howitzers, canister, grape, and spherical. case, whieh i 
may ‘be used either in rifled or’ unrifled. canROw: 
What other combustibles are used ? q 

Hand-grenades, light and fire balls rockets, car- 
casses, and shell-fuses. : i 

PROJECTILES. lotaig 3 | 

Describe a shiéll. [Plate 6, fig. 1.) Dit af ded 4 

It is a hollow iron shot witha hole toa receive a 
fuse. It is charged with sufficient Poser to thet 
it, and is ighited by the fuse; |. a! 

How is canister-shot made?! {Plate 6, fig. 2: pil if 

It is a tin.eylinder attached toa aha eich 
and filled with cast-iron shot; between, the; ploek 
and shot is the jh a which bursts the, eupader 
when it, is discharged. Go if 

What are  grape-shot ? [Plato 6, Ps sy" : ae 

A certain number of cast-iron balls put. ‘together 
by means | of two cast-iron plates, - ‘two ‘rings,. and 
one pin, and. nut, cused. in, o- ee howitzers! and 
columbiads. ’ ot Fre | 

Describe what spherical case- shots are, "Plate 6, oy %; , 

It is a thin shell of cast-iron, containing a, num-— 
ber.of musket-balls, and.a charge of ‘powder sufi- 
cient to burn it; a fuse i is fixed’ to it’ as ina’ shel, 
by which the char ge is ignited. 


 COMBUSTIBLES,. ° ¢ ff) ah Pi 


mite iniadeon dake 
They are made of iron,in'the fee of: a ebndate 


‘THE SCHOOL MANUAL,. Li. 


filled with: !bulletsand, charged, nthe a Apes and 
used to:thirow: into, Hel demtanicy, ti’ $3 

What'is # ight and fire ball? }) euilie | 

Light balls are of an oval shape, fost of Sanches 
of: canvas) filled with.eombustible composition used 
to light! up forts. . Fire-balls are loades and need tp: 
light the enemy’s forts. 


Describe a rocket. 

Tt isxcomposed of a, strong: case of. re or  saiok 
idouj containing niter, charcoal, and. sulphur.,;, The. 
head is either assolid, shot or; shell.,, They are, 
usually fired.from tubes on, Ago eal Sie 


Whatrispa carcass® sores eeieom 

Combustible edmpositidn bien ag in ee 
formed with iron hoops, canyas, and cord, thrown 
from a mortar, and used j in 1 bombardinents or fiting 
shipping. : 

~Explain the construction and uses Of fides. ” Bk 

hey are made of paper, ‘wood, or metal iinclosing 
a burning composition, attached t6 the — of a 
— and. Darn. about one inch i in oe aan) 


abasog t& _GUNPOWDER.. 
How is gunpowder made ? . 
.By\a composition of, 76 parts of saltpeter, 14 of 
charcoal, and 10 of sulphur. : 
How is it manufactured ? 
The charcoal.and sulphur are put together in a 
rolling barrel, and rolled for one hour.” The salt- 
pe is then added, and rolled for three hoursJonger. 
t is then placed dnt a! rolling-mill; made of two caste: 
iron cylinders, rolling around a horizontal: axis. ina 
circular trough, 9 inches in: diameter. fe nal 
How heavy ‘are these. or po hos ‘ ‘ener a at 
ee ne a To nouloa a ai 


i THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


How is gunpowder made into the different qualities t 

By pressing it into cakes, then mashing it by 
teeth-rollers, and sifting it in different-sized sieves. 

How is it dried for use? — 

By spreading it out on sheets, attached to frames, 
in a room heated by steam to a temperature of 
160°. a . 

How is it tested? 

By firing three rounds from a musket, or dis- 
charging a 65-pound solid shot from an 8-inch 
columbiad with a 10-pound charge. 

How many qualities of gunpowder are there ? 

Four—musket, mortar, cannon, and mammoth. 


Are they all made alike? 
Yes: with the exception of the size of the grain. 


What are the general charges used? — 
For a 10-inch columbiad, 15 pounds; for a 42- 
poxnd siege gun, 9 pounds ; ; and for a 10-inch 
owitzer, 12 pounds. 
' How. much i is used in projecting shells? 
For a 10-inch shell from a columbiad, 3 pounds; 
‘and from an 8-inch mortar, about 22 pounds. 
What is the usual proportion ? 
For solid shot since quarter the weight of the 


shot. 
MATCHES, FUSES, AND PRIMES. 

What is a slow match? ‘* 

A pee rope of flax, soaked in ped ae 
twisted hard: and: dried; when lighted, i burns 4 
inches in an hour. 

Explain what a quick match is. 


It is made of cotton yarn of seven strands, soaked 
in a solution of gum-arabic and. spirits, and a 


#7 SCHOOL MANUAL. 19 


paste of powder applied successively and rolled into’ 
cord. It will burn 1 yard in 13 seconds. 


How is a fuse made? 

It is a small tube of wood, either beech or oak, 
with a hole in the center; it is driven into a shell, 
then filled with a composition, and has a paper fuse" 
attached, which ignites. as it leaves the mortar or 
cannon, and burns at the rate of 10, 14, or 20 
seconds before exploding the shell. 

How are percussion-caps made ? , 

_ They are made of copper, pressed into circular 
shape, which is filled with 2 parts of fulminate of 
mercury and 1 part niter. To protect the powder 
from moisture, it is covered in each cap with shellac 
varnish. ? | 

How much material does it require for 1,000,000 caps ? 

1,000 pounds sheet copper, 42 pounds mercury, 
836 pounds nitric acid, 382 pounds alcohol, 24 
pounds niter, and 10 pounds gum shellac. | 


| FORTIFICATIONS. 

What are field-works ? : 

_. Any constructions which have for their object to 

impede the advance of an enemy, or to enable an 

inferior force to maintain their position against the 
attack of a superior number. . 

What do they generally consist of ? 

An embankment of earth, called a “ parapet,” 
and an excavation on the exterior side, called a 
*¢ ditch.” 

What is the general height of a “‘ parapet?” [Plate 7, fig. 1.] 

Seven feet six inches. 

What is the usual thickness of a “ parapet ?” | 
Three feet at the top, and ten or twelve feet at 
the bottom. — 


90 THE, SCHOOL, MANUAL, 


2 we . 
Woolas: 


. oie at is the; depth and width of the ‘ditch ¢ _ seve 
’ Six feet deep and ten feet wide,. . [ dict Ec ty 109 
How deep does a musket-ball penetrate a loose sean 

Ten to;eighteen inches, 1 | “a 

_ How deep:does a 6+pornd. cannonehall penetra 

»-Three and a‘half to four feet: a bed kh ay 

How deep does a 9- potnd shot pot or: 

~ Six to seven feet. 
How deep does a fa-pound shot penetrate ? es 

, Right to, ten feet. ig 


‘ : , ’ 2 , 
. se at : f : raat ree ct 
} ro : bLRS AS | bad x List £ j ARR EY * Soi 25 


‘THEIR viens. 


“What 2 are the iebleaic of the different speuies of aniiils aes, ia 
, Redans—single, double} and triple redans,: with 
auxiliary flanks; lunettes, redoubts, star forts, bas- 
tioned. and, demi-bastioned. forts, bloek-houses, and 
line. intrenchments, such. as, tenailles and: -cremail- 
léres; : = 

What is the redan? [Plate 7, fig. 2. 7] 

The redan is. a work wiih two fronts or faces, 
forming with each other a salient angle.’ Triple 
redans ‘are’ two het 4 ee —_ — pees A sional 
enedy 61. | itil 

“What is the lunette? bial , fig. 3] Sa 

A large redan, with parallel flanks.” 3 

. What is a star fort? [Plate 1 te.41 

_Shapened as a star, haying several ‘angles. : 

“What is a redoubt? [Plate 7, fig. 5] Sf a 

- An inclosed work, either, AAAI or, stroalarsd hav. 
ing no ‘angles. : 

What are bastion works? [Plate (a fig, 64, o-edd ui tek 


A. fort haying a. flanking. firey, with angles ‘ic 
_ gover each face or front. srthoek matt 


2 isal She w 


{THE SCHOOL MANUAL.- I 


_, «TEMPORARY FORTS. 

” Whats is a block-house? -, 

A covered field- Wore Mads of isnetraats. and 
logs, a protection from, the Indians, rectangular i in 
form. 

What other works are formed as a part of defense? : 

Chevaux de frise, abattis, trous-de-loups, entan- 


lements," erow’s-feet, common fougasses, shell fon- 
gasses, and. stone fougasses. | 


_,How'i isa chevaux, de frise aonsitnctell i; ot AT 

It is a beam of wood, square or tora hay- 
‘ing pointed stakes or swords inserted into, the face. 
They are used as temporary barriers to aap the 
passage of a breach, or to lock up a street. 


Describe an abattis. 7 

Large boughs or entire trees are laid. down i in a 
line, with the butt ends buried threé or four feet in 
the’ ground, with the branches toward the enemy. 
The ‘small branches are cut ofthe | large: ones 
sharpened to a point. | 


What are trous-de-loups?._ 
They are holes dug in the ground i in the form of 
a cone, about six feet wide and six feet deep: A 
pointed stake is planted» at theobottonn to ‘prevent 
them:being used for rifle pits.: They are dugin rows, 
Best SPIE Sie yout hotayw of .paroTe ent 


MATERIAL ROR oc gamma 


-8 What i is used for making a parapet %” 
aoe Gabions, fascines, sand- bags, and sometimes sods 
of ‘turf. 

What are gabions ? 


Strong cylinder baskets, open’ at both eid, two 
‘feet in diameter, and 30 inches ‘high.’ 


992 . THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


How are they used? 
By being stood on end and filled with earth, and 
then riveted in the ground by pointed stakes. 


What are fascines?_ 

Trees 8 or 9 inches in diameter, and from 6 to 9 
feet long. be | 

How are they used ? : : 

By placing them on frames the shape of a St. 
Andrew’s cross, then filling the intervening space 
with brushwood, and tying it round the fascines.. 
This forms a solid brushwood3 which is used for sus- 
taining the bank of earth. | 


How are sand-bags made ? 

They are common bags of coarse canvas, measur- 
ing 80 by 16 inches, which, when filled with sand, 
form a good embankment. 


How is turf used? ~ 

They are cut. in sods 4 inches thick, 16,inches 
long, and 8 inches wide, and when piled upon each 
other, form a good defense. 


MINES AND OBSTRUCTIONS. 


Can you describe what entanglements are? 

They are formed by cutting half through the 
stems of small trees, and pulling the upper parts to 
the ground, to which they are made fast. 


What are crow’s-feet? 

They are 4 iron spikes, joined together at angles; 
when they are thrown on the ground, their points 
are up. ey are used to obstruct the advance of 
cavalry. 


How are fougasses made ? 
They are small mines, from 3 to 10 feet deep; 


° THE SCHOOL. MANUAL. 23 


powder and shell are deposited in these mines, and. 
exploded by a fuse connection from the surface. 


INFANTRY. 


Define the school of the soldier. 

It is that part of the science of yee which 
teaches the recruit how to become the soldier. 

_ How many parts are there in the “‘school of the soldier ?” 

Three parts. 

What is the first part ? 

The position of the soldier without arms; eyes 
right, left, and front ; facings; principles of the di- 
rect step in common time, quick time, double quick 
- time, and the run. 

Explain what the second part is. 

_ Principles of shouldered arms, manual of arms, 
loadings, firings, direct, ‘oblique, by file and by 
rank, to fire and load, kneeling and lying, and 
bayonet exercise. 

What is the third part ? 

Union of eight or twelve men for instruction in 
the principles of alignments, the direct march, the 
by the ue march, and the different steps; the march 

e flank, the principles of wheeling, ‘and change 
of direction ; long marches, and double quick time 
and the run, with arms and knapsack. 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 


Define the position of a soldier. 

Heels on the same line, as near each Stine as the 
conformation of the man will permit. 

The feet turned out equally, forming with each 
other less than a right angle. 

The knees straight, without stiffness. 

ae body erect on the hips, inclining a little for- 
war 

The shoulders square, and falling equally. 


94 THE SOHOOL MANUAL. “ 


‘The arms hanging naturally: 

The elbows near the body. | | 

The palm of the hand turned ¢ a little to the front, 
little finger behind the seam of the pantaloons. 

The Heay § erect and be to te ifeonls, Nei 
constraint. | LO 

The chin near the anche witHort eoverttig 16,989 

- ‘The eyes fixed straight to the front; and striking 
the ground about the distance of fifteen —. 

Why are the heels, on the same line?” 

“Because if one wete in. redr “St “the” other, the 
shoulder on that. side would be thrown’ back, or “the 
_ position of the soldier would ‘be constrained.” 


What are the heels more or less; closed FOR Fo aie ee tee ar 
_.o) So that men who are knock-kneed,-or who have 
legs with large calves, canj-not, without comstnaant, 
make their heels touch while standing. font 


Why are the feet turned out at an angle? — 
_, Because. if one foot were turned out more than 
the other, a shoulder would | be. deranged ; and if 
both feet be too much turned out, it would not, al- 
low the body to lean forward, and stand, ugh 


 Why‘are the knees extended without stiffness? imei 
If they were stiffened; constraint . a fatigue 
would follow. | 
What is the object of the body being erect on the hips ? 
On account of its giving an nh equilibrivn’ BS “ 
i selialee ° ‘ ten 
., Why is the, upper park of the adi etidlined forward, 
Because recruits are generally. disposed to ateat 
the stomach and throw back: the. tgs Higtyess- 
ing themaumuchiinsmarching: 94 joors ehod od’ 
‘ Why are the shoulders square ? bis 
If the shoulders be advanced beyond the line of 


THE, SCHOOL MANUAL, 95 


the breast, the back. would be arched.or round- 
shouldered ; the soldier could not. fae pasaeent’ nor 
use his piece. with ease. | 


What i is the little finger caren. behind the s seam 1 of the pan- 
taloons for ?,, . oat 

Because ; itis necessary: to turn ‘ide Shows. in. to 
the body, to. prevent.,the soldier, from identi 
more space in the rank than necessary. r 

Why i is the face straight to the front ? 

If it were otherwise, stiffness would follow; this 
would be communicated to the whole body, and it 
would give pain instead of ease, | 

What is the objet of having the eyes direct to the front ? 

Because it is the surest means of cthaintaining the 
shoulders in ‘Tine. : 


* FACINGS “AND THE STEP. 


What are ‘the fhoinipetc | 
Turning the — to the right or left when in 
line. 
What is: “‘ about face ?” 
| Turning to the rear while in ene 
What 'is the meaning of the direct step ? 
Marching direct forward. 7 
“What is the oblique step? °— 
Marching at an angle to the HME 6 or + lett, 
What is the cap iays and. apa of a direct step:in com- 
mon time ? ' 
Twenty- -eight inches in length, and ninety steps 
to a minute. ’ 
i is the length and quickness of a acl ep in quick 
ime? 
‘Twenty-eight inches in length, ‘and. one. hundred 
and ten steps to the minute. 
2 


96 rine 8éroor “MANUAL. 


~ What is the length of the back step 0 Hit Janene 

Fourteen inehés] oo toiblos sat ; betepisod 

. sabe is the lenge and 5 cs andar of a step in ‘oubie quick 
ime tO | 

Thirty-three tics long: and one hundted ‘and 

pee ah stepsiin ai minuters«s001 #1 i oannoo 

How is'the musket earried on the! double quick 2 


At the right shoulder’ and the’ trail ei a [je on 


.. “ ‘THE STEP ‘EXPLAINED. 


"What. are sie gener al principles’ of. the: ‘teri, in raiebib i 

‘Throw: the weight of the body on, the. right Jeg 
at/the command, “forward,” moot 

he toe depressed, but without restraint eh fiede 

The toe and knee slightly turned out ; : 

The upper part,of the body forward ; 

The ham or thigh of the leg extended ; 

The feet passed near the ground ; 

« The ‘foot!planted firm without phdcks: i} 

‘The face or eyes direct to the front. i 

Why is the weight of the body thrown on the right leg? 

In order to prepare for taking ‘the «first: step 
smartly, which is essential in a. bes Fe af eon 


What is the toe depressed for? ;; ii 
Because it extends the om Beis pr epares tao foot 
to come flat to,the ground. |, . by 


. Why are the toes and knees! slightly piiivedo out: iW 

If they were too much turned, the body’ would 
be unsteady. tf esti ae 

What is the object of the OpPer pert of ie body pets 
forward ? gt 

So that the weight may be ditows on the foot 
that is on the ground, ‘that the foot in ‘the rear inlay 


tri eSB (3) = APT rey Bee 


‘THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


be easily raised, and, that, the step may Rot) ‘be 
shortened. | 


Why are the hams onltorsléd j in divalent: 

Because a rank can not march together, as each 
man.'would walk \alone, without josthieny and ‘gep- 
arating elbows. 

Why is the foot passed : near the powia? 

If ‘the foot were raised more than necessary, time 
would be lost and the soldiers fatigued unneces- 
sarily, 

What is the purpose of planting the foot flat without shock ? 

To avoid ‘the wavering of the body, if the heel 
were landed first. _ 

Why is the face or eyes kept to the front? 

Because this. position of the head prevents the 
shoulders from turning, “gud assures the direct 
march to the front. - 


THE MANUAL. 


What is the manual of: arms ? 


_ Movements in handling a musket, which com- 
prehends its applieation to a soldier. 


How is the manual taught? _ | 

To three men in a line, and afterward in file. 

What is the time in executing the manual? 

With the exception of the motions relative to the 
cartridge, the rammer, and fixing and. unfixing bay- 
onet, it is 90 motions to a minute. 


What are the number of motions i in the several movements 
in the manual ? 


Support—arms, from the shoulder, 3 motions. 
~Carry—arms, from support, 38 do. 
Present—arms, from the shoulder, 2. do, 
Shoulder—arms, from present, 2 do. 


28 ‘THE SOHOOL MANUAL. 


0 Opder2sairhie’ from the shoulder, "o“otions.. 
Shoulder—arms, from an order, 2 Soi, a 
Charge—bayonet, from the shoulder, 2 » dbs 

Should ders-arms; from ithe charge,« © 20: 0do. 
Dtie bayonet, from the shoulder," 13. ‘do: 
Fix bayonets, do. do.’ ‘av Bia ido. * 
Trail arms Fa Dit te: MUO aid : » 2... dow: 


Right. shoulder, shift—arms, from, the shenlder, : 
7 motions, 

‘Recover arms, from the jules, 1 motion.. 

Secure arms, from the shoulder, 3 motions. °. 

‘Tnspection of arms, and fix een i from, or- 
der—arms, 2 motions. | 


" 


ad 


. Fy : art 
» ’ 


dbass,4 / TO LOAD. 

How many times and motions are there in loading ? 
' Nine times, and 15 motions. 

What are they ? U ¥Ediie. bh 


Load from the shoulder, L motion.) o) © 
Handle ahh ess add.ont aiwat 

Tear dO. ysis 

Charge  do., 

Draw rammer, 

Ram cartridge, | 

Return rammer, “© 
o Prime; | | 

‘Shoulder arms, 


o 
de 


de ote EEE 
Qu 
Sa 


~' PIRINGS.- 
How tnany, motion! are. “there i in ‘preparing to fire from the 
load? © | P Penne 
Thee times, and 5 motions. ee ae 


if a7e 58 
Aiiet 2 : ‘ty s4 —e Les - > oF Owe 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 399. 


What are they ? Sahay Birt ELS ti! 3if4 i ea 
Ready from the shouldeiy 3 ratios? EDU SO 
Aim from ready, i GOs orig Old ci spit VW 
ny ire from. aim, lsat Wy do. 


How many motions are distort in “ recover arms, 5 ftom iow: 
One motion. | | f\ 
What are the general id pds of direct Pg ! 
To preserve steadiness and, coolness;,,to; avoid 

placing more, than one charge in the musket. at a 

time, and. for. the rear rank to step off to the Fight, 

in aiming. | 
What rules are to.be followed,in oblique firings Grane ost t 
As rear ree in aiming to the Re ; to: cosepy 


7 -fa4 


Bg om A= 
What is the object of throwing back the fahaeutder 2 
In order to be able to direct, the sight more or ~ 

less obliquely, according to the position. sof the 

object aimed at. 

why’ is thé left foot and upper part: iy the boay of the rear 
rank men advanced? 

In. order to avoid accidetits, as srectdrealt this tlie 
pieces of the} rear. ranig seme mom carrgees pycad 
the. front-rank,., + 6 

Why is the piece drawn ne obliquely 74 i 


To avoid the a of agar it over the head 
of f the front rank, men; [inet | 


and 


fannie 
ri il ASS 


Sys : 


doViabsed, DEFINED, 
What, constitutes afile?, 5. 


Two men, one being behind the: ote, and 18 
inches distant... avon deine 

What, constitutes a Steak 29 me rte ie: yf ef 

Two or more men flongiide of shvoln othadt 1 fguords 


30° {HE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


What is the meaning of “flank ?”’ 

The ends of the; company.’ 

What is the pivot? Oy 

That portion which the hence is meen from, 
usnally the guide. 

What is the duty of a guide? 

To keep the flanks of the company steady. | 


What is meant by the marching flank ? 

~The end of the company opposite to the ive 

What is the meaning of the term “dressing” forward or. 
back ? 

The men moving. forward or backward to estab- 
lish’ a true line. «© 


What i is the position of the head in dressing? 
It is'turned to the right or left oul aaells as the 
base may be established. 


ALIGNMENTS. 


What are alignments ? 


A system of forming successive files in. a line by 
marches and halts. 


How are alignments established ? 

By placing ten or twelve men adjoining each 
other, and moving them to the front and rear direct 
or oblique. 

_ What. principles are, pendenlls waedhia 


That the men arrive-steadily on’ the amon 

That the body be not bent back, nor the head 
forward. 

That the head be but little turned V bee enough tc 
see the line of the eyes. | 

That the alignment never be passed: . 

That at the command “front,” vi stand fast 
though the rank be not aligned. | HE 100% 


THE SCHOOL “MANUAL 31 


That at’the’ command; ‘this’ or ‘that’ file,“ for- 
ward,” or “ back,” all other files stand fast. 010 
“That! in aligning to the rear, the men‘in falling 

back. pass only a little behind ’the alignment.’ 

What is the object in n having the men ‘arrive steadily on the 
alignment? — 
Because haste begets confusion and j is ‘opposed to 

#ood order: 

Why i is the body not to be bent back. or - the head eevee? 
“It is only by re rularity of poeinen that a true 
line can be acquired. | 
Why i is the head but little turned to align? : : 
That in turning it too much it draws. the shoulder 

with it. o * 
Can not, the. alignments be passed ? os 
No. If one man passed the alignment, ‘he would 

oblige the remainder to do it ‘also, occasioning 

thereby a fault and loss of time.’ 

Why should all stand fast at the command. “ front ” 5 

In order to give the men the habit of indging 
promptly, and to avoid shuffling. 


Why is it that all the files should stand sme pel one. is} 
ordered to advance or retire 2. 


In. order not, to’ derange the files, which are 
alioned. | 


avi do the files in dressing backward, Maa a little to the 
rear 


80. t that they can see the true, Phe, better, ret 


 MARCRIN GS. 


“Whati is tigant: ri rhavdbiniy hie: the front tos 

Advancing in column; or im» liney. forward)’ ‘gta 
either by: battalion, ‘by: division; by company, ‘ore 
platoon. eotoar &S 


82 THE SCHOOL MANUAL: 


What is the general rule for marching by the front?) . 

Touch lightly the elbow toward the guide. “| 

Not to open out that.elbow nor the opposite atm. 

Yield to pressure from the side of, the guide, and 
resist. it from the other. 

Recover, by insensible degrees, the slight touch 
of the elbow, if lost. 

Maintain the head square to the front, no. atten 
which side the guide may_be. 

To recover any ground lost or gained, gradually. 


* Why i is the elbow touched lightly toward the guide ? 

By preserving this light touch, the line will pe 
nearly true. While if one man should push,. 
would move another, and confusion would folfew 


What is the object of not opening out the elbow ? 

In order that no one may press his neighbor, and 
all may occupy their places. i 

Why should a man yield. to pressure: from the side of the. 
guide, and resist it from the other ? 

In order to avoid pe the guide out of di- 
rection. , 

What is the object in recovering he touch of the Thom, 
insensibly, when it is lost ? 

Because, in gaining it suddenly, it may occasion a 
movement by other files which will tend to disar+ 
range the line. 


Why i is the head kept to the front? 

Because if the head were turned to the side, it 
would draw after it the body, giving thereby a false 
direction to the line. _ 

Why should a man correct an error in the march insensibly ? 

If he were to move suddenly it ‘would tend to 
disunite the ranks, causing his neighbor to'take a 
step of 34 inches, while he would only take posed 
28 inches. : 


THE, SCHOOL, MANUAL . 88. 


What, is meant, by marching, by the flank? et es 
Moving fe ins ep files, when faced: to the: 


night or left. iotete oli dt jedt 9 bro 
How does a soldier face’to' the at joni gaer sedtio, Mi 
By raising the right foot clear. a -_ ground and 

turning on’ the Jeft heel. Dest, 1 rod sareaoel 


: ¢ ‘ ; ¢ 
ty Oya ory re 
Dies SOS PRS TO 


How does a soldier face to the lett? 


By. raising ote right, weet clear of the. ground and 
turning on. ne eft hee Lat 31 92) 
26 Sat Senin Tistorsin Vent Tam 
How Hm a obi face about? | 
By placing the heel.of the right foot inka inches 
in rear of the left heel, raising the left foot and 
turning on both heels to, the rear, | 


What is meant by neve? (eiosib sci 


To move forward.in any. AEPREION, given, gee: 
What is changing direction ? Jisit-# miodt ys owl 
Turning tothe right or’ lett while matching), by 


the flank or in columm. ©. >) | ago ebie edt of 


. , 
: 7 " y 

tee gk . Pee Gey oF 7 
4 UddltL WDE oh FSLL EF 


MARCHING BY THE FLANK jo yocitio of 


‘What rulesare to:be observed: in flank: Marchings?.so5 A 


That the step be executed according*to: the iptv i 
ciples prescribed for the direct step ; that, at each 
step, the advancing heel of every following man be 
planted about six inches.in advance, of the opposi 
heel (yet on the ground) of the man, vive AB DERE , 
preceding ; that (to avoid treading on the heels of 
the men who precede) the knées be not: bent: that. 
the head. of; the. last file should cover those 1 An, front. 


a 


§ . 


Why is the step the same as the Bivect step? sf W 

Because it is necessary in order, to. preserve a. ee 
fect harmony of movement. , 

9% 


"| antre yi 


84° THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


Whiy is the advancing heel placed six inches in advance of 
the opposite man’s heel, which is on the ground? 


In order that the rank, marching in file, may be 
neither lengthened nor éontracted. 

Why are the knees not bentii in marching ? 

Because bending them would oceasion both a loss, 
of cadence and distance, . 

Why should each man’s head cover the preceding one’s? 

Because it is the most certain rule by which each 
man may maintain himself 3 in n the. exact Tine. 


WHEELINGS. 


What are wheelings ? 

Movements in column or by the flank, to change’ 
the direction. 

How many kinds of wheelings are there? | 

Two; from a halt, and on the march. | 

What are the general principles of wheeling on the mar ch? 

To the side opposite the guide. | tf 

What, at a halt ? 

To either side. 

A company marching in oe with the guide left, would 
tt wheel to oe left ? : 

No: . | rE 

Why not a nO fl 

Because it would not have a: guide to conduct the 
marching flank. 


How would you wheel a company to the left gel these 


~ eircumstances ? 


By changing the guide to the right Before the 
wheel. 

How is a wheel executed at a halt? 

To either side. 


THH SCHOOL MANUAL. 35. 


What is the length of the step of the pivot, man in leis 
vn the march ? 


Nine or eleven inches. 


What length of step does. the marching flank men taket 
A full step, according to the marching time. 


What is it called when wheeling on a march? - 
Wheeling on a,movable,pivot. ,.;., 


What are the general principles of wheeling from a. hale? ! 

To turn the head a little toward the marching 
flank,“and fix the: eyes on the: line of the:menswho 
are on that side; to touch lightly the elbow.of) the: 
next man toward the pivot; to, resist ihe awn 
the side of the marching, flank. 


Why are the eyes thrown toward the marching flank 

Otherwise: it:would» be: impossible for: each::man 
to regulate the length of his step so,,as.to. senior 
his movement to that of the marching flank, 

What is the object of touching lightly the elbow of the > next 
man toward the pivot? 

In order , that: Shas files may . not, open out. in, 
wheeling. 


flan 3 
Because if this principle be. neglected, the pivot, | 
which ought to be a fixed point, in wheels, from 
a halt, might. be, pushed out, of its place. by. Na 


ure, 


ates do you: resist, pressure. from the ide of. the atauidince 


rot is the difference between a wheel from a halt and Ag 
pivot 


Ina wheel. from a fale, the touch of. the elbow. i is, 
toward the marching flank, while in the, wheel. on 
a pivot, the touch is to g.fhe, guide or. inner flank. 


gece ies ee 4 
; fi te & : bd ‘7 Sct 


36° | THE 8OHOOL MANUAL: 


- COMMANDS. — 
What is “ attention—company ?” 
It is a command to bring the company, when at a 
rest, to the first position of a soldier. . a 

How are commands given? mele: 

In a firm and distinct tone. 0 i 

How many kinds of commands are there? 0 2. 

Three.. ... | 

What are these ? | 
~The command of: caution, preparatory command, 

and execution. | -obia tad 1 
What is the word, “ dttention’ prig oils Dis WOd MBLC 

It isa command of caution. — aS To: 

Why? © a ; ia ¥ 
(Becaiwse it forewarns the men to prepare, vo htO 
What is, “company ?” (TOL. Std C08 

A command of execution. i | 
“Why? OO Se 

Because, in connection "with Jeesntseit i eom- 

pletes the execution ‘of the intended’ movement. 


er ricy 


What is, ‘in place rest ?” 


Tt is standing at ease, the left knee being slightly 
bent, looking steady to the front, and eo gebiion si- 
lence without movement. | 


What is, « rest ¢” | 

Remaining in the ranks, without preserving im- 
mobility. 

What is, “ attention ?” | Offs SHES 

It is a command to bring thes company | when at 
parade rest, to tle position of a ‘soldier. ” 

What is, “ eyes right 2”. 


It is casting the head to the right ghtdaeig: iy! 
the purpose of making a true line. 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL 3T° 


What is, “eyes left??? rou o fue 

idittise casting: the. head ‘th ero left; obliquely for 
the same BR pose. 

What is, ‘ * eyes front PDota0g jae0 | i O10) 

Ibis resuming the: position of the slater | 


MOVEMENTS! OF THE) COMPANY. j 
«How ista’company formed? = 4) 9 ~ 
From right to ee pitas. to size, Hehe talleat 
on the right. Pottieog a‘ta : bat 

‘Which is the right flank? h 

The right-hand side wher Recor in line. . 

Which is the left ? 
_The left-hand side when i in ‘TH 

How. is the company formed % [Page 105.] ) 

In line, in two ranks, the tallest, on the right | 


“DIVISION OF! THE COMPANY. 
How is the company divided? 
_In the center, into two platoons.’ 
“How is each platoon divided ? ” a er 

Into two sections. weir 
‘Which is the first platoon?’ °°? 

That on the right. © ®%0l9 ©! ‘e daw 
Which is the second? @°) 0) 0 
The left platoon. —_- ee 


POSITION OF OFFICERS AND NON-COMMISSIONED Oo: ri ERG 
Where is Re ong . Lawes 9 when the Senitpay i 
formed?: . 
On the right in the foi renk 
Where is the first lieutenant’s position ? [109 


Two ‘paces in rear of°the centre’ of the fourth 
section. id 


88 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


Where is the second lieutenant’s position?» ai 
“Two paces in rear. of the center of the firs 
platoon. ii 
Where is the third lieutenant posted? . 
Two paces in rear..of; the center, of. the: sabaiid 
platoon. 
Where is the first. sergeant posted ?: AVON 
~ In the rear rank on the right, covering « the 
captain... ie od Olt not 
Where is the second sarihaita eer Aer | {tO 
Two paces in rear of the rear. rank, oposite: fre 
second file from. the left of the SOPTPAMYS apis is the 
left guide of the company. 
Where is the third sergeant posted ¢ 
Two paces in rear of the rear rank, op ital 9 the 
second file from the right of the second 73 toon. 
Where is the position of the fourth sergeant ? 
Two paces in rear,of the, rear, rank, opposite the 
second tile from the left of the first platoon. 
Where is the fifth sergeant posted?; .,.. . 
In the rank of file closers,. opposite the ‘second 
file from the right of the first platoon.” 


FILE CLOSERS.) , , vat Amb V9 

Where is the rank of file closers? |, .; 

Two paces in rear of the rear ak. 

Who constitute this rank ? 

The first, second, and third poor a Red oe 
second, third, fouith, and fifth Aereennts 

What.is its object? =. . 

To preserve the steadiness of the rear rank, and to! 
prevent disorder in thewanksi) 9) 9) (0 ait of) ot 

Where are the corporals placed? ,, 

In the front, rank, on the right he left. ff cet 
platoon. : 


iJ 


{HE SCHOOL MANUAL. * — 82 


GUIDES. 
How many guides are there to a company ? 
Two; one to each platoon. 

_ Who is the left guide of the company ? 
The second sergeant... . 
Who is the right guide of the RoTAp AAT, 
The first sergeant. 

Who is the guide of the first Mateo 

The ‘first sergeant. 

What is the meaning of a column ?.. 

When one division, company, platoon, or section 
is marching in the rear of or behind another... 


\ 


COMMAND. 
Who commands the company? . 
The captain. i 
Where is his position in column by company ? 
Two paces in front.of,.the center... 
Who commands the second: Platoon ? 
hin first iepriaesigiind . 
0 1} 1B OL 
‘SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 


How many lessons and articles are there in the school of: the 
company ? 


Six lessons, each having five articles, 


7: 
i. ¥¥ 
“i 


FIRST LESSON OF THE SCHOOL OF THE coMPANY. 
What is the first article of the first lesson ? 
To open ranks, 
Name the second article, 
Alignments in open ranks, 1» 
“State what the third article is, 
Manual of arms. 


a... THE SOHOOL MANUAL 


What is the fourth article?.... 
To. close. ranks. oss. a. dus rstean tobi .G is Ae 


Name the fifth article. 
Alignments and manual of arms in n, olosed ranke 


. SECOND LESSON.’ 
What is the first articlé of the second lesson ?! 
To load in four times and at willl’ 
Name the second article, | 
To fire by company. 
What is the third article?” ee? oe 
IPG Te Wry FSI AL: WAR GR Od glQi At AD 29O MOE | 
State what the fourth article is, °° ey eee 
To fire by rank. | , 
What is the fifth article? “ang 3 PE HS : 
To fire by the rear rank. CO 


* - 


Oo CDHIRD CUESBONY 661) 0: 
Name the first article of the third lesson. 
To march in line of: battles «0.8 of he 
What is the second article ? (EATS! 
To halt the company mar ching i in Tine of battle, 
and to align it. | | 
State what the third article ‘is. | 
The oblique march in line of battle. 
What is the fourth article ? 
_ To mark time, to march in Hong's quick time, 
and the back step. 
Name the fifth article. 
To march in retreat in line of battle 


os 


wert 


FOURTH LESSON. |) pis 
What is the first article of the fourth lesson’? 1 jada 
To march by the flank. zervie %o leone 


THE SCHOOL*MANUAL: 41 


State what the second articles. dt jadw pied 
»'To' change direction*by files)’ © 9 | | de sd oT 

_ What is the third article ? sata 

To halt the qoaped ae byt the flank, ‘and 
to facerit to the front. 

Name what the fourth article’ is. ‘ M 

The company being in mareh a the. part to 
form it on the right or left y file. into line; of 
battle. ee : 

What is the fifth article? __, Gite 

‘The company marching by the flank, to form it 
by company or platoon into line, and cause it to 
face to the right.and left, and to file left and right in 
series! 


FIFTH LESSON. 
State what the first article of the fifth lesson is. 


_ To break into column by platoon either at a pelt 
or while marching. ' 


What is the second article ? 
To march in column, 
Name the third article. 
To change direction. 

ch What i is the fourth urticle ? 3 
To halt the coluinn. i itt 4 oy 
State what the fifth article i is, ad 4 


Being in colum»y by platoon, ‘to bem to:the: right 
or left into line of battle, either at a halt or in 
marching. 


SIXTH LESSON. 


What is thesfirst article of ‘the sixth — ent 
‘To break “into platoons’ -_ to re-form, ‘the com 
pany, ia ,e10d 


42 THE) SCHOOL) MANUAL. 


State what the second article:is.): | 

To break files to the rear, ieee to. cause: them, ‘to 
re-enter into line. | 

What is the third article?) 

To march in column in 1 routes nol ‘to: ana the 
movements incident thereto, : bi alana 

» Name the fourth article. 1 Ar entiod yaeg ost 

“The countermarch, © HT co Ht sertol 

What is the fifth article? aa 


Being in column by iden to form on ‘the right 
or left into line of bat 


‘tHE MUSKET. 8 bal i 8.) 

How many principal protools are digenohe to a musket? 

Five. | 

What are they? 

‘The barrél; thé lock, thé stock, the | rammer, and 
the mountings. 
~ How many subordinate parts are there ? 

Nineteen. 

Name them. 

The upper band, middle. oe ‘tail band. swell, 
guard, swivels, small of the stock, butt, heel of the 
butt, toe or beak of the butt, “tric ger, blade’ of 


bayonet, shank of bayonet, socket, ¢ clasp, —o 
hammer, main: spring, ' and sling. » b ‘ 


“How many remaining parts’ are there? 
Ten. 


What are these? 

The upper, middle, and taileg pipe ; head of .1am- 
mer and ‘little:end, of same ;, the muzzle,. ‘breech, 
bore, sight, and tang. ¥186 





























‘tT 2LV Td 


ee 
Mx 


NoMa 


i 


ne, te 
ery a o 




















°$ ALVITId 






































f 
¥ i Te 
Kain ae ote 
if 


sich “deeb 


Ser Saabnindiaps 


SSP aAenoy 


Xi 

cee ee 
sy 

a See at tires, 





PLATE 4. 



























































BED. 





ry 
a 
1! 


15! sega’ 
hy Eee 
aie 








se 
eel 
_ 
=) 
oe 
om 
mat 
ns 
oe 
er 
pa 
nF 
—_ 
“ 


prea 
eden F 
— 
erst 
~~ 
—_ 
cid 
a4 
4] 
"if 
ii 
Siti}: 


oe 


l 


| 
Hh 


jc 











PLATE 6. 











Fig. 4. 







































































e. 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 





























44 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


NOMENCLATURE OF THE MUSKET. 


The principal parts of a musket.are—l. The 
barrel. 2. The lock. 38: The stock. 4. The ram- 
mer. 5. The mounting. These several parts will 
be understood by reference to the plate, where they 
are marked, as follows: } 

¥ ry 

. The upper-band. | . 

. The middle band. ~~ 

. The tail band. 

. ‘The barrel. 

. ‘Theswell. 

. The guard. 

. The swivels. 

. The small of the stock. 

| 9. The butt. | 

10. The heel of the butt. eH 
--11. The toe or beak of butt. i 

12. The lock. F 

18. The rammer. 

14. The trigger. 7 

“15. The blade of bayonet. | 
_ 16. The shank of bayonet. ie ae 
“17. The socket. : 
‘ 18. The clasp. mo 

19. The lock-plate. Al 

20. The hammer. fre 

21. The main spring. , 

22. The sling. 


CowdTIonpPpopnre 


There are also the upper, middle, and tail pipe; 
and butt of rammer and little end of same. 

The parts of “the barrel are designated as the. 
muzzle, breech, bore, sight, and tang. 


me 
Peete 


#8 ae. 3 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 45 


- 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 


- 





Tux object of this ‘his Heine the individual 
ahd progressive instruction of the recruits, the in-- 
structor never requires a movement to be executed | 
until he has given an exact explanation of it; and 
he executes, himself, the movement which he com: 
mands, 80 as to. joi example to precept. He ‘ac- 
customs the recruit to take, by himself, the position ’ 
which is explained—teaches him to rectify it only 
when required by hisiwant of intelligence—and 
sees that all the movements are ihe ged without 
precipitation. 

Each. movement ‘should “be® understood Helbhe 
passing to another. After they have been properly 
executed j in the order laid down in each lesson, the: 
instructor no longer confines himself’ to that order; 
on the contrary, he should change it, that he par 
judge of the intelligence of the men. 

The instructor allows the men to rest at the end 
of each part of the lesson, or oftener, if he thinks 
proper, gpecially at the commencement hae this 
purpose he commands—Resr. ~ 

At the command—Rxrsr, the soldier is no ‘anon 
required to preserve immobility, or fo remain in his 
place. If-the instructor wishes merely to relieve 
the attention of the recruit, he commands, im place 
—Rest ; the soldier is then not required to preserve 
his immobility, but he always ssa: ih one of his foot 
in its place. 

hen the instructor Wishes to ‘commence the i in- 
struction, he commands—Arrention 3 at this com- 
mand tlie soldier takes his position, remains motion: 
less, and fixes his attention. sGHS 8 ASHE 25 


Bei he: 


r 


46 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


The School of the Soldier will be divided into 
three parts: the first, comprehending what ought 
to be taught to recruits without arnts; the second, 
the manual of arms, the loadings, and firings; the 
third, the principles of alignment, the march by the 
front, the different steps, the march by the Aaink. 
_ the principles of wheeling, and those of change of 
direction ; also, long marches in double quick time 
and the run. |. : ) 

Each part, will. be divided into lessons for con- 
venience of instruction. ' 


COMMANDS. 


There are. three kinds. 

The command of caution, which is attention. 

The preparatory command, which indicates the 
movement which is to be executed.- ' 

The command of execution, such as march or halt, 
or, in the manual. of arms, the part of command’ 
which causes an execution. | 

The tone of command should be animated, dis- 
tinct;,and of a loudness proportioned to the number 
of men under. instruction. ‘eft 

The command—attention, is, pronounced at the 
top of the voice, dwelling on the last syllable. 

The command of eweeution will be- pronounced in 
a tone firm and brief... . a 

Commands of caution and the preparatory com- 
mands are herein, distinguished by ¢talzcs, those. of 
execution by CAPIPALS. | | | 

Those preparatory commands which, from their 
length, are difficult to be pronounced at once, must 
be divided into two or three parts, with an ascend- 
ing progression, in the tone of command, but always 
in such a manner that the tone of execution may 
be more energetic and elevated; the divisions 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. mie 


are indicated by a hyphen. . The parts .of com- 
mand which are places in a parenthesis are not 
prosshuced, Li 





PART aos 


This will be taught, if practicable, ‘to one recruit 
ata time’; but three or four may be united, when 
the number be great, compared with that. of the in- 
structors. In’ this.case the recruits will be placed 
inva single rank: at one pace from each other. In 
this A sei the recruits will be without arms. 


LESSON 1. | 
POSITION OF THE SOLDIER:—(PLATES 9 AND/10.) 


Heels on the same line, as near each other as the? 


conformation of the man will permit. 


The feet turned out equally, and forming with 


each other something less than a right angle. 
The knees straight without stiffness. 


The body erect .on the hips, 
inclining a little forward. 
The shoulders, square and 

- falling equally. 

The arms hanging natur- 
ally... 

The elbows near the body. | % 

The palm of the hand turned ‘4-4 
a little to the front, the little § 
Siiaer behind the seam of the 
pantaloons. 

The head erect and square 
Ni; sto, the ; front, abort con- 
: == straint. | 





Plate 9, without cqvering it. 








The chin near the stodk, SS 


48 | THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


fhe eyes fixed eiepighs to the front, and striking 
the ground about the distance of: fifteen paces. 
The instructor’ having given the recruit’ the 
Be Savy of the soldier without arms, will now teach: 
im the turning a: the nea and £76% He will 
command : 


feck Fain: Ri 0, ae 


At the wie right, the recruit will turn the a 

- gently, so’as to bring the inner corner of the left eye: 
in a line with the buttons of the coat, the eyes fixed 
on the line of the eyes of the men. in, or en 
to be in, the ‘same rank. ' y. 

At the second comiiiintid: the head will resume the 
direct or habitual position. ~ 

The movement of Byes—aer will bes executed 
by inverse means. . 

The instructor will take particular & care that the. 
movement of the head does not derange the square-— 
ness of the shoulders, which will. happen if the 
movement of the former be too sudden. _ 

In advanced stages of drill this command is given 
as Leight (or left) Dress, and is the gover ning prin- 
ciple of all alignments. 

“The object of turning thé head, is for the recruit 
to assure himself that he is.in line, when forming a 
portion of a line composed of six or more. 

On executing the order, if heshave but a glimpse 
“of the left cheek of the, second man from him, he 
will be in line; if he see too much of the side-face, 
he will be too far to the front; and if no portion 
of the cheek be seen, he is too far to the rear; in 
both cases the correction must be made by gradual 
movement. 

When the instructor shall wish the recruit to pass 
from the state of attention to that of ease, he will 
"command : | 


‘ 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 49 


Rest. re 
To cause a resumption of: the habitual position, 
the instructor will command: 
4; Attention. 2. SQUAD. 


At the first word, the recruit will fix his atten- 
tion; at the second, he will resume the prescribed 
position and steadiness. i 





LESSON ITI. 
FACINGS. 
Phcile to the right and left wratt be. siaantad in 
one time, or pause. The instructor will command: 
“1. Squad. 2. Right (or left)—F acz. 


At the second command, raise the right foot 
slightly, turn on the left heel, raising the toes a 
little, and then replace the right heel by the fide 
of the left, and on the same line. 





Plate 11. Plate 12. 


-Piate 11 shows this movement, the dotted lines 
b. ng the original position of the feet. Plate 12 
shows the position of the feet when. facing to the 


3 


50 ee THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


The full face to the rear (or front) will. be, exe- 
cuted in two times, or pauses. . The. instructor will 
command: | 


ot. Squad. 2, Avour—Facr. 


“At the word about, the recruit will turn on. the 
left heel, bring the left toe to. the front, carry the 
right foot to the rear, the hollow opposite to, and 
full three inches from, ‘the left heel, the feet square 
to each other. 

At the command “Face,” the soldier, raising the . 
points of the feet, or toes, and keeping the hams 
straight, will turn on both heels, and face to the 
rear, carrying back at the same time the Tight heel 
to the side of the Jeft. 





Plate 14. 


salle , a 5° 
THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 51 


The first movement is shown by diagram plates, 
lo and 14, the dotted lines showing the original. 
positions of the feet. Plates 15 and’ 16 show the 
completion of the movement. : 

In facing about, it will-be observable that solid- 
ity of movement is very. necessary. A wavering 
of the piece or throwing the body off the equilib 
rium tends to disarrange the entire movement. 

When the cartridge-box is secured to the waist: 
belt, the right hand will not be moved. 


| enpedihieetementiabeebeiainnntinel 


LESSON III, 
PRINCIPLES OF THE DIRECT STEP. 


The length of the direct step or pace, in common 
time, will be twenty-eight inches, reckoning from 
heel to heel, and in swiftness, at the rate of ninety 
in a minute. | Melt of 

The instructor, seeing the recruit confirmed) in 
his position, will explain to him the principle and 
mechanism of this step, placing himself six or seven 
paces from, and facing to, the recruit. He will him- 
_ self execute slowly the step, in the way of illustra- 

tion, and then command : | 


1. Squad—forward. 2. Common time. . 3: Maxcu, 


At the first command, the recruit will throw the 
weight of the body on the right leg, without bend- 
ing the left knee. sit et etal, 

At ‘the’ third’ command, he ‘will smartly, but: 
without a jerk, carry straight forward the left foot 
twenty-eight inches from the right, the sole near the 
ground, the ham extended, the toe a little depressed, 


~~ 


52 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


and, as also the knee, slightly turned out; he will, 
at the same time, throw the weight of the body 
forward, and plant flat the left foot, without shock, 
precisely at the distance where it finds itself from 
the right, when the weight of the body is brought 
forward, the whole of which will now rest on the 
advanced foot. The recruit will next, in like man- 
ner, advance the right foot and plant it as above, 
the heel twenty-eight inches from the heel of the 
left foot, and thus continue to. march without cross- 
ing the legs, or striking the one against the other, 
without turning the shoulders, and preserving always 
the face direct to the front. 

When the instructor shall wish to arrest the 
march, he will command: 


behie Squad. 2... Ant. 


At the second command, which will be given at 
the instant when either foot is coming to the ground, 
the foot in the rear will be brought up, and planted 
by the side of the other, without shock. 

The instructor will indicate, from time to time, to 
the recruit, the cadence of ‘the step by giving the 
command one at the instant of raising a foot, and 
two at the instant it ought to be planted, observing 
the cadence of’ ninety steps in a’ minute. This 
method will contribute greatly to impress upon the 
mind the two motions into which the step is natu- 
rally divided. oy ae | 

It is important that the instructor assure himself 
that the principles of the step are well observed, in 
order to correct-promptly all mistakes; for this pur- 
pose he will frequently throw himself ten or twelve 
paces to the front, when, if he do not see the sole 
of the shoe while the recruit is raising, advancthg, 
and planting his foot, nor observe any wavering of 


THE SOHOOL, MANUAL. : 53 


the shoulders he may be sure the movement, is 
properly performed. 

Common time will be employed only in the At 
and second parts of the School of the Soldier. As 
soon as the recruit has acquired steadiness, has be- 
come established in the principles of shouldered 
arms; and in the mechanism, length, and swiftness 
of the step in common time, he will. be practiced 
only in quick time, the double quick time, and the 
run. 

The principles of the step in quick time are the 
same as for common time, but its swiftness is at the 
‘rate of one hundred and ten steps per minute. 

The instructor wishing the squad to march in 
quick time, will command: 


1. Squad—forward. 2. Maxon. 





LESSON IV. 
PRINCIPLE OF THE DOUBLE QUICK STEP. 


The length of the double quick step is thirty: 
three inchés, and its swiftness at the rate of one 
hundred and sixty-five steps, per minute: 

The instructor wishing to! teach the recruits the 
principles and mechanism of the founie quick step, 
will command: 


1. Double quick step. 2. om baie 


_ At the first. command, the reeruit will raise his 
hands.to a level with his hips, the hands closed, the 
nails toward the body, the elbows to the rear. 

At the second command, he will raise to the front, 
his left leg bent, in order. to give to the knee the, 
EASA elevation, the part of the leg between the, 

and the instep vertical, the, toe depressed 5, he 


54 ae THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 

will then suprade his foot in its trite “position ; 
with the right leg he will execute what has just 
been prescribed for the left, and the alternate move- 
ment of the legs will be continued until the com- 
mand : 


1 Squad. 2, Haut. 


At the second command, the recruit will bring 
the foot which is raised by the side of the other, and, 
dropping at the same time his hands by his sidé, 
will resume the ale of the soldier without 
arms. 

The instructor, waits himself seven or eight 
paces from, and facing the recruit, will indicate the 
cadence by the commands one and two, given alter- 
nately at the instant each foot-should be brought 
_ to the ground, which, ‘at first, will be in common 
time, but its rapidity will be gradually augmented. 

. The recruit being sufficiently established in the 
principles of this’ step, the instructor will com- 
mand : 


5: Sila $8hnahd 2, Double quick. 3. Marcu. 


At the first command, the recruit will throw the 
weight of his body on the right leg. 

At the second command, he will sae his arms 
bent on a level with his hips. 

At the third command, he wili carry conan the 
left foot, the, leg slightly bent, the knee somewhat 
raidedaiorill plant his left foot, the toe first, thirty- 
three inches from the right, and with the right foot 
will then execute what has just been prescribed for’ 
the left. This alternate movement of the legs will 
take place by throwing the weight of the body on 
the foot that is planted, and by allowing a natural, ; 
oscillatory motion io the arms. . 


The double quick step may be executed with dif- 
ferent degrees of swiftness. Under urgent circum- 
stances, the cadence of this step may be increased 
to one hundred and eighty per minute. At this 
rate, a distance of four thousand yards would be 
passed over in about twenty-five minutes. 

_. The recruits will be exercised also in running. 

-The principles are the same as for the double 
quick step, the only difference consisting in a great- 
er degree of swiftness. 

It is recommended, in marching at double quick 
time, or the run,.that the men should breathe as 
much.as possible through the nose, keeping the 
mouth closed. Experience has proved that, by con- 
forming to this pringiple, a man can pass over a 
much longer Plata Dag: and with less fatigue. 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL, 55 


PART SECOND. 
j GENERAL RULES. 


The instructor will not pass the men to this sec- 
ond part until they shall be well established in the 
position of the body, and in the manner of marching 
at the different steps. 
- He will then unite four men, whom he will place 
in the same rank, elbow to elbow, and instruct 
them in the position of shouldered arms, as follows: 


LESSON TI. 
#4 PRINCIPLES OF SHOULDERED ARMS. 


The recruit being placed as explained in, the first 
lesson of the first part, the instructor will cause 
him to bend the right arm slightly, and place the 
piece in it, in the following manner—plate 17: 

The piece in the right. hand—the barrel nearly 


56 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


vertical and resting in the hollow of 
the shoulder—the guard to the front, 
the arm hanging nearly at its full 
length near the body ; the thumb and 
fore-finger embracing the euard; the 
remaining fingers closed tovether, and 
4, \ grasping the swell of the stock just 
| AY .| under the cock, which rests on the lit- 
“’y, \ tle finger. 
Recruits are fredudntly seen with 
* natural defects in the conformation of 
the shoulders, breast and hips. These 
the instructer will labor to correct in 
the lessons without arms, and after- 
wards, by steady endeavors, so that 
_.the appearance of the pieces, in the 
== same line, may be uniform, and this 
Plate li. without constraint to the men in their 
positions. 
_ The instructor will have occasion to remark that 
recruits, on first bearing arms, are liable to derange 
their, position by lowering the right shoulder and 
the right hand, or by sinking the hip and spreading 
‘out the elbows. 

He will be careful to correct all these faults by 
continually rectifying the position; he will some- 
times take away the piece to replace it the better, 
- he will avoid fatiguing the recruits too much in the 
beginning, but labor by degrees to render this posi- 
tion so natural and easy that they may remain in it 
a long time without fatigue. 

Finally, the instructor will take oreat care that 
the piece, at a shoulder, be not carried too high nor 
too low; if too high, the right elbow would spread 
out, the soldier would occupy too much space in 
his rank, and the piece be made to waver; if too 








THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 57 


low, the files would be too much closed, the soldier 
would not have the necessary space to handle his 
piece with facility, the right arm would become too 
much fatigued, and would draw down the shoulder. 

‘The instructor, before passing to the second les- 
son, will cause to be repeated the movements of 


eyes right, left and front, and the facings. 


- 


LESSON II. 
MANUAL OF ARMS. 


The manual of arms will be taught to four meu, 
placed, at first, in one rank, elbow to elbow, and 
afterwards in two ranks. | 

Kach command will be executed in one time (or 
pause), but this time will be divided into motions. 
the better to make known the mechanism. | 

The rate (or swiftness) of each motion, in the 
manual of arms, with the exceptions herein indicated, 
is fixed at the ninetieth part of a minute; but, in 
order not to fatigue the attention, the instructor 
will, atvfirst, look more particularly to the execu- 
tion of the motions, without requiring a nice observ- 
ance of the cadence, to which he will bring the re- 
cruits progressively, and after they shall have be- 
come a little familiarized with the handling of the 
piece. } | 

As the motions relative to the cartridge, to the 
rammer, and to the fixing and unfixing of the bayo- 
net, cannot be executed at the rate prescribed, nor 
even with a uniform swiftness, they will not be sub- 
jected to that cadence. The instructor will, how- 
ever, labor to cause these motions t® be executed 
with promptness, and, above all, with regularity. 

The last syllable of the command will decide the 
brisk execytion of the first motion of each time (or 


I 


58 THE. SCHOOL. MANUAL. 


pause). The commands, two, three, and four, will 
decide the brisk execution of the other motions. As 
soon as the recruits shall well comprehend the posi- 
tions of the several motions of a time, they wiil. be 
taught to execute the time without resting on its 
different motiong ; the mechanism of the time will, 
nevertheless, be observed, as well togive.a pe rfect: 
use of the piece, as to avoid the sinking of, or slur- 
ring over, either of the motions, 

The manual of arms will be taught in the follow- 
ing progression; the instructor will command: 


Support—Arms (Plate 18.) | 
One time and three motions, 


First motion.—Bring the piece, with 
the right hand, perpendicularly to the 
front.and between the eyes, the barrel 
to the rear; seize the piece with the | 
left. hand at the lower band, raise this 
hand as high as the chin, and seize the 
piece at. the same time with the right 
hand four inches below the cock. 

Second motion.—Turn the piece with 
the right hand, the barrel to the front; 
carry the piece to the left shoulder, 
and pass the fore-arm extended on the 
breast between the right hand and the 
cock; support. the cock against..the 
left forerarm, the left hand resting on 
the right, breast. 

Third motion.—Drop the right hand 
by the side. 
= When the instructor may wish to 

" give repose in this position, he will 
Come t+ 2 ol 





Plate 18. 


cd 


“THE; SCHOOL) MANUAL: 59) 


ssoniod, camel baa ads.,daie 


od tis eotnmand, the recruits will al up 
alta the vight’ hand’ té°the handle of the piece 
(small of the stock), when they will not be required 
- to presérve silence, or steadiness of position. 

When “the instructor may wish the recruits to 
pass from this position’ ri oe no Sager 5 and steadi- 
ness, he will comniand :' - 


" Aitention—Squan. | 


At the second word, the recruits will resume the 
Pe ame of the third motion of support arms. 


* Si pulder — AWS Pate 17, i 
One time; and three motions, 


Piet motion. —Grasp: the piece with the right 
hand under, and against: ihe left fore-arm ; seize it 
with the left hand’at the lower band, the thumb _ 
extended; detach the piece slightly from the shoul- : 
der, the left fore-arm along the stock. 7 

Second. motion. —Carry the piece voxtidallly to the 
right shoulder with both hands, the rammer to the 
front, change the position of the right hand go as to 
embrace the guard with the thumb and fore-finger, 
slip the left hand to the height of the shoulder, the 
fingers extentied and, joined, the right arm neatly 
straight. | | | 
| lg ci motion. Drop the left hand quickly by the 
side | 


bs -qitoon ek tare 19.) 
One time and two motions. ee 


Riess matin +-With. the right hand bring’ ,the 
piece,erect before the centre of the body, the ram- 
‘Amer to the front; at the same’ time seize the:piege 


. @«@ 


60 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


with the left hand half-way between 
the guide sight and. lower band, the. 
thumb extended along the bar rel, and 
against the stock, the fore-arm hori- 
zontal and resting against the body, 
! _ the hand as high as the elbow. 

ie Second, motion. —Grasp the small of , 
K A, \ the stock with the right hand, below. 

Liz.g and against the guard. 


Shoulder — ARMS, 
One time and two motions. 


First motion.—Bring the piece to 
the right shoulder, at the same time 
change the position of the right hand 
so as to embrace the guard with the 
== ==— thumb and fore-finger, slip up the. 

Plite 19. left hand to the height of the shoulder,, 
the fingers extended and joined, the right arpa near-. 
ly straight. 

Second motion.-~—Drop the left hand amily by the 
side. 





Order — ARMS. 
One time. and two motions, 


First motion. —Seize . the piece briskly with the’ 
left hand near the upper band, and detach it slightly: 
from the shoulder with the right hand; loosen the 
grasp of the right hand, lower the piece with -the* 
left, re-seize the piece with the right, hand above 
the lower band, the little, finger in the rear of the 
barrel, the butt about four inches from the ground, . 
the right hand supported against the ‘hip, “drop: the 
left hand by the side. If the rifle musket'is used, 
the piece will be seized by the left hand’ a ‘little 


~ 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 61, 


Bite the middle band, and it will be seized by the 
right hand, just above ‘the lower band. 

Second motion.—Let the. piece. slip through the 
right hand to the ground by opening - slightly the 
fingers, and take the position about to be described. 


POSITION OF ORDER ARMs—(Plate 20.) 


The hand low, the barrel between 
the thumb and fore-finger extended | 
along the stock; the other fingers ex- | 
tended and joined: the muzzle about 
two inches from the right shoulder ; 
‘the rammer in front; the toe (or beak) 
of the butt against, and in a line-withy 
the toe of the right foot, the barrel 
perpendicular. 

When the instructor may wish to 
give repose in this position, he will 
command : 


Rest. 


At this command, the°recruits will ===" 
not be required to Brobenvy silence or 
steadiness. 

When the instructor may fad the recruits t» 
pass from this position to ‘that of silence and steadi- 
ness, he we command : 





hs Aitentinnca 2, SQUAD. 


At the second word, the recruits wil resume the 
position of order arms. 


/ Shoulder—Anms. 
One time and two motions. 
First motion. Raise the piece vertically: with the 


62 tHE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


right hand to the height of the right breast, ‘and op- 
posite the shoulder, the elbow: close to ‘the body: 
seize the piece with the left hand below the tight, 
and drop quic kly the right hand to grasp the piece. 
at the swell of the stock, the thumb and fore-finger 
embracing the, guard; press the piece Against the 
shoulder with the left hand, the right arm nearly 
straight. 

Second motion. ~-Drop the: loft hand: -avickly be 
the_side.. | 


| LOAD IN NINE TIMES, 
Abi Loab: + +r ay 
One time and one ‘motion. 


Grasp the. piece off the left 
_ hand as high, as. the right elbow, 
and bring ‘it vertically opposite, 

_ the middle of the body, shift. the 
right hand to the upper band, 
place the butt between the feet, 
the ;barrel, to ‘the, front 3 seize’ it 
_ with ‘theleft hand near the muzzle; 
which should be three inches ‘from: 
. the body; carry the right haud ‘to 
‘the. cartridge-box.. . If the.) rifle, 

musket is used, the, right hand, 
_ will be shifted to just below the 

ae upper band. “The muzzle will be 
Plate 21. -,. eight inches from the body .-+Plate 
5s 21 An Wivs 10 MIieOG 


ae : 
ra : > 





2, Hepes. Claeriuieit 
One time and one motion. 


Seize the cartridge with the thumb and next two 
fingers, and place it between the teeth. 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 63 


JAU AA 5° GU 
. Lear—CartRIvGE. 
ra dius aia: one pa chy 


lind, the paper to the powder, hold the cartridge 
‘iat between the thumb and first two fingers, 
near the top; in this position place it in front of 
and near the mauzale, the heck of the hand to the 
front. 


4, Charge—Cananncr. iy 
‘One tame and one motion, 


ny inky the powder into. the bar- o 
rel; ‘disengage the ball from the?” | 
paper with the right hand and the ~ 
thumb and first two fingers of the 
left: insert it ihto the bore, the °° 5 
pointed end uppermost, and press it 
down with. the right thumb ;. Seize 
the head of the rammer with the 
thumb and fore-finger of the right 
hand, the other fingers closed, ‘the 
elbows ‘near, the body. —Plate 22. 





5. ‘Draw.-Ranwer. Saad sda od’ 
“One time and’ three: motions. aati gdd'os 


“First vintdone tale draw. the. rammer, - 
by extending the right arm. Plate 23. 
steady, it in this position, with the left 
thumb ; grasp the rammer near the muzzle 
with the Tight hand, the little finger up- = 
permost, the nails to the front, the thumb 
extended along the rammer. ~ Fee 

‘Second motion. ~-Olear the ratmmer fP om yo" 
the ‘pipes by ‘again extending’ the ‘arni: 
the’ rammer ‘in the: pe moe 2 BOR of * ‘the : 


~ 


pipes.—-Plate QeuoE wo faN Sst 33.0 





64 - PHE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


Third motion.—Turn the rammer, the 
little'end of the rammer passing neat 
the left shoulder ; place the head of the 
rammer on the ‘ball, the back of the 
hand to the front. 


6. Hasit_Clanvespos! 
One time and one motion. 


Insert the rammer as far as the right, 
and steady it In? this position with the 
thumb ofthe left hand; seize the ram- 
mer at the small end with the thumb and 
| fore-finger of the right hand, the back of 
I\, the hand to the front; press the ball 
| } home, the elbows near the body. art Ale 
125. ) 





q: Behuth-i Rina adi 


One time and three motions. 





re First motion.—Draw the rammer half 
Plate 2. way out, and steady it in this position 
with the left thumb ; - grasp it near the muzzle with 
the right hand, the little finger uppermost, the nails 
to the. front, the thumb along the rammer ; clear the 
rammer from the bore by extending the arm, the 
nails to the front, the" rammer in the prolongation 
of the bore. 

Second motion. bisay 9 the rammer, the head of the 
rammer passing near the left shoulder, and insert 
it in the pipes until the right hand reaches the 
muzzle, the nails to the front. 

| Third. motion.—Force. the rammer home by plac- 
ing the little finger of the right: hand on the head 
ofithe rammer; pass the.left hand down the barrel 
to the extent of the arm, w'thout Sopreering the 
shoulder. 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL, 65 


8. PRrIMe. 
One time and two motions. 


First motion.—With the 
left hand raise the piece till 
“ the hand is as high as the 
eye, grasp the small of the 
stock with the right hand ; 
half face to the right; place, 
at the same time, the right 
foot behind and at right 
angles with the left; the 
hollow of the right foot 
against the left heel. Slip 
the left hand down to the 
~ lower band, the thumb along 
the stock, the left elbow 
against the body; bring 

I the piece to the right side, 
the butt) below the vicht fore-arm—the small of the 
stock against the. body and two inches below the 
right breast, the barrel upwards, the muzzle on a 
level with the eye.—-Plate 26. : 

Second motion.—Half cock with the thumb of the 
right hand, the fingers supported against the guard 
and the sual of the stock—remove the old cap with 
one of the fingers of the right hand, and with the 
thumb. and fore-finger of the same hand, take a cap 
. from the pouch, place it on the nipple, and press it 
down with the thumb ; seize the small of the stock 
with the right hand. 


9. Shoulder-—ARwms. 


One time and two motions. 





Plate 26. 


First motion.—Bring the piece to the. right 


66 THE, SCHOOL, MANUAL. 


shoulder and support,jt,there with the left hand, 

_ face to the front; bring the right heel to the side 
of, and on a line with the left ; grasp the piece with 

the right hand, as alae in the —— se eal 3 

2 J “4 

| ‘Second ‘motion. brs mR these hand 1 aya by 

the side. oft qae | Sain AN 


Higii ori; 7 Buaipy, : “SAk | 
bb time and three motions 


Pog. motion. eal the piece sligh tigha with the 
right hand, making a.half. fi ace to the right on 

left. heel; carry the ae foot to the rear, and 
place. it at right, angles to the left, the hollow. "lot it 
opposite to and, against, the left heel ; dea the 


PURER, with the left; hand at. the lower ban i be de-. 






+ Seraatd ‘Motton oh ee down the piece with both 
hands, | the barrel upward, the left, thumb extended 
along. the stock, the, butt; below the right: fore-arm, 
the small. of the stock against. the body aud two 
inches below the right breast, the muzzle as high as 
the eye, the left. elbow against the side; place at’the © 
same time the right thumb on the head of, the cock, 
the.other fingers under and against’ the guard. 

Third Motion.—Cock, and: seize the piece at the 
small of the ee without Meier 3h. wie a 
“ — butt. a 


hf s 4 
; dy ihe (PY On 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. | 67 


ene time and ‘one motion.” 





tT Raise dhe pibes with 
—==— both hands, and. sup- 
tie 2! - oport: the} butt against 
the right shoulder 3: the 
left elbow down, the 
right as high as the 
shoulder’; ‘incline the. 
head upon the butt, so 
. that the right eye may 
. perceive quickly the 
_, notch of the hausse, the 
ee front sight, and the ob- 
- ject aimed at; the left 
—— | » +» eye. closed, the right 
F Plate $5 dh fies | thumb. extended aang 
the stock, the Varela ees on the trigger. |, ! 

When recruits are formed into two ranks to exe- 
cute the firings,¢he front rank men will raise a lit- 
tle less the right,elbow,,in..order to, facilitate the 
aim of the rear rank men. 

‘The rear‘rank' men, in aiming, : fal each) carry 
the right foot about eight inches ‘to ‘the right, and: 
towards the left heel of the man next on the right, 
ee the oer age ye the aah forward. 


dis 


One time aa one motion. 


Press the fore-finger against' the trigger, fire, 
without lowering. or turning. the. head, and remain 
in this position. 

. Instructors will be:careful to ‘observe’ when the 
men fire, that they) aim’ at some distinct object,-and 


" a ; ° " 
ty ry rz g or . 
> UOT Litd 


ta 4 : : 
LB is TOs 4 { 


68 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


that the barrel beso directed that,.the line of fire 
and the line of sight be in the same vertical plane. 
They will often cause the firing to be executed on 
ground of different inclinations, in order to accéus- 
tom the men to: fire at objects either above or befow 
them. | 


- LOAD. 


One time and one motion, = 
“Bring down the. piece with both hand! at the 
same time face to the front and take the position of 
load as indicated, (plate 21). Each rear rank man 
will bring his right foot by the side of the left. 
_ The men being in this position, the instructor will 
cause the loading to be continued by the commands 
and means prescribed j in the first motion of load. ~ 
‘Tf, after firing, the instructor, should not’ wish 
the recruits to reload; he will command : 


eh | 
_ Shoulder —ARMS, 
ven time and: one tide EEO M 


-Throw..up) the -piece briskly with dn left hand 
énd resume the position of. shoulder arms, at the 
same time face: to-the front; turning on the left heel, 
and bring the rightjheel on aline with the lefts os. 

To accustom the recruits to wait for the command 
fire, the instructor, when they are in the position of 
aim, will command. ’ 


ooh 49a Cs! » Recover— Anus 
| One tine and one motion 


At the first part of the «command, withdraw the 
finger from the trigger; atthe: command’ arms, Te= 
take the position of the ‘third motion of ready. 


THE SCHOOL “MANUAL. 69 . 


The recruits being in ‘the position of the third 
motion of ready, if the instructor should wish to 
bring them to a shoulder, he will command : 


Shoulder-—ARMS, 
One time and one motion, 


At the command shoulder, place the thumb upon 
the cock, the fore-finger on the trigger, half 
cock, and seize’ the small of the. stock with the 
right’ hand. At the command arms, bring up the 
piece briskly to the right shoulder, seo retake’ the 
péstHbA ue shoulder arms. 


" Rewanate oN Loapine AND. Firiye. 7 


Whend?ér the loadings and firings are to Ba ex- 
ecuted, and the cartridge- boxes are slung upon the 
waist-belt, the instructor. will cause them to be 
vrought to the front. : 
oak ha dk primer be used, the command will 
he— 


=! 


HH) -Bnag 10: Load in eight times. 


And the eighth command will be shoulder arms, ‘and 
executed from return rammer. in one ‘time and~ two 
motions, as follows: ine - 


First Motioni2-Raise the piece with the left band, 
and take the position of shoulder arms. | 


Second Motion, Fi ‘the left hand ghidkly by 
the,,side. : 


“The nen Being at shoulder’ arms when the in- 
structor * shall wish to’ fet ay Sea ah aon com 
mand : vic 


70 THE SCHOOL MANUAL, 


| Hia—BaYONET.) | abi 19: i ee 


“One tume and three moticns. me ‘ia Ce 


; Ma 


First Motion: —Grasp_ the, piece, with the left Baa 
at the height of the shoulder, and detach it slightly 
from the shoulder with the right ‘hand. 


Second Motion.—Quit .the,.piece, withthe; ight 
hand, lower|it with the left, hand,, opposite the mid- 
dle of the -body,-and) place. the; butt;-between the 
feet .without’ shock,; the,.rammer; to. the, rear;, the 
barrel yertical, the muzzle three’ sinches. from,.the 
body; seize it with the righthand, at the upper, 
band, and carry the left hand reversed to the han- 
dle of the bayonet. If the rifle musket he used the 
- barrel will be inclined forward, the muzzle eight 
inches from the body, and the: lett, hand. ON ai to 
the handle, of the bayonet. _—Plate. Oe 


Pherd Motvon. i the, bayonet 
_. from the scabbard and fix iton the ex- 
 tremity of the barrel ; seize the piece 

4A\\ with the left hand, the arm extended: 

the right hand ait'thel ‘upper band, If 
rq the rifle musket be used, the clasp will 

Pll... be turned as soon as. the Pa is fixed 

af) upon the barrel. | 


Ls +b SS 


7 gest 
q Blasiint- eR Jens 

; i> “i “3 Le M if £) | f ; t | if ; ; 

ni One time and two motions. 





— First Motion. alison the piece ‘with 
a PS 28. {the left-hand, and place it;,against the 
right shonlder,: the rammer) to; the front. seize the 
piece at the same time with the right hand at 


is woh s Sate oes: ae a8 


the, swell, of bbedlps jthe, thumb, aud. foresfinger 
embracing the snp rd. ane arm neayly extended, 
~ Second Motion,—Dxop, briskly, the left hand by the 
SMC. fic eeme band dol edt qorU-— norte, buossd 


Charge BsxOnet. bia odt 
LA-Sanyt 
One ee ‘and pons Bai 


First Motion. gia Cg Se i ati shitly with the » 


tight) ‘hand,:and make»a ‘half\face to the righ 
the left heel; placé» the hollow: ofthe right 
opposite to and three inchés ‘from’ the | ‘ éel; the 
feet square $ seize! the piece at the’ same: til 

the left‘hand ailittle above the:lower bak 
battog, basd jitgit ‘sd’F bavory 


tidt Gee od? biod 6s fliw qu oil Pee 
— - sa ga patible aie ee em B 
Z ator down. the piece vith] 
6.08 B%s _;dands, the barrel upper- . 
most, the left \elhow 
against the boas seize 






io 
- ss Za 
Ss 






7 





i ha time, Wi with 
sn hand, eh h wil 
ve ae be a port tedag gain nst th 
ri "ROT OT ip; 1 16 | bint 0 “the 
eBA ‘didn ey T EE) P 


Hisoq’ edt nto ai as aot Bodine the 


at the 
fone DD aetpeh MOD Sai 


LTD 
"Plats 29, -i- LOT Bel ct wd 
0 Shoulder—+A RMS. 
text oF as Oe tid sion hem dew" 


Tg if imyx49 Do ott 

“Pi =f in inst Ne up We, piece shay wit 
the, left, Magen to, the { rey ie Me 
the, right, shoulder. sien ) the’, tor 


one 


= 


72 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


turn the right hand’so ag to embrace the guard, 
slide the left hand to the height of the shoulder, 
the right hand nearly extended. 

Second Motion. —Drop the left hand smartly by 
the side, 


Trail—ARMs. 
One time and two motions. 


First Motion.—The same as the’ first 
motion of order arms. 

{Second Motion. oa Tuichine the fiadiite 
slightly to the'front, the butt to ‘the 
rear and about four |inches from the 
ground. The right hand supported 
at the hip, will so hold the piece that 
the rear ranksmen may not touch with 
their bayonets the.men in the front 
rank.—(Plate 30.) 


| Shoulder— ARMS. r 





= At the command shoulder, raise the 

Plate 30. piece perpendicularly in the right 
hand, the little finger.in the rear of the barrel; at 
the command arms, execute what has been pre- 
scribed for the shoulder from the position of order 
arms. 


Unfiz—Bayonet. 
One time: and three motions. 


First and second Motions.—-The same as the first 
and second motions of fix bayonet, except that, at 
the end of the second command, the thumb of the 
right hand will be placed on the spring of the sabre- 
bayonet, and the left hand will] ‘embrace the handle 


THE SCHOOL’ MANUAL, 73 


of the sabre-bayonet and the barrel, the thumb ex- 
tended along the blade. If the rifle musket is used, 

at the end of the second command turn the clasp of 
the bayonet by pressing against it the thumb of the 
left hand, and then grasp the socket of the bayonet 
with ‘the left hand, the shank resting between the 
thumb and for efinger, the thumb pointed up. | 

- Third Motion.—Press the thumb of the right hand 
on the spring, wrest off the sabre-bayonet, turn it 
to the right, the edge to the front, lower the guard 
until it touches the right hand, which will seize the 
back and the edge of the blatle between the thumb 
dnd first two fingers, the other fingers holding the 
piece ; change the position of the hand without quit- 
ting the: handle, return the sabre-bayonet to the 
scabbard, and seize the piece with the left hand, the 
arm extended. If the rifle musket i is used, the fol- 
lowing will be the method, viz. 

Third Motion.—W rest off the bayonet, turn it to 
the right, bringing the point of the bayonet down; 
change ‘the. position of the hand without quitting 
hold of the shank of the socket, return the bayonet 
to the scabbard, and. seize the piece with the left 
hand, ‘the’ arm extended. 


Shoulder —A RMS. 
- Onetime and two motions. 


First Motion.—The sqme as the. first motion from 
fix bayonet. 

Second Motion —The same as the second motion 
from fix bayonet. f 


Secure—A RMS. 
One time and three motions. 


First Motion._-The same as the first motion of 


74 THE, SCHOOL, MANUAL, 


support, arms, except with, the. right, anand. (9820 the 
Paege at the. small, of. the, stocks, »f6.6¢-oncks 

., Second Motions--Eurn the. piece. oat both fatiine : 
she. barrel, to; the front; bring: it, opposite..the' left 
shoulder, the buttjagainst the hip, the left hand at 
the lower band, \the; lomo as,high ,as! the chin and ~ 
extended, on, the| ramm 13 the piece).erect ,and ,de- 
tached, from, the shoal i the: left: forearm against 

me agai | 4. ott 
~~ ¢g wel.» eis ve Motion, ent a iematens ‘the 
eeteces pass: it. cunder. the. left; arm, 
the left hand remaining at; the low-' 
y er, band, the:thumb,,on the rammer. 
Wo AW to prevent itfrom sliding. out, the, 
Gad wk\-dittle finger. resting,,against the 
; of hip; the. right; hand. falling. at. the. 

; Same, dame iby. othe: pide: itt ap 31s, 


to oe 
ChEGFLRL 






I 


dine time and three 1 motions rBiD 

9: ig inst ‘Motion. jaltuet ‘shes piece 

ee with the left) hand, and oseize it’ 

hoc acta with the right hand. at the small 

of the stock. Thé piece erect and detached from 

the shoulder, the, butt against thewhip, the left fore- 
arm along the piece. 


“Second! Motion.-'The Same 4s the second hott ros 


bihdad 


: *. . 4 D 
, - - 7 . ~ o , 

% cory? a Ger * ; ‘, . Aw es 

we VS MIS SS't.ii.3 S'S Wand FTL : WAT 


THE, SCHOOL, MANUAL. hb 


Right shoulder shift-Axms. 
One time tnd two eg 


9 “ip ii ‘notion. “Delach: the. piece, Sees, 
“trom the » shoul der, with the, right .hand, and seize it 
Ww 16. left, between, the. lower,, nd and guide- 
‘sight, raise the piece, the, left, eo th height of 
the shoulder and four dnehes from it; plage, at the 
same time, the right h hand on the bi tt, the ‘beak be- 
‘tWeen the first two. TREE Bact the. ot ot her tle mpeers 
under the. butt. plate, “aia vail 
“Second Motion.—-Quit the; ces maid ciety han 
raise and place the.piece, on,the xight should tec 
the. right han¢ the. lock plate, upward 5 7 let” ll at 
the same, time ‘the left b heen by the, La 


Pie 7f b: 
Sa wy. 


| Shoulder— Aras : z 


mri 


re 
bin 


t x 4 
One diame and two motions, . a, 


| Pirst “Motion. Lipa thier piece perpendicularly 
bi extending the right’ arm: tovits full ‘length, the 
rammer -‘tothe front at the’ same time seize the 
piece with, the, left, hand between_ the, dower Rend 
and guide sight., 4; ~. t edt of | 
 » {Second Motion: Quit the batt vibe ths Micht isms 

which wilh immediately.embrace the guard, lower 

the piece to the position \of; shoulder, es slide up 
the left hand to the height of the shoulder, thei fin-' 
gers extended and closed Drop, the left hand by 
the side. | 

The men beifid’ at support arms; the instructor 
- wilbssometinies cause :piecessto be brought to the 
right shoulder,:«:To this:effect he: will: seas rpm 2 


De yvolea 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


Right shoulder shift—Arms. 
One .time.and.two. motions. 


first Motion. —Seize the . piece 
f ‘with the right hand, below and near 
/ the left fore-arm, place the left hand 
/ under the butt, the heel of the butt 
between the first two fingers. 
Second Motion.—Turn the piece 
~ with the left hand, the lock plate up- 
- ward, carry it to the right shoulder, 
the left hand still holding the butt, 
the muzzle elevated; hold the piece 
g\,\\ in this position ‘and place the right 
4) 9 hand upon the ‘butt, as is prescribed, 
“ery and let fall the left hand by the 
side. —Plate 32. : 


Support—ARus. 


One time and two motions. 
es First Motion.—The same as the 
Platese. «first motion of shoulder arms. 


Second Motion.—Turn the piece with both hands, 
the barrel to the front, carry it opposite the left 
shoulder, slip the right hand to-the small of the 
stock, -place the left fore-arm extended on the 
breast, as is prescribed, and let fall the right haud 
by the side. | 





Arms—AT WILL. 
One time and one motion: 


o At this command, carry the piece at pleasure on 
either shoulder, with one or: both hands, the muzzle 
elevated. | 


THE ‘SCHOOL MANUAL. TT 


Shoulder —Axus. 
One time ddd one motion. 


At this command, retake quickly the position of 
shoulder arms. | 

The recruits being at ordered arms, when the in- 
structor shall wish to cause the pieces to be placed 
on the ground, he will command: i 


 Ground—ARMs. 
One time and two motions. 


First Motion. 
--Turn the piece 
with the right 
hand, the barrel 
to the left, at 
the same time 
seize the car- 
tridge box with 
ey | EE the left hand, 
Plate 33. _ bend the body, 
Lavine the left foot, the heel opposite the lower 
band; lay the piece on the ground with the right 
hand, the toe of the button a line with the right 
toe, the knees slightly bent, the right heel raised. 
~ Plate 33. | 7 
Second Motion.—Rise up, bring ‘the left foot by 
the side of the right, quit the cartridge box with 
the left hand,’ and drop the hands by the side. 


Raise— ARMS. 





“One time and two motions. 


First Motion.—Seize the cartridge box withthe 
left hand, bend. the body, advance “the left. foot, op- 
posite the lower. band,.and seize the piece with the 
right hand. 


8 THE /SCHOOL! MANUAI 


Second Motion.—Raise-thel: piece, brir.ging the left 
foot. by the side. ba the right; turn, the piece with 
‘the right hand, Te é rammer to the front; at the 
‘same time quit the cartridge box with wise left eed, 
pees ree ae hand hr the —_ 


aura f py BE 


ninles cE “ENbencriON ‘OF, Anus, ae are 
The recruits being at. ordered arms, and having 
the bayonet in the scabbard, if the instructor wishes 
to cause “ae ae of arms, he vil command : 
hw 
o Inspection—ARMS. 


One time and tivo motions, pad 


“Pirst Motion. —Seize the piece with the left hand 
below. and near the upper band, carry it with both 
hands opposite ‘the middle of the. body, the-butt be- 
tween the feet, the rammer. to the rear, the barrel 
yertical, the muzzle. about three. inches from the 
body ; (should the rifle musket be used, the muzzle 
will | be. ‘about eight inches, from. the body); carry 
the left, hand reversed to the bayonet, draw it from 
the. scabbard and fix it on the, barrel; grasp the 
piece with the left hand below and near the, upper 
band, seize the rammer with the thumb and fore- 
finger of the right hand. bent, the oH, ane 
closed. 

Second. Motion. “ “Draw ‘he tammer, as has. been 
explained in loading, and let it glide to the bottom 
of the bore, replace thé piece with the left hand 
opposite the right shoulder, and retake the position 
of ordered arms. 

olThe instructor will then inspect. ‘in suceession the 
piece of each recruit, in passing along’ the front of 
the rank. Hach, as the instructor reaclies' ‘hit will 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 79 


raise smartly his piece with his right: Aa Seize it 
with? the: left between théOlower bandvand Suide 
sight, the lock to the front, the left hand at_the 
height of the chin, the piéce opposite’ to ‘the left 
eye; the instructor will take it with the right hand 
at the handle; and, after. inspecting it, will zeturn. 
it to. the recruit, who will’ receive "i back with the 


721k 


bast 


arms. s 
"Wike the’ instructor cat dae 5 HhedBe aged app | 
recruit will retake the position prescribed. at. the, 
command inspection, return the rammer, unjfiz the 
bayonet, and resume the position, of ordered arms. | 
lf, instead of inspection of arms, the instructor 
should merely wish: to: conte’ p iyoHetE t to’ ‘be fixed, 
he diag command : Wen 


i’ Fic—Baxonam \ 


Take. the wee ‘indicated, fix bayonets as) has 
been. explained, and: apmnediatedyernnaune ; the: rose , 
tion of ordered.arms..> 5. 
df itbeothe wish of; the inatructor, dice Pauls 

to ascertain. whethes the sia ames iss riser sao 
ng will command : MIBVDE I 11 a vietanist! } 


r?v4 
r] {hj {7 yF2 "7 


‘goat ae relia d 

Put the rammer in the barrel, as eee has eXx- 
plained above, and penumedigteny retake the position 
ofeordered arms... ; 

The instructor, for. the purpose ‘stated, can. il 
the rammer by. the small end, and spring, At, in, the, 
barrel, or cause each recruit to make it ring in the 
barrel. _ 

Hach recruit, after the instrnctor passes him, will 
return rammer, and resume the position of ordered 
arms. 


80 THE SCHOOL MANUAL, 


= 
THE FOLLOWING . INSTRUCTION: IS TO BE GIVEN 
TO RECRUITS WITHOUT REGARD TO! ARMS, » 


When, after some days: of exercise,in the manual 
of arms, the four men shall well be established in 
their use, the instructor will always. terminate. the 
lesson. by marching the men for some time in one; 
rank, and at one pace apart, in common quicktime, 
in order to confirm them more and more in the 
mechanism of the step ; he will also teach them to 
mark time and to change step, which will be ex- 
ecuted in the following manner: 


To mark time. 


The four men marching in the direct step, the. 
instructor will command: i ies thas 


1. Mark time. 2: Maron. 


~Atthe second command, which will be given at _ 
the instant a foot'is coming to the ground, the re- 
cruits will make a semblance of marching, by 
bringing the heels by the side of each other, and 
observing the cadence of the step, by raising each’ 
foot alternately without advancing. | 

The instructor, wishing the direct step to be re- 
sumed, will command: 


1.. Forward. 2. Marcu. 


At the second command, which will be given as 
prescribed above, the recruits will retake the step 
of twenty-eight inches. . 


. To change step. 
The of being in march, the instructor. will 
command: re 


» 


THE SCHOOL. MANUAL. es 


1. Change step. 2. Maron. 


At the second command, which will be given at 
the instant either foot is coming to the ground, 
bring the foot which is in rear by the side of that 
which is in front, and step off again with the foot 
which was in front. 


Lo march backward. 


The squad being at a halt, if the instructor should 
wish to march it in the back step, he will command : 


1. Squad backward. 2. Guide left (or right). 
3. Marcu. 


The back step willbe executed’ bythe step of 
fourteen inches to the rear, _ 

The instructor, in this step, will be watchful that 
the men do not lean on each other. — 

As the march to the front in quick time should 
only be executed at shouldered arms, the instruc- 
tor, in order not to fatigue the men too much, 
and also:to; prevent. negligence in, gait and position, 
will halt the squad from time to time, and cause 
arms to be ordered. 

In marching at double quick time, the men will 
always carry huis pisos on the r2ght shoulder or at 
atraud. This rule ds general. Hoth 

If the instructor shall wish the pieces carried at a 
trail he will give the command trail arms, before 
the command double quick. If, on the, contrary, 
this command be not given,.the men will shift their 
pieces to the right shouldér at the command’ double 
quick. In either case, at the command halt, the 

4% 


89 TH 86r00n MANTAL!” 


men will bring their pieces'to. the position of eee: 
der. arms. this rude ¢ is generale: 


Di ag 4 9th oF efinOD Al soot you 1kg iipient. ort 
Fie e BR : «x4 e, 208, Bee 
G ; Aw aa A | 
todk its Wa To load in four tines, | ef pt 
3 tA ¥¥ 

rh 

Af 


The ebjdet of this lesson is to i Bi the Faure 
to load at will, and to cause them to distinguish the 
times which require'the:gréatest: régularity and at- 
tention, such as charge cartridge, ram cartridge, on 
prime. ‘Tt.wilk beodivided.as follows 2f f.1) 5. 

Therfirety tine willbe éxeéuted,at the.end of ie 
command ; the three others at, the ae two, 
three, and four. . / 2 : 

The instructor Swill cominand : PHO HODY DHS 


Hs i¢ 


2 ulaLeadl abl eitntisniiet ae hoap, . ar 


Pag © Stas | oct} o> earia ry rat 
tant [tdotey lig aste 
tk the stig £9 Hsia off charge cigs 
pi The Ts ‘eet rh} ) ee a fey Bi ‘ j 


Z . 
. 2 i 
Se 4: ‘ i's , , 
ee ©) . : res yan TTP eye W's . ’ Le | Fi 
Ais > a Diao. ( vb MON OIOZS. OG Fito 
* 


} 7 * 
Pea 7 uyT é - + 
yy oe f { aye! rt} 


“Execute eho lithe to aetliae's ‘ram cartridge. hi bs 


Md, OS OF OMTis NiO DBtEp a 5 LS 
f a | ‘ F 
h NETITTO SO OL BoM 
w toc 8 it re si PCS. ig getidorser al 
" / : f ' nits — rl 
ath reprrmey forte Dp 
, #A 48/7 4 : se 
Exeeute the times: he inalud prime. ae eee 
ite DOIEO-eoNSsiG leiw bbede tolentiantSsdd 2 
oynt 2 ; 4 if 7 rz? ; 
PUA eISNY. 4 nd a PTO Lily Ori 
LES RE TOTD if S18) \iseoly Sani if 
tt 


1MIOD 2h 


Execute tt tn of stout arm 


a ; x 
tt ve Bit exit ct TO ortit ig Sera {9 atio pens 4 SAS 


‘THE — MANUAL. ap 


‘The Snatrnetodcwilb deste tale 1 loading id vid 
which iwill be executed as loading in four times, but 
continued, y and owithout: ROHS on: y agli ofthe: 


tinies budbe: Wwilbcommandbset veut esos sie) teat 
- f Peres treat 
b> #12 eas! 


eh ‘Toad at will.” 2. ‘aia . ie Hee) nied 
abi re fede ie tht REUHR ATE the recruits, oe de-. 
grees, to load with the greatest possible prompti-~ 
tude, each without regulating himself by his neigh- 
bor, and above allowithout waiting for him,’ -| 
The cadence prescribed is not applicable to load- 
ing, in four times, or at wilt 


98699 OF SOT Olid 1s verte: "EO yisatedi mig (10 ¥¥ 


TRELATOD 3 


The squad will now be instructed in the firings, to 
which great care must ‘be bestowed by the in- 
structor; particularly when using cartridges, as the 
recruit is apt, to load, in an excited manner, and. by 
slurring the motions lose time and interfere with the 
adjgihing, files. rote 


War ites Firings: 


The firings | are eee or fobliques anit will. be. id ' 
cuted as follows: 


. uf 
tie ie 


The direct fre. . 


The instructor will give the following commands : 


1. More by squad.’ 9. “Squad. ’ 3° Ruapy.” ne Am, 
6. Fire. 6, Loap, 


These several commands will be Sibu ted as. has 
been prescribed in the Manual of Arms: At ual 








8h, THE SCHOOL, MANUAL. 


third command, the,men w th come to the position 
of ready, as heretofore explained. At the fourth, 
they will aim according to the rank in whieh each 
may find himself placed, the rear-rank men inclining’ 
forwaitd alittle the upper part of the body, in order® 
that their pieces may reach; as: much’: ‘beyond. the 
front rank as possible. 

At the sixth command they, vy will load their pieces 
and return immediately fo the position of ready. 

The instructor will re-commence the firing . Ry the 
CORRE teccrgeies f 


ft t¢ = oe fastie a> dip ; red eV? 


th. Speids 9s Aw. Be | Ee, A Lown. ad 
-haol ot oldsoilgg : saenciaanialicell i 

When the instructor wishes the firing to. cease, ‘te 
will command ; 


adi | ee » Coase fring. 


‘ 
| a) rer 
' . y ; 
. Da ; 230) bs. R 
{ ; > ; i? 


‘At this astiAdhd io, men walt cease firing. oe 
If they have fired, they will load their pieces : and _ 
bring them to a shoulder ; if at the position of ~ 
ready, they will half-cock.and, shoulder arms. If 
‘in thé position of aim, they will bring nom n a 
pieces, ‘halfcock,/and shoulder arms.°°° 


i RB 


_ OWligus Firings. 


The ious aii will be elaroted to the sie 
and left, and by tie same. commands asthe direct’ 
fire, with this single: difference—the command aim 
will always, be preceded Y the cartion: right or 
left oblaque. | 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 8 


Ageitten of the two ranks in, the Obiane, be at to 
De RUghbe ks oy 


At ‘the. Series ready, the two! souks will 
execute what has been prescribed for the direct fire. 

At the cautionary command, right.oblaque, the: 
two ranks will throw back the right: shoulder and 
look steadily at the object. to. be hit.’ | | 

At the command a¢m, each front rank man will 
aim to the right without deranging the feet; each 
rear rank man will advance the left foot about 
eight inches toward: the right heel of the next man 
on the right of his file leader and.aim to the right, 
inclining. the upper. part, of the body for ward and) 
bending a. little the left knees) - «1» 

Oblique fire to the left is executed, as abit pres 
scribed, except that the lett shoulder is.thrown back 
and the rear rank man steps. off’ with -his,right foot, 
eight inches toward the right heel of the ‘man on 
the Hat of his file leader. \. | 


Ve 0 fire by file. 


The fire by file will be executed by the: two 
ranks, the files of which will fire successively, and 
without’ re ulating on ach ‘other, except for the 
first fire. rhe instractor will command : 


1, ne by ile 2. Squad. 3.0 Reavy, (4) Com 
*MENCE Fria. | 


‘At the third command, the two ranks will take. 
the position prescribed in the direct fire. | , 

At the fourth command, the file on the right will 
aim and fire. 

The men of this file will load their pieces briskly 
and fire a second time; reload and. fire again, and 
s0 on, In continuation. 

The second, file will aim at the instant the first 


oe - THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


brings down pieces to reload, and will conform in 
all respects to that which has yi Yee pia 
for the first file:) — 

After the first: fire, the front cnt rear’ rank men 
will not be required to fire at the same time.) / 

Each man, after loading, will return to the: — 
tion‘of ready and continue'to fires)» } 

When ‘the: instructor ai the fre to° cease, he 
es vag rains 8" grt ong 


MeTy 


» Coase,—Faraxe.. 


At this borinenian the men will cease fig? Tf 
they have fired they will load their pieces and bring 
them to a shoulder; if’ at* the position of ready, 
_ they will half-cock and’ shoulder arms.” If’ in the 
rece of aim, they will bring down — 0 ig se 

nsiipsisem, ners shoulder arms. 8!) © , 


Ts ‘fire by iieaial 


The fire by rank will be executed by each entire 
rank, alternately. | } 
The instructor. will command ; wd 


pH Fire by rank. 2. Squad. 3. ‘paneg'h a. Rear 
rank, 5. Aim. . 6. F TRE. G Loan. , 
At the third command, the two ranks will take 
the position of ready, as prescribed in the direc fire. | 
At the seventh command, the*rear rank will 
execute that which has been prescribed in the direct 
fire, and afterward take the position of ready. ~. 
-As soon as the instructor sees several men of the 
rear rank in the position of Te he will coni- 
mand : 


‘1, Front: remk.: 2.) Am. <3. ct A, Loan. 


At these commands, the men in the front ravk 
will fire, load, and return to the position of ready. 


THE PROOF, MANUAL 87 


o) oho, fire and, load kneeling. 3) 95.5. 
cia anc iT «In this exercise 
seas the squad will be 
supposed loaded and drawn up in 
one rank. The instruction will be 
given to each man individually, 
i, without times or motions, and in 

Wr 777/ the following manner. =. 
ve’ ~=6 Yt = The instructor will command: © 






Fire anp LoaD KNEELING. 





Plate 84. At this. command, the man. on 
the right of thesquad will move forward three paces 
and halt.; then carry the right, foot-to the rear and 
to the right of the left heel, and in a position conye- 
nient for placing the right knee upon the ground in 
bending the left leg; place the right. knee upon the 
ground,; lower the piece, the left forearp, supported - 
upon |the thigh on,the same side, the right hand on 
_ the small of the stock, the, butt resting on the, right 
thigh, the left hand),supporting the piece. near the 
lower band. | | 

He will next ' move'the right leg to the left 
around the: knee supported.on the ground, until this 
lee is| nearly. perpendicular,.to,the.direction. of. the 
left foot, and, thus seat, himself,comfortably on the 
Tig nt heel Daero oA sari soeic bar soot 
_ Raise |the, piece. with the right. hand and support 
it with the left, holding. it near the lower.band,. the 
left elbow. resting on the left thigh, near jthe knee ; 
seize, the hammer with, the thumb, the: forefinger 
under.the guard, cock and. seize; the.piece at-|the 
small of the stock;, bring, the piece tothe shoulder, 
aum and fire, Plate 34., Path eeetd Sabor dted 

Bring the piece down. as soon.as it is fired, and 
support, it. with the left /hand, the butt, resting 


; 
a ae 


‘88 THE SCHOOL’ MANUAL. 


against the right thigh} ‘eatry the piece to the rear 
Tsing onthe knee, the barrel downward, the butt 
resting. on ‘the ground; ; in. this_position support the 
-piece with the left hand at. the upper band, draw 
cartridge, with the. tight and load the piece, ram- 
ming the ball, if necessary, with both hands. | 
. When loaded bring the, piece to the front with 
the left hand, which holds, it, at the upper band; 
seize it, at the, same time, with the right hand at the 
small of the stock; turn the piece, the barrel upper- 
most) and: nearly horizontal, the left elbow resting 
on the left thigh ; half-cock, remove the old cap and 
prime, rise, and return to: ‘the ranks. 

The second man will then be taught what has just 
been prescribed for the first, and'so on, ‘shromeh the 
remainder of the squad. Set : 


| To Jive ind load. lying: ents | ab cai 
“Tn this exercise the squad will be in one rank and 
loaded’; the instruction will be given ‘individually 


and without times or motions. 
‘The instructor will command :! 


awe | Fire snp. Loap. Lyne. | 


“ME this. command, the man on st Hobt of thie 
edhial? will move’ toward three paces and halt; he 
will then bring his piece to an order, drop on both 
knees, and place himself on the ground flat om his 
belly, In this position he will support the piece 
fiearly horizontal with the left hand, holding it near 
fhe lower band, the butt end of the piece’and the left 
elbow resting on the ground), the barrel’ uppermost ; 
eock the piece with the right hand; and carry this 
land'to the small of the stock’; raise the piece with 
both hands, press the butt against the shoulder; and 
eee on both elbows, am and he 1 
“As soon as he has’fired, bring the piece down aiid 


MAUWAM JOOHO8 ART 

THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 89 
oi sare 5 d? tn ? 
chin upon his*left side, still resting on nit 
bring backthe | piece until the cock ise 
‘breast, the butt‘end resting on the ee ; take out 
a: cartridge with the right hand ; seize the small of 
the stock with this-hand, holding the eartrid, 
the thninl) and:first two ‘fingers; Ahe-will then 
‘himself -onhis back, still holding the piece with 
‘both ‘hands ; carry the piece to the rear, } plies, the 
‘butt between the heels, the barr oy ip th .muzzl 
elevated:; Inothis position, charg Riiridgsegdraw 
sapinel vam eartridge, and return rammer. J 

» When finished loading, the man-will turn again 

upon. his»left ‘side, remove the old-eap and prime, 
then raise the piece vertically, rise, tur about, and 
resume his position in theranks.)100 (000) «9942 
|The second man will be taught vebhisb bas just ‘been 
pues me ‘the first, a 60 ae Syaqde ber — 
— 2 elt te sovig oft osioa § yb | 












— 





ry 
iF , : ’ a | 

§ 7 Bai > i 

' 52 ‘ : | a ; : . , 
SD +S © 8 Ea hb MB 3 is bid j 


* : . mo PS fete fy . ver l lw 
PO JAIOGd Shit .ViLB ITB SMrisi 


LESSON Iv, 


BAYONET BXEROISE. 

The bayonet e: exercise in n this Bo0k will be confin- 
ed:to two movements, the guard against infantry, 
and the: guard against cavalry. The tien will be 
placedsin! one fall with twoopaces interval, and, 
being at shoulder arms, the instructor will- eon. 
mand: : ran 

TIHAUE? .& ‘a i 


ws st against 2 Drfaniry, 9 ces 


re R94 D) 


-(Eiest motion.) Make. a. half, face to, or anit 
turning on both heels, the feet square to each other ; 


90 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 
: MW IOOHCE 4H’ 
at the same time 
vie Waise| the. piece 
>» slightly, and, seize 
vat. with, the: left 
i hand above and 
= near . the lower 
OY ~vband. | ac 
ia. loa “(Second -mo- 
er. oi} haa Garry the 
‘oo | night foot. twenty 
o« # inches perpendic- 
01} Bais ars rear, 
Joo) the right heel on 
=o) ovowe« othe ‘prolongation 
bia J0Bistess:?. seit ,vilaoitiey soatfy tie odeft,a tiie 
ata slightly bent, the auaight ahs ‘the body: resting 
equally; on both, lees ; lower ithe piece with: both 
hands, the barrel: uppermost, ‘the clett.elbow against 
the body; seize the piece at the same time avith 
the right hand at the small of the stock, the arms 
falling naturally, the point of the bayonet slightly 
elevated. 


ie oe Shoulder—Anxs. 





One time and. one motion. 


“Thon up the, piece sith: the left band; ‘al alae 
itjagainst the right shoulder, at the same ‘time | ring 
the mighb chen tei mje side: un’ ive late _ face to vn 
front. tient’ 9 ebin 


1. Guard against Clava. 2. Guarp. ! 


‘One time and two motions. —(Plate 36.) 


28 ANID 


Both motions the same as for guard against in- 


santry; Skeept ohat’ the right: hand ‘will be support ted 


fH BOHOL MAND AT,” 91 


against the hip 
62,vand the bay onet 
. held at the height 
~ of the eye, as in 
charge, bayonet. 


aE Ae 


iGlla BAL 


+t PIVEVA 


One time anit one 
Of AGS motion.» ) 





f vont ab won ool ty ‘up ie 

oda eid pies with’ the left: 

to. aril oa and ‘and ,place. it. 

Pe yd Dbotgegies \against, the right 

) > Plate, 86.) oi oil) © cs shoulder, at) the) 

‘same time iin the. right hel by) tha side of: tba 
prs and) tape to: ithe front ty ’ et alos 


+f ; ‘ ‘re « 
icp d (Yt Peta | 7 eet a} eg ~ . 2 -; . 
(aii 9 ba a0 rag pEa Ad os 4570RML EA S7Ui5h Ul Oh UG 








ee Gabe lo ogu ecit ahs BALE MIR 
lo On PART. THIRD. trebisrorle 


r . 7 
be ery co*r> 
ria neva: iliw f OG; 320019 a fOUMOE 


When. the recruits are well. established in bie 
principles and mechanism of the step, the ‘position. 
of the body, and the manual of arms, the instructor 
will unite eight men, at; least, and twelve men, at. 
most, in order to teach them the principles of align- 
mont; ‘the prineiplesof the touch of elbows in mareh- 
_Ing to the front, the principles of the: march iby:thes 
flank, owheeling from a halt, wheeling inemarching, 
and the change of direction to the sidevof the guide: 
He will place the squad in one rank elbow: to: hah 
aa number'the:mem from ‘right'to left: «0. eesi60) 


99) THE SOHOOL, MANUAL | 


qo Oa? 720 i | -Pigh 
jonoyed walt  B Pp dada E. ee 
«, Alignatients, 





The aeRO? will at. first teach he rec 
align themselves man by man, in order t. 
to make them comprehend the principles of align- 
ment .to this, end; he will command the two men 
on the right flank to march two paces to the front, 
and having aligned them, he will caution the remain- 
der ofthe squad to move up, as they may be success- 
ively called, each by his number, and align them- 
selves successively on the line of the first two men. 

‘Each: recruit,as° designated by his number, will 
tain the head and eyes to the right as preseribed in 
the first lesson: of’ fe first part; and will mareh ine 
quick time two paces forward; shortening’ thelast,' 
so as to find himself about six inches behind the new 
alignment, which he ought never to pass ; he will 
next move up steadily by steps of two or three 
inches, the hams extended, to the side of the man 
next to him on the alignment, so that, without de- 
ranging the head, the line of the eyes, or that of the 
shoulders, he may ifind ‘himself ‘in’the exact line of 
his neighbor, whose elbow he will lightly touch 
without opening his own. 

The ins ructor seeing the yank ue Mt aligned, will 
command : | | a 


Frosty 


‘dt. sila: the details. will tain eyes: to. the front, 
and'remain firm. i 

Alignments tothe: left will be executed on the’ 
same principles. | ie 

When the recruits shall have Sen daniel to idiot | 
themselves man’ by! man, correctly, and without, 


wv Page faa 


WAUVA®M JIOOHDOS.. al bQ 
THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 93 


groping or jostling, the instiwctor will cause the en- 
tire ek to aad itself. at once by, the command. 


HOM Stia 


iy neces, Teegh (OE Up Dies wor thares, 
ont iy the rank, except the ‘two ‘men’ placed es 
dlvauibe’ as a basis of alignment, will move ‘up 'in 
quick time, and. ‘place’ themselves ‘on the new Ti ine, 
eee & to the principles prescribed!" 08? 
instructor, ' laced fi “fiv é or six ‘paces: in “front; 
dias feather the’rank, will gee observe that the! 
principles are follows |, and then: pass to the flank’ 
that has: served as t e basis, to ‘verity. the al gn- 
ment. we : 
The’ snabitictsh, | abanus the’ greater nine of the , 
rank aligned, will pene 3 io ; 


» Front. 


i ond cow ebJi oR Tihs er oil 

©The dnstructor: oe sifterard dpder this. ‘or that 
file forward or back, designating each by its num-' 
ber.” Lhe file or files: designated, only, wall slightly 
turn the head toward 'the basis, to judge how: alls 
they, ought, to, move upor back, steadily Rigetham them 
selves on the line, and then turn eyes’ to the ‘front, 
without a particular command ‘to that effeet. | 

“Alignments to the rear will berexecuted on: the 
same Cree tie the recruits stepping back a little 
beyond the line, 'and:then ‘dressing’ up according to: 
the ke Cae bon sar phan ck eu npree 


ing? © 5 PpoTtTe . soy 


tat 


“Mer. gee'g albenraeaks ‘the tnaienctoe will-e examine 
the position of the men, and cause the rank to come, 
to ordered arms, to,, iBERKERE too, much fatigue, and. 
also the danger of negligence at shouldered arms. 


94 THE, SCHOOL, MASUAL. 


aS ee > 


[5 ould ¢ OATES W LESSON oI. 


The men ani 3 learned, in the ple and WBhcia 
parts, to march with steadiness: in<common time, 
and to take steps equal in‘length and swiftness, will 
be exercised in the third part only, in. .gueck ime, 
double quick time, andthe run; the instructor, will, 
cause them to execute successively, at: these different, 
gaits, the march to the front, the facing about. in, 
marching, the march, by. the. flank, the. wheels at a 
halt and. in, marching, and the change of, direction, 
to the side of the guide. 

The instructor will inform ‘he's recruits ‘that ‘at the 
command march, they will always move off in guick. 
time, unless. this. command, should be. spreeered PY 
that of double quick. Sp w 


To march to the Front. 


The rank bein correctly aligned, when the in- 
structor shall:wis h to:cause it tomarch by the front, 

he will: place a well-instructed man on the right or: 
the left, decording to the side ion vata ~~ yo wise 
the: guide to bey and command iy. vo rit 


<2 Squad, forvard. 9. Perey can (ee uf. 
Be Manca, satel sbi 


At: ihe ra air mianchs the tank swill, mre off 
smartly with the left foot; ‘the guide will take care. 
to march straight; to the front, keeping his shoulders 
always ima square’ with that linen: ei aol 

The instructor will observe, in marching rhe the 
front, that the men touch lightly the, elbow toward 
the side of the’ guide. 

The men. being well established in. the principles 
of the” direct march, the ‘instructor will’ exercise 
them in marching obliquely. The’ rank. pices he in 
march, the instructor will Coe 


“a, 
CI be tm ate eee ee 


“O. 





e 
r* 
( ae es: oi 





he Ltaght (or left) oblige... cA 2. Maxon. 


joAbsthe second! command, seach «man, will) make 
a) half. face to the: right (or, Jeft))and will then march 
straight: forward inthe new diféction.” “As the mén 
no longer tduch ,.¢lbows; they will,glance: along the, 
shoulders of :the, nearest les, toward ‘the side to) 
which they are obliquing, and will regulate their, 
steps-so that, the shouldérs shall always be behind - 
that of theirmext;neighbor! on;that- bide, and) that 
his head shall conceal the heads of the other men 
in the rank. -“Besides this, the men‘should preserve 
the. same; length of, pace, and. the ARG: Agaree 4 of 


) bliquity. Re 
e instructor ‘iahing? 4g Feeume the  primitie 
tines pal pormmans¢ a 4 Sit6T boupe ott 


xd 1:03 Ae Sanh 
ed Forward. ata HHEOD { j Qa! 

fig Ion ,. 8 tela fog f i 
oft the Benoni. ey ee ys shan ‘wilh so &@ 
half face to the left (or right), and all will then 
march straight to the front, Beis ks to the prin- — 
aiples of the-direct aegis \¢ basrpe odd: tH 


fiom. o2 daw. hl OLS lent ot bare ne iy 


7, 0 march to the fants om meeulile paiake bine: 


When theseveral principles, heretofore explained, 
have become familiar to the recruits, and_ they 
shall be well established in the position « of the body,, 
the bearing of arms, and the mechanism, Te Hoth 
and. swiftness of the step, the instructor ‘will’: pass 
them from quick. ‘to. double quick: time, ‘and the’ 
rove? observing’ not to’ make’ theth: march” ob=! 
ligus ey in double, quick time, tik they” are “Well 
estab ished. in, the cadence of this step. , 

“The sqtiad being at a march | in quick ‘time, ‘the 
instructor will command +, rec. : 


; ‘ . ny 
Ligie ‘tG3° Peis REE R: aul te 


meet” pa ‘ 


o¢ i eo aaitt 


1: Dowbieryaie, (op weeds 


> At the ‘command march; ‘which will bei ‘given 
when eithér foot is coming: to the ground, the squad: 
will step off in double quick time. The men will 
endeavor to follow the principles laid) down in the 
first pare of this book, and ‘toe paceer ee the? — 
ment. us SE; 

When’ the instru dts nptehod the squad t 6 resume 
- sie 3 in a aaiae time, he will command :: . 


ey Quich time. 2. Mazon, 


At ina etiittn idl march, which will be given 
when either foot is comin to the ground, the’ squad 
will retake the step in quick time. 

The squad being at a halt,’ the’ instFuctor’ Will 
cause.it to march in double quick time, by preced- 
ing the command march, by double quick. 

he instructor will endeavor to g ep uate tk a. 
RAOREE of this: step. ih 


© 6d To. face aoune in ar ahh sy 


If the squad be marching in quick; or aoatnio 
quick time, and the instructor should Wish ae perch 
it in retreat, he: will:command : pure oT 

1 Squad; right about. 2. Maren: « 

At the command march, which. will be given at 
the instant the left foot is coming to the. ground,, 
the recruit, will bring this foot to the ground, and’ 
turning on it, will face. to the rear; he will then’ 
place, the right foot in the new direction, and step 
off with the left foot. ; : 

“In marelnng at. double quick time, the. men will 
always carry their pieces on the right shoulder, or 


at a trail. és rule ts general. : : 
If the instructor shall wish the pieces Y giana at 


IeE TIRT 


ait’ dbHool StawUAE! # 


ssaure 





“To march by, the flank. 


Yhe rank, being at.a halt, and correctly aligned, 


the instructor will. command: 


1. Squad, right—Facn.. 2. Forward. 8. Maxtu. 


At the last part of the first command, the rank 


will face, to the right;\\the even numbered men, 
after facing to the right, will step quickly to the 
right side of the odd numbered men; the’ latter 
standing fast, so that when’ the movement ‘is 


executed, the men’ will be formed: into files of two’ 


men abreast. ~ 


At‘the third command, the squad will step off © 
smartly with the left foot; the files’ keeping 


aligned, and preserving their intervals. 


The march by the left flank will be executed by’ 


the same commands, substituting the word’ left for 


right, and by inverse méans; in this case, the even . 
numbered men, after facing to the left, will’ stand” 


fast, and the odd numbered will ‘place themselves ° 


on their left. | | aor ttt 

The instructor will place’ a well instructed 
‘soldier by the side of the recruit who is at the, head 
of the rank, to regulate’ the step, and to conduct. 


him; and it will be enjoined on this recruit to 


march always elbow to-élbow with the soldier. 


*4 THEE, SCHOOL, MANUAL, 
sched ody Squad. 2. Hare, 93, FRont. 


Ab the second coh aii’ the’ she will’! halts ‘and | 
afterward no man ‘will’ stity although he: may have’ 
lost his distance. © This prohibition is necessary, to’ 
habituate the mén to a constant ‘preser vation of 
their'distances! | AT SAG ALE: 00 

At the third onitiintids Stich man will’ front ‘by® 
facing to the left, if marching by the right flank, 
and by a face to the right, if ‘marching by the left 
flank. The rear rank mé# svill’ at the same time 
move quickly into their places, so_as to form the 
squad again into one rank: 

When ‘the men ‘have Become” aecustomed to 
marching by the flank, the ‘instructor will cause | 
them to change dire ection. te file ; for, this purpose 
he will command : 


its - 


Pay By file left es sigi 9. i: 
ve ine command mauch, the, first. file tt casiiet. 


direction, to.the left (or. right), in describing a small. 
are, of a. circle, and, will then: march, straight for-. 
ward ; the two men of this file in wheeling; will, 
keep up. the touch of the elbows, and. the man; on 
the. side: to, which. the wheelnis made, will shorten 
the first three or four: steps. . Hach. hie will ‘come. 
successively, to, wheel, on, the same. spo where that 
which preceded. it wheeled... addbcyo @ixrs 
The instructor will also cause, the. squad, to fein, 
by. the right or left flank, i in a ANSI Hn Ew, this 
purpose, will command. : bo silts bare deal 


$ hifi 





THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 99 


MAATVAM TOOK z OE 
raised in the new direction ao step off, With, »the 
‘othet foot without. altering! the tutte of the ‘step ; : 


ithe mén will ‘double or undouble rapidly. 
_ If, in facing by the right ‘or ‘the left’ flank, the 
squad: should face to” ‘the rear, ‘the: men will come 
infé'one rink, as prescribed for facing ‘to the front. 
It is to be réimarked’ thé at it ‘is ‘the men who : are in 
Vent Who always move’ vy te form into “Aas | rank, 
and in such’ manher as never to’ invert the order of 
the nuitibers in’ thé: Tank oer 
| Tf when ‘the “squid” has: best faded’ to “RE fear, 
the instrnetor should ‘cause it to face by ie, Toft 
flank; itis the ‘even fumber's who will oubl é: by 
1OvINe to'the left of the odd.’ nut ibers ; ‘but “f by 
the’ right flank, it is eaiclee odd | ait mabers Who, win 
flopble to the’ rig rht att setae 
This) ‘Tesson; ’ Hike: “the Bats one, eft be 
practiced” with pieces “ata ‘shoulder ; 3. but ‘the 
instructor may, to give relief by change, ‘oceasion: 
ally order sv es arms, and he will require) of the 
reertits marching in this peste as much mag 
ae ‘as’ int the former. & . 


Tha mawek by the ane i Bo0bD jiokle clade sinh 


The opr ingles of the ,march,.by, the flank m 
double quic Hime, are the same as in quick 1 time. 
The : instructor will? take ‘@are" always’ to raat the 


barra wen double ‘geich before’ that: ot mare te ge 
AA A ia elit i OL & 


: e sR . ‘ { » *) ~ i4 %4 ere . i Lf aAtT SY _ 
biiwy Siu fessor: J ; Poa APS PASE i} £0 GID 
: ee ol oth a ee ss 

val 0 Qn Seitl Biskt Vioteni 
“LESS N v, a eate sath ae 

i y PP atiicgHon GF Tebeno ff 

é ‘ « r 
8 stoiniaoo-yy : Lie OUR os EIB. OMGIOLS (1 
HEELINGS. g . 4 , 


.'s t | : ; " + Ce gn - 2 Tet if , 
rap ' et PTB: SfTO HN 4 Ad Oat sak fF 


, General: Principles of Wheeling. 


“Sow Ke are of two ‘kinds: + from’ lialts, re) 
fited pivots ge ‘in’ mareh, or ‘on movab] e ne 


>) JAUMAM JOOHOS FH 
100 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


Wheeling on a fixed. pivot takes place in passing 
a corps from the order in, battle, to ;the order, in 
column, or from the latter.to the former. » 


Wheels in marching take place, in changes of 
‘direction in column, as.often as this moyement is 
executed to the side opposite to the guide, , 
~. In wheels from a hal, she pivot-man only. turns 
in his place, without. advancing or receding. .;. 
“Tn the wheels in marching, the pivot. aks steps 
of nine or eleven inches, according as the squad is 
marching in quick or double quick time, so as, to 
clear the wheeling point, which is, necessary,, in 
order that the subdivisions of a column may.change 
direction without losing their distances, as will.be 
explained in the school of the company. 


"The man on the wheeling flank will take the full 
step of twenty-eight inches, or thirty-three inches, 
according to the gait...) .., out. soloptiant! 
.? Wheeling from a halt, or on a fiwed pot. — 
The rank being at a halt, the instructor will place 
a well-instructed man on the wheeliug flank to con- 
duct it, and.then. command: © \ 


24) By squad, right wheel. 2. Mxnon. 


_ At the second, command, the rank will. step -off 
with the left foot, turning at the same time the;head 
a little to the left, the eyes fixed on the line of the 
eyes of the men to their left; the pivot-man will 
merely mark time in gradually turning his body, 
in order to conform’ himself to the movement of the 
marching flank ; the man who conducts this flank 
will take steps of twenty-eight inches, and from the 
first step advanéeia little the left. shoulder, cast his 
eyes from time to time along im rank, and: feel gon- 
stantly. the elbow of the next,.man, lightly,, but 
never push*him. 2 ; | 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. “101° 


~The other men will feel lightly the elbow of the 
next man toward the pivot, resist pressure coming 
from the opposite side, and each will conform: him- 
self to the marching flank—shortening his step ac- 
cording to his approximation to the pivot... 
The instructor will make the rank wheel round 
the circle once or twice before halting, in order to 
cause the principles to be the better understood, 
and he will be watchful that the center does not 
break. | ere 
He will cause the wheel to the left to be executed 
according to the same principles. — eee 
When the instructor shall wish to arrest- the 
wheel, he will command: 4/4 4:/) fe} oobso ao) 


1. Squad. 2. Hater. 


eT . 
Se ys tee 
te he PS ee, 


At the second command, the rank will halt, and 
no man stir. The instructor, going to the flank, 
opposite the pivot, will place the two outer men 
of that flank’ in ‘the direction ‘he may wish to give 
(o the rank, without, however, displacing the pivot, 
who will conform the line of his shonlders to. this 
direction. The instructor will take care to have be- | 
tween these two men, and the pivot, only the space 
necessary to contain, the.other men. |.He will then 
command : ’ ee PSE ) 
nottoanih cosmo UMP Mgnt) RES. 
» At this, the) rank will place’ itself'on the align- 
ment of the two men established as ‘the! basis, in 
conformity with the principles prescribed. | 

The instructor will next command Front. 


ie ae f 
Lifvy 3 


102 THE pool MAN UAL. 

fu} FRU 

ERMARES hm THE PRIN CIELES oF THE Sateen, os Res wipes a A 
Oftt te FOF* Vi i “WALT. 7 by eee) & 


Patn, a Vittle the idea pia the ml flank 
and fin the eyesvon the lend aan itis, oar of ~—_ men 
who are on that sides’ | 


“ Beaause, ‘otherwise, it pote be. pore for 
each. man to regulate the length of, his step so,as to 

fink his own movement to that of the mania 
~ flank. 


~ Touch taht th the elbow of the neat nan ‘toibtird 
"the pivot ; whee g 


ide aiken that the files may: Ast opsi’ out in’ “the 
wheel. 


- daomst pressure  dhiote comes ume the side ot the 
| suarthing splantes i 


esas if this principle be. i the: pivot, 
which. ought. to bea fixed point, in wheels from a 
halt, might be pushed out of ‘its, place by preoante, 


Wheeling in. ‘marching,.o or On, Gi ‘movable pivot: 


When the reertits have been brought to execiite 
well the wheel from a ‘halt, they will’ be tanght to 
wheel in marching. 

To this end, the rank, being in. mareh, when the 
instructor shall wish to cause it to change direction 
to.the reverse flank.(to the side. ei to abe 
guide or pivot. flank), he. will command; 


1. Right! (or ‘Uefoy' ‘wheel. 2. ‘Maron. i 7 
The first command will be given veld the rank 


is yet four paces from the wheeling point. 
At the second command the wheel will be exe- 


rate A6Htdor, MANTA 103 


cuted in the same, manner as from, a halt, except 

that the touch of the elbow willremain toward the | 
marching flank (or side of the guide) instead of the - 
side of the actual pivot; that. the pivot-man, instead : 
of merely turning in his place, will conform himself 
to the movement of the marching flank, and feel - 
lightly the elbow of the next man, take steps of full 
nine inches, and thus gain ground forward in de-— 
scribing a small curve. so as to clear the point of | 
the wheel. The middle of the rank will bend 


slightly to the rear. As soon as the movement 


shall commence, the man who conducts the march- 


ing flank will cast, his eyes on the ground over 


which he will have to pass. 


. The wheel being ended, the instructor will com- 


mand : 7 
1. Forward. 2. Maron. 


The first command will be pronounced when four 


paces are yet required to complete the change of 
direction. 3 


straight forward; the pivot-man and all the rank 
will retake, the step of twenty-eight inches, and 


bring the head direct to the front. 


Turning, or change of direction to the side of the 


The change of direction to the side of the guide, 
in marching, will be executed as follows: e in- 
structor will command: Ee dae 


1. Left (or right) turn. 2. Manon. 


The first command will be given when the rank 
is yet four paces from the turning point. 


At; the command march, which will be given at r 
the instant of completing the wheel, the man who | 
conducts the marching flank will direct himself — 


me 


104, THE, SCHQOL, MANUAL. , 


At the command March, to be pronounced at,the 
oe wta Js 6iG52l SAP AL GS, SLL woitiee sig rere th 
instant, the rank ought to turn, the guide will face. 
to the left (or right) in marching, and move forward 
in the new direction without slackening or quicken. 
ing the eadence, and without ‘shortening or length- 
CUE RE IEE cidctany adi ‘to feamovos: edt. 
‘The whole rank will promptly conform itself to. 
the new direction ; to effect which, each man will 
advance the shoulder opposite to the guide, take. the " 
double quick step, to carry himself inthe new di- 
rection, turn the head and eyes to the side of the 
guide, and retake the touch of the elbow on that. 
side, in placing himself, on the alignment. of the - 
guide, from whom he will: take the ‘step, and then 
_ resume the direct, position of the head. “Each man 

will thus arrive successively on the alignment. 


: 


| Wheeling and changing direction to the side of the 
i hea guede.ia double quick tame. pie eB 


When the recruits comprehend and execute well, 
in quick time, the wheels at a halt and in marching, 
anit “tHe change of direction to the side ‘of the 
guide, the ‘instructor will ‘cause the same move- 
ménts to be repeated in double quick time. 

These various moveinents will be executed by 
the same commands and according to the same 
principlesas, in. quick. time, except. that, the com- 
mand double guick will precede that of march. In 
wheeling while marching, the pivot will take steps 
of eleven inches, und in the changes of direction to 
thie side‘ot the euide; the’ men on the side opposite 
the guide must increase the gait m order to bring 
themselvesinto ‘line: ) 


Ee THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 105, 
iy. [ADMANM GOOHO@ HHT Us 


Tony rnaohes in apuble lt time and the run, : 


The jnstruetor will cause to be resumed the exer- 
cises in double: ~ arte time® and pig: run, with arms 
and knapsacks. — i i 

He will cause long winrhti to’ be enborited in 
double quick time, both: by the front and by the 
flank, and: by: constant practice willlead the men to 
pass over a distance’ of five miles in sixty minutes. 
The: pieces will be carried on either: ‘shoulder, and 
sometimes at a trail. | 

Hewill also: exercise them in iris eiianties at a 
run, the pieces carried at will; the men will be in- 
structed: to: keep as’ united ‘as: possible, without, how-- 
ever, exacting. muely’ pag eogrtic 8 whigh 1 is impracti 
cable. | | 

‘The run, im cst ah service, will waly ‘be ‘resorted 
to when it maybe highly. important to reach a 
geen! ae — we ts tae bow 


ae eh To. sided arms. 


ate en being, at order arms with bayonets un 
fixed, t e instructor will command ; ‘4 


” Stack —A ras, 


At this comnbind the front-rank man of every 
evef:numbered file will pass his piece before him, 
seizitig if'with the left hand near the upper band ; 
will place the butt a little iw advance of his left toe, 
the baie! turned toward the body, and \draw the 
raminér'slightly from its place ; the front-rank man 
of ‘every odd-numbered file will also, draw the ram-" 
mer slightly, and pass his piece to the man next on 
hig left, wHo will's seize it with the right hand near 

SOBP 


edit SPA Tye wits + +3’F 
106 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


the upper band, and plaée’ the -butt a little in ad- 
vance of the right toe of the man next,on his right, 
the ‘barrel turned -to the front; he will then cross 
the rammers,of, the, two -pieces, the:rammer of the 
piece of, the odd-numbered: man. being inside; the 
rear-rank man of every even file willvalso-draw his' 
rammer, lean his; pie¢e: forward, othe lock-plate 
downward, advance the right foo: about six inches, 
aud, insert’ the .rammer> between?’ the rammer.and. 
barrel.of the :piece of his,frovit-ranksman 3 with his 

left hand jhe will place.the buttof His piece:on) the 
ground, thirty-two inches in rear of, and perpendic- 
ular to, the front.zank, bringing back his right foot 
by, the side ofthe, left; ‘the front-rank man of every 
even file will,at.thesame-time Jeam the stack! to the 

ocscen! al gpivear, quitit with hisright hand, and° 
3 force all the rammers down. .The® 
fff stack being thus formed, the rear- 
Jit, venk,iman of every odd | file: will: 
pass his: piece into:hisileft hand; the” 
barrel to the front, and inclining it 
forward,, will rest it on the stack. 
_. Plate 37 shows the. formation of 
‘the stack: A, is the piece of the. 
even front-rank’ man’ -B, the piece 
of the odd front-rank man; C, the 
piece of the rear-rank man, of the 
MGM Ale. fh Hepat nets ‘tiey 
_,,.. If the rifle musket be used,,and . 
it is required to stack arms .with, 
the bayonets, fixed, the following. 

_ will be the method :—Plate 37. 

- At the command stack arms, the 
front-rank man of every! even-num- 
bered file will; pass his piece: before 
: _ him, seizing. it. with the. left hand : 
above the middle band, and place the butt behind and 





Plate 37,- > 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 107, 


near the right foot of the man next on the left, the bar- 
rel turned to the front. At the same time the front- 
rank man of every odd-numbered file will pass his 
piece before him, seizing it with the left hand below 
the middle band, and hand it to the man next on 
the left; the latter will receive it with the right 
hand two inches above the middle band, throw the 
butt about thirty-two inches to the front, opposite 
to his right shoulder, inclining the muzzle toward 
him, and lock the shanks of the two bayonets: the 
lock of this second. piece toward the right, and its 
shank above that of the first piece. The rear-rank 
man of every even file will project his bayonet for- 
ward, and introduce it (using both hands) between 
and under the shanks of the two other bayonets. 
he will then abandon the piece to his file leader, 
who will receive it with the right hand under the 
middle band, bring the butt to the front, holding up 
his own piece and the stack with the left hand, and 
place the butt of this third piece between the feet 
of the man next on the right, the S plate to the 
rear. The stack thus formed, the rear-rank man of 
every odd file will pass his piece into his left hand, 
the barrel turned to the front, and, sloping the bay- 
onet forward, rest it on the stack. 
The men of both ranks having taken the position 
of the soldier without arms, the instructor will 
command : : 


1. Break ranks. 2. Marcu. 


rs 
To resume arms. 
Both ranks being re-formed in rear of their stacks, 
the instructor will command: 


Take—ARms. 


At this command, the rear-rank man of every 
odd-numbered file will withdraw his piece from the 


Pad 


108° THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


stack ; the front-rank man. of every even file will 

seize his own piece with the left hand and that of 
the man on his right with his right hand, both 
above the lower band; the rear-rank man of. the 
even file will seize his piece with the right hand be- 
low the lower band (if the rifle musket be used the 
piece will be seized at the middle band); these two 
men will raise up the stack to loosen the rammers, 
or shanks of the bayonets.. The front-rank man of 
every odd iile will facilitate the disengagement of 
the rammers, if necessary, by drawing them .out 
slightly with the left hand, and will receive. his 
piece from the hand of the man next on his left ; 
the four men will re-take the position of the soldier 
at order arms. 


END OF THE SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 











vlosere, fn 









' Le tai te" Bie 




























sree pkatown. | 2 “ 
; er ak eee a oa Scryenatl, uppoaite 
¥ poe the | hati. gt tbe eos pany. ve Dey: 4s : 
ew sg — —: of af a 
RS tag: Baer ; | : 

ES, . ge nf Pies 

Ae tn tees see 
Beat the!) ie if: thie ieee ; 















See. ti ce: 


S. wie oo ‘Pie Me ee ae an ioe ta 
Sean 


" ee ie 2 a4 gat « at, pes 
sia dn “the left ie 


ie ae 






7 






"ANVdUWOO V dO 
: ‘guBesIEg YLT 
‘queesieg WZINOY 


» “‘gZuBeSi0g pry, 
‘guvedieg Puoddeg © 


ae 
50 
a 
EW 
<j 
) 
aa 
) 
Pra 


4 


"YUVIBIOG 4811] 

‘pueueynery PING L 

“queuoyNery puooag 
‘qUBUsyNOPyT WIT 


“ureydey 


A000 Ul 





NOOLYTd LSTA NOOLVId ANOOUS 





SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY, 





Posts of Company. Officers, Sergeants, and Cor- 
porals. : 

- 1. Tae company officers and sergeants are nine 

in number, and will be posted in the following 

manner : : 

2. The captain on “the right of the company, 
touching with the left elbow. . / 

8. The jirst sergeant in the rear rank, touching 
with the left elbow, and covering the captain. In 
_ the maneuvers he will be denominated coverig ser- 
geant, or right guide of the company. 

4. The remaining officers and sergeants will be 
eae as file closers, and two paces behind the rear 
rank. 

5. The jirst lieutenant, opposite the center of the 
fourth section. | | 

6. The second lieutenant, opposite the center of 
the first platoon. 

“7. The third lieutenant, opposite the center of the 
second platoon. 

8. The second sergeant, opposite the second file 
from the left of the company. In the maneuvers 
he will be designated left guede of the company. 

9. The third sergeant, opposite the second file 
from the right of the second platoon. . 

10. The fourth sergeant, opposite the second file 
from the left of the first platoon. | 

11. The fifth sergeant, opposite the second file 
from the right of the first platoon. So 

12. In the left or tenth company of the battalion, 


112 HE SOHOOL MANUAL. 


the second sergeant will be posted in the front rank, 
and on the left of the battalion. bi 

13. The corporals will be posted in the front rank, 
on the right and left of platoons, according to height; 
the tallest corporal and the tallest man will form 
the first file, the next. two tallest men will form the 
second file, and so on to the last file, which will be 
composed of the shortest corporal and the ‘shortest 
man, . 
o 14. Absent officers and sergeants will be replaced 
—oflicers by sergeants, and sergeants by corporals. 
The colonel may detach a first lieutenant from one 
company to command another, of which both the 
captain and first lieutenant are absent ; but this an- 
thority will give no right to a lieutenant to demand 
to be so detached. | 
- 15. The odd and even files, numbered as one, 
two, in the company from right to left, will form 
groups of four men, who will be designated com- 
rades in battle. il 


General Rules and Division of the School of the 
ay Company. | 

16. Instruction by company will always precede 
that by battalion, and the object being to, prepare 
the soldiers for the higher school, the exercises of 
detail by company will be strictly adhered to, as 
well in respect to Reine Ree as the order of pro- 
gression herein prescribed. i 

17. There will be attached to.a company under- 
going elementary instruction, a, captain, a covering 
sergeant, and a certain number of file closers, the 
whole posted iu the manner indicated, page 111, 
and, according to the same, the officer charged with 
the exercise of such, company will herein ‘be de- 
nominated the znstructor. : ret 

18. The School,of the Company will be divided 


THE) SCHOOL .MANUAL. ~ fas 


into six lessons, and each. lesson will comprehend 
five articles, as follows : 


Lesson: I. 


1. To open ranks, 

2. Alignments in open ranks. 

8. Manual of arms. 

4. To close ranks. 

5. Alignments and manual of arms in closed 


ranks. 
Lusson IL. 


. To load in four times and at will. 
. To fire by company. 

. To fire by file. 
. To fire by rank. : il 

To fire by the rear rank. t, 


ot He OD LO 


1 wid Il. 


1. To march in line of battle. , 

2. To halt the company marching in line of bat- 
tle, and to align it. | 

3. Oblique march in line of battle. 

4. ‘To mark time, to march in double quick time, 
and the back step. : 

5. To march in retreat in line of battle. 


Lesson IV. 


1. To march by the flank. 
2. To change direction by file. 
8.To halt the company marching .by the flank, 
and to face it to the front. 
_» 4. The company being in march by the flank, to 
form it on the right or left. by file into line of battle. 
» 5. The company marching by the flank, to form 
it by company or platoon into i ine, and cause it to 
face to the right and left, and file to the left and 
right in: marching. | —" | 


114 THE SOHOOL MANUAL. 


Babadee V. 


1. To break into column by platoon either at a 
halt or while marching. 

2. To march in column. 

3. To change direction. 

4. To halt the column. 7 

5. Being in column by platoon, to form to the 
right) or left. into line of battle, either at a halt or 
marching. | 


Lxsson VI. 


1. To break into platoons, and to re-form the 
company. 

2. To break files to the rear, and to cause them 
to re-enter into line. . 

3. To march in column in roel, and to execute 
the movements incident thereto. 

4, Countermar¢éh: 

5. Being in column, by platoon, to form on the 
right or left into line uf battle. 


19. The company will always be formed! in two 
ranks.. The instructor will then cause the files to 
be numbered, and for this purpose will'commaad : 


In cach rank— Count Twos. 


20. At this command the men count in each rank, 
from right to left, pronouncing in a loud and dis- 
tinct voice, in the same. tone, ‘without hurry and 
without turning the head, one, two, according to the 
place which each one oceupies. He will also cause 
the company to be divided into platoons and sec- 
tions, taking care that the first platoon is always 
composed of an even number of files. 

21. The instructor will be as clear and concise as 
possible in his explanations; ‘he ‘will cause faults 
of detail to be rectified by the captain, to whom: he 
will indicate them, if the captain ‘should 'not him- 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 115 


self have observed them; and the instructor will 
not otherwise interfere, unless the*captain should 
not well comprehend or should badly execute his 
intentions. °— ny Ne 1929 

22. Composure or presence of mind in him. who 
commands, and in ‘those who obey, being the first 
means of order in a body of troops, the instructor 
will labor to habituate the company to this essential 
quality, and will himself give the example. 





LESSON. FIRST. 
oo AOL Eb itr 
To open Ranks. 

_ 23, The company being at ordered arms, the.ranks 
and file closers well aligned, when the instructor 
shall wish to cause the ranks to be opened, he will 
direct the left guide to place himself on the left of 
the front rank, which being executed, he will com- 
mand : ae | 
1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Shoulder—Arms. 

tho the rear open order. : 

24, At the fourth command the covering sergeant 
and the left guide will step off smartly to the rear, 
four paces from the front rank, in order to mark the 
alignment of the rear rank. They will judge this 
distance by the eye, without counting the steps.” 

25. The instructor will place himself at the same 
time on the-right flank, inorder to observe if these 
two non-commissioned officers are on a line parallel 
to the front rank, and, if necessary, to correct their 
positions, which being executed, he will command: 


26. At this command, the front rank will stand fast: 


ap 


116 THE SOHOOL MANUAL. 


27. The rear rank will step. to the rear, without 
counting the steps, and will place themselves ‘on the 
alignment marked for this rank, conforming ‘to what 
is prescribed in the School of the Soldier, page 81. 

28. The covering sergeant will align the rear 
rank on the left guide placed to mark. the left of 
this rank. | i 

29. The file closers will march to the rear at the 
same time with the rear rank, and will place them- 
selves two paces from this rank when it is aligned. 

30. The instructor seeing the rear rank aligned, 
will command : 


.. 6. Front. 


31. At this command, the sergeant on the left of 
the rear rank will return to his place as a file closer. 

32. The rear rank being aligned, the instructor 
will direct the captain and the covering sergeant to 
observe the men in their respective ranks, and to 
correct, if necessary, the positions of persons and 
pleces. pik us pee 

Artiote II. 

Alignments in Open franks. 

33. The ranks being open, the instructor will, in 
the first exercises, align the ranks, man by man, the 
better to inculcate the principies. 

34. To effect this, he will cause two or four men 
on the right or left of each rank to march two or 
three paces forward,. and, after having aligned 
them, command: | 

By file, right (or left)—Dress. 

35. At this, the men of each rank will move up 
successively on the alignment, each man being pre- 
ceded by his neighbor in the same rank, toward the 
basis, by two paces, and, having correctly aligned 
himself, will cast his eyes to the front. 


ae oe 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 117 


36. Successive alignments having habituated the 
soldiers to dress correctly, the instructor will cause 
the ranks to align themselves at once, forward and 
backward, sometimes in a direction parallel, and 
sometimes in one oblique, to the original direction, 
giving, in each case, two or four men to serve as 
a basis of alignment to each rank. To effect which, 
he will command: : 


1. Right (or left)—Druss. 2. Front. 
AVE VSD G OR | 
1. Fight (or left) backward—Dnruss. 2. Fronr. 


87. In oblique alignments, in opened ranks, the 
men of the rear rank will not seek to cover their file 
leaders, as the sole object of the exercise is to teach 
them to align themselves correctly in their respect- 
ive ranks, in the different directions. 

38. In the several alignments, the captain will 
superintend the front rank, and the covering ser- 
geant the rear rank. For this purpose, they will 
plpee themselves on the side by which the ranks are 

ressed. . Fae 

39. In oblique alignments, the men will conform 
the line of their shoulders to the new direction of 
their rank, and will place themselves on the align- 
ment as has been prescribed in the School of the 
Soldter, according as the new direction shall be in 
front or rear of the original one. a 

40, At the end of each alignment, the captain and 
the covering’ sergeant will pass along the. front of 
the ranks to correct the positions of persons. and 


arms. 
Articite III. 


Manual of Arms. 


41. The ranks being open, the instructor will 
place himself in a position. to see the ranks, and 


118 THE SOHOOL. MANUAT. 


will. command the eeneal of arms in the following 
- order: | 


Present arms. .: Shoulder arms. 
Order arms. OTE AE : 
Ground arms. ae | 
Manse armas! Sere loo: Shoulder arms.: 
Support arms, Shoulder arms. 
Five bayonet. _ Shoulder arms. 
Charge bayonet. ‘Shoulder arms, 
Trail arms. Shoulder arms. 
Onfix. bayonet. « Shoulder arms. 
Secure arms. Shoulder arms. 
Load in nine tines.) 8 8 


42. The instructor will take care that the position 
of the body, of the feet, and of the piece.be always 
exact, and that the times be briskly executed and 
close to the person. . | 
rTaMor ArticLe LV. 
Lo Close fvanks. | 
- 48. The manual of arms being ended, the in- 
structor will command : | 
1. Close order. 2. Maxcu. 
44, At the command march, the rear rank will 
close up in quick time, each man directing himself 
on his file leader. 


+ Articiy V. : 
Alignments, and Manual of Arms. Closed Ranks. 
45. The ranks being closed, the instructor will 
cause to be executed parallel and oblique alignments 
by the right and left, forward and backward, ob- 
serving to place always two or four files to serve as 
a basis of alignment. He will give the commands 
prescribed, No. 36. , 
46. In alignments in closed ranks, ‘the captain 


THE SOHOOL MANUAL. | 119 


will superintend the front’ rank, and ‘the’ covering 
sergeant the rear rank.. They, will habituate. them: 
selves to. jud e the ‘alignment by the lines of the 
eyes and, shotsérs, In Casting: a glance of. the eye 
. along the front ‘and rear of. the ranks. 

47, The moment the captain perceives the greater 
number of the front rank aligned, he will command 
Front, and rectify. afterward, rif necessary, the align- 
ment of the other men by the means prescribed in 
the School of the Soldier. “The rear rank will. con- 
form to ‘the alignment of the front rank, superin: 
tended by the covering sergeant. 

48: The tanks being. steady, the instructor will 

ace himself on,the flank to verify their alignment. 
Fe will.also see that each*rear-rank man. covers.ac- 
curately his file.leader. 

49. In oblique alignments, the instructor will ob- 
serve what is ‘prescribed, No. 39. | 

50. In all alignments, the file closers wll preserve 
the distance of two paces from the rear rank. 

51. The alignments being ended, the instructor 
will cause to be executed the manual of arms. « 

52. The instructor, wishing to rest the men, with- 
out deranging the alionment, will first cause ‘arms 
to be supported, or ordered, and then command : 


In place—RKust. 


53. At this command, the men will no longer be 
constrained to preserve silence or steadiness of posi- 
tion; but they will always keep: one or other heel 
on the alignment. 

/ 54. If, on the contrary, the instructor should wish 
~ to rest the men without constraining them to pre- 
serve the alignment, he will command : | 


Rest. 
55. ‘At which command, the men will not ae re- 


nn TAL Outen re ree” eee 


120 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


quired to preserve immobility, or to remain in their 
places. saa | | | 
56. The instructor may, also, when he shall judge 
proper, cause arms to be stacked, which will be ex- 
ecuted as prescribed in the School of the Soldver. 





LESSON SECOND. 


57. The instructor wishing to pass the second les- 
son will cause the company to take arms, if stacks 
have been formed, and command : 


1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Shoulder—Arms. 


58. The instructor will then cause loadings and 
firings to be executed in the following order: 


| Articte I. 
To Load in Four Times and at Wiil. 


59. Loading in four ézmes will be commanded and 
executed as prescribed in the School of the Sol- 
dier. The instructor will cause this exercise to be 
often repeated, in succession, before passing te 
loading at will. 

60. Loading at will will be commanded and exe- 
cuted as prescribed in the School of the Soldier. 
In priming when loading in four ¢emes, and also at 
will, the captain and covering sergeant will half face 
to the, right with the men, and face to the front 
when the man next to them, respectively, brings his 
piece to the shoulder. | : 

61. The instructor will labor to the utmost. to 
cause the men, in the different loadings, to execute 
py has been prescribed in the School. of the Sol- 

wer. 

62. Loading at will, being that of battle, and 
consequently the one with which it is most import- 


a 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 5 Im 


ant to render the men familiar, it will claim prefer- 
ence in the exercises the moment the men be well 
established in the principles. To these they will be 
brought by degrees, so that every man may beable 
to load with cartridges, and to fire at least three 
rounds in a minute with ease and regularity. 


Arxticie I. 
To Fire by Company. 


63. The instructor, wishing to cause the fire by 
company to be executed, will command: 


1. Fire by company. 2. Commence firing. 


64. At the first command, the captain will prompt- 
ly place himself opposite the center of his company, 
and four paces in rear of the line of file closers: the 
covering sergeant will retire to that line, and place 
himself opposite to his interval. This rule vs gene- 
ral, for both the captain and covering sergeant, in 
all the different firings. | 

65. At the second command, the captain. will 
add: 1. Company; 2. Reapy; 3. Aim; 4. Free; 
5. Loan. 

66. At the command load, the men will load 
their pieces, and then take the position of ready, as 
prescribed in the School of the Soldier. | 

67. The captain will immediately recommence 
the firing, by the commands: 


1. Company. 2. Am. 3. Free. 4 Loan. 


68. The firing will be thus continued until the 
- signal to cease firing is sounded. 
69. The captain will sometimes cause aim to be 
taken to the right and left, simply observing . to 
pronounce right (or left) oblique, before the com- 
mand ain. ) 

6 


192 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


Na Arrréie IIT. 
The Fire by ides ) 


40. The instructor wishing to cause the fire by 
file to be executed, will command !: 


1. Fire by file. 2: Company. 3. Reavy. 4. Com- 
mence firing. 


71. The third and fourth commands will be exe- 
cuted as prescribed in the School of the Soldier. 

72. "The fire will be commenced. by the right: file 
of the company ; the next file will, take aim at the 
instant the first brings down pieces to reload, and so 
on to the left; but this progression will only be ob- 
served. in the first discharge, after which each man 
will. reload. and fire without regulating himself by 
others, conforming himself to what is prescribed in 


the. School of the Soldier. 


ArticLe TV. 
The Fire by Rank. 


73. The instructor wishing the fine hac igs tobe - 
coumalilinds will command: 


1. Fire by rank. 2. Com pany. 3. Reavy. 4. fear 
rank—Am. 5. eee 6. Loan. 


74. The fifth and sixth. commands. will be exe- 
cuted.as.is_ prescribed in the School of the Soldier, 
page 84, and following. 

75. When the instructor sees one or two pieces in, 
the rear rank at a ready, he will command : 


1. Front rank. > 2. Ais 3!) Free: 4. Loap. 


4 6. The firing will be continued thus by alternate 
ranks, until the signal is given to cease firing. 

77. The instructor will sometimes cause aim to be 
taken to the right and left, conforming to what is 
prescribed, No. 69. 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. - 4398 


78. ‘The instrnetor will cause the firing 'to cease, 
whether by company, by file, or by rank,’ by sound- 
ing the signal ¢o cease firing, and at the instant this 
sound commences, the men will cease to fire—page 
82. abil . 

79. The signal to cease firing will be always fol- 
lowed by a bugle note or tap; at which sound the 
captain and covering sergeant will ae resume 
their places in line, and will ‘rectify, if necessary, 


: 


the alignment of the ranks. — gay 
80. In this school, except when powder is used, 
the signal to cease firing will be indicated by the 
command cease jiring, which will be prononnced 
by the instructor when he wishes the semblance of 
firing to cease. weg | , 
81. The command posts will be likewise substi- 
tuted, under similar circumstances, for the bugle 
note or tap employed as the signal for the return of 
the captain and covering sergeant to their places in — 
line, Which command will be given when the in- 
structor sees the men have brought their pieces to 
a shoulder. — Sarg 
82. The fire by file being that which is most fre- 
quently used against an enemy, itis highly. import- 
ant that it be rendered pertectly familiar to the 
troops. The instructor will, therefore, give it almost 
exclusive preference, and labor to cause the men to 
aim with care, and always, if possible, at some par- 
ticular object. As it is of the utmost importance 
that the men should aim with precision in battle, 
this principle will be rigidly enforced in the exer- 
cises for purposes of instruction. . 


ARTICLE V. | 
Lo. fire by the Rear Rank. 
83. The instructor will cause the several-fires to 


Ne ee eee LY 


124 -: THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


be executed to the rear, that is, by the rear rank. 
To effect this, he will command: © i 


1. Face by the rear rank. 2. Company. 3. 

| ceabioiti About—F act. ar Ren 

84. At the first command, the captain will step out 
and place himself 16 inches from and facing the right 
file of his company; the covering sergeant and file 
closers will pass quickly through the captain’s in- 
terval, and place themselves faced to the rear, the 
covering sergeant a pace behind the captain, and 
the file closers two paces from the front. rank oppo- 
site to their places in line, each passing behind the 
- covering sergeant. 

85. At the third command, which will be given 
at the instant the last file closer shall have passed 
through the interval, the company will face about ; 
the captain will place himself in his interval.in the 
rear rank, now become the front, and the covering 
sergeant will cover him in the front rank, now be- 
come the rear... 

86. The company having faced by the rear rank, 
the instructor will cause it to,execute the fire by 
company, both direct and. oblique, the fire by file, 
and the fire by rank, by the commands and. means 
prescribed in the three preceding articles; the cap- 
tain, covering sergeant, and the men will conform 
themselves, in like manner, to what is therein pre- 
seribed. EIN CREE 

87. The fire: by file will commence on the left of 
- the company, now become the right... In the fire by 
rank, the firing will commence with the front, rank, 
now become the rear. ) 

88. To resume the proper front, the instructor will 
command : 


1. Face by the front rank. 2. Company. 38. 
| soyoe  About—Facr. rathh Oe 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 125 


_ 89. At the first command, the captain, covering 
sergeant, and file-closers will conform to what. is 
prescribed Nos. 84 and 85. . 

_ 90. At the third command, the company having 
faced about, the captain and covering sergeant will 
resume their places in line. 

91. In this lesson, the instructor will impress on 
the men the importance of aiming always at some 
particular object, and: of holding the pieces as. pre- 
scribed in the School of the Soldier. : 

92. The instructor will recommend to. the captain 
to make a short. pause between the commands aim 
and five, to give the men time to aim with accuracy. 

93. The instructor will place himself in position 
to see the two ranks, in order to detect faults; he 
will charge the captain and file closers to be equally - 
watchful, and to report to him when the ranks are. 
at rest. He will remand, for individual instruction, 
the men who may be observed to load badly. 

94. The instructor will recommend to the soldiers, 
in the firings, the highest degree of composure or 
presence of mind; he will neglect nothing that may 
contribute to this end. 

95. He will give to the men, as a general prin- 
ciple, to maintain, in the direct fire, the left heel in 
its place, in order that the alignment of the ranks 
and files may not be deranged; and he will verify, 
by examination, after each exercise in firing, the 
observance of this principle. , 7 

96. The instructor will observe, in addition to 
these remarks, all those which follow. uae 

97. When the firing is executed with cartridges, 
it is particularly recommended that the men ob- 
serve, in uncocking, whether smoke escapes from 
the tube, whichis a certain indication that the piece 
has been discharged; but if, on the contrary, no 
smoke escapes, the soldier, in such .case, instead of 


126 He SCHOOL MANUAL. 


reloading, will pick and prime again. If, believing 
the load to be discharged, the soldier should put a 
second cartridge in his piece, he ought, at least, to 
perceive it in ramming, by the height of the load ; 
and he would be very culpable should he put in a 
third. The instructor will always cause arms to be 
inspected after firing with cartridges, in order to 
observe if the’fault has been committed of putting 
three cartridges without a discharge in the same 
piece, in which case the ball screw will be applied. 

98. It sometimes happens, when a cap has missed 
fire; that the tube is found stopped up with a hard, 
white, and compact powder; in this case picking 
will be dispensed with, and a new cap substituted 
for the old one. a . 





pe 


* LESSON THIRD. 
Articie I. 
To Advance in Line of Battle. 


99. The company being in line of battle, and 
correctly aligned, when.the instructor shall wish to 
exercise it in marching. by the front, he will assure 
himself that the shoulders of the captain and coy- 
ering sergeant are perfectly in the direction of their 
respective ranks, and that the sergeant accurately 
covers. the captain; the instructor will then place 
himself twenty-five or thirty paces in front of them, 
face to the rear, and place himself exactly on the 
prolongation of the line. passing between their heels. 

- 100. The instructor, being aligned on the directing 


: \ 


file, will command: | 
1. Company, forward. 


101. At this, a sergeant, previously designated, 
will move six paces in advance of the captain: the 


THE SOHOOL MANUAL. 12%, 


instructor, from the position prescribed, will. cor- 
rectly align this sergeant on the prolongation. of the 
directing file. . | 

102. Phis advanced sergeant, who is to be charged 
with the direction, will, the moment his position is 
assured, take two points on the ground. in. the 
straight line, which would pass between. his own 
and the heels of the instructor. |. bane 

103. These dispositions being made, the instructor 
will step aside, and command : aiaen 


2. Maron. 


104. At this, the company will step off with life. 
The directing sergeant will observe, with the great- 
est precision, the length and cadence of the step, 
marching on the two points he has chosen; he will 
take, in suecession, and. always a little before ar- 
riving at the point nearest to him, new points in 
advance, exactly in the same line with the first two, 
and at the distance of some fifteen or twenty paces 
from each other. The captain will march steadily 
in the trace of the directing sergeant, keeping al- 
ways six paces from him; the men will each main- 
tain the head direct to the front, feel lightly the 
elbow of his neighbor on the side of direction, and 
conform himself to the principles prescribed in the 
School A the Soldier for the march. by the front. 

105. The man next to the captain will take special 
care not to pass him}; to this end, he will keep the 
line of his shoulders a little in the rear, but in the 
same direction with those of the captain. 

106. The file closers will march at the habitual 
distance of two paces behind the rear rank. 

107. If the men lose the step, the instructor will 


command ; | 
Lo the—Ster. 


128 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


108. At this command the men will glance toward 
the directing sergeant, retake the step from him” 
and again direct their eyes to the front.” tf i 

109. The instructor will cause the captain and cov- 
ering sergeant to be posted sometimes on the right 
and sometimes on the left of the company. = 
* ‘110. The directing sergeant, in advance, having 
the greatest influence on the march of the company, 
he will be selected for the precision of his step, his 
habit of maintaining his shoulders in a square with 
a given line of direction, and of prolonging that line 
without variation. — : 

111. If this sergeant should fail to observe these 
principles, undulations in the front of the company 
must necessarily follow ; the men will be unable to 
contract the habit of taking steps equal in length 
and swiftness, and of maintaining their shoulders in 
a square with the line of direction—the only means 
of attaining perfection in the march in line. . 

112. The instructor, with a view the better to es- 
tablish the men ‘in the length and cadence of the 
step, and in the principles of the march in line, 
will cause the company to advance three or four 
hundred paces at once without halting, if the ground 
will permit. In the first exercises, he will march 
poset song with open ranks, the better to observe 
the two ranks. MIG OOTG 

113. The instructor will see, with care, that all the 
pec of the march in line are strictly observed ; 

e will generally be on the directing flank in a po- 
sition to observe the two ranks, and the faults they 
may commit; he will sometimes halt behind the 
directing file during some thirty successive steps, in 
order to judge whether the directing sergeant or 
the directing file deviate from the perpendicular. 


~_ 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 129. 


7 | Arnorx II. 

To Halt the Company, Marching in Line of Bat- 
tle, and to Align tt. 

114. The instructor, wishing to halt the company, 


4 


will command : . 
1. Company. 2. Harr. 


115. At the second command, the company will 
halt; the directing sergeant will remain in advance, 
unless ordered to return to the line of file closers. 
The company being at a halt, the instructor may 
advance the first three or four files on the side of 
direction, and align the company on that basis, or 
he may confine himself to causing the alignment to 
be rectified. In this last case, he will command: 
Captain, rectify the alignment. The captain will 
direct. the covering sergeant to attend to the rear 
rank, when each, glancing his eyes along his rank, 
will promptly rectify it, conforming to what is pre- 
scribed in the School of the Soldier, page 52. 


; - Arrrore IIT. 
Oblique March in Line of Battle. 


116. The company being in the direct. ana, 
when the instructor shall wish to cause it to march 
obliquely, he will command: , 


1, Right (or left) oblique. 2. Maxcu. 


117. At the command march, the company will 
take the oblique step. The men will accurately ob- 
serve the sp ples prescribed in the School of the 
Soldier. The rear-rank men will préserve their dis- 
tances, and march in rear of the man next on the 
right (or left) of their habitual file leaders. 

118. When the instructor wishes the direct. march 
to be resumed, he will command ; 

ge 


130 THE SOHOOL MANUAL 


1, Forward. 9. Maron. 


119. At the command march, the company will 
resume the direct march. The instructor will move 
briskly twenty paces in front of the captain, and 
facing the company, will place himself exactly’ in 
the prolongation of the captain and covering ser- 
geant; and then, by a sign, will move the directing 
sergeant on the same line, if he be not already on 
it; the latter will, immediately take two points on | 
the ground between himself and the instructor, and 
_as he advances, will take new points of direction, ° 

as is explained No. 104. | 

120. In the oblique march, the men not having 
the touch of elbows, the guide will always be on 
the side toward which the oblique is made, without _ 
any indication to that effect being given; and when 
the direct march is resumed, the guide will be 
equally without indication on the side where it was 
previous to the oblique. 

121. The instructor will, at first, cause the ob- 
lique te be made toward the side of the guide. He 
will also direct.the captain to have an. eye on the 
directing sergeant, in order to keep on the same 
perpendicular line to the front with him, while fol- 
lowing a parallel direction. Doar pasty 

122. During the continuance of the march, the’. 
instructor will be watchful that the men follow 
parallel directions, in veep ek to the principles 
prescribed in the School of the Soldver, for presery- 
ing the general alignment; whenever the men lose. 
the alignment, he will be careful that they regain it 
by lengthening or shortening the step, without al- 
tering the cadence or changing the direction, 

123. The instructor will place himself in. front 
of the company and face to it, in order to regulate 
the march of the directing ‘sergeant, or the man, 


THE-SCHOOL MANUAL. © 181 


who is on the flank’'toward which ‘the oblique is 
made, and’to see that’ the principles ofthe march 
are Sabo obeyed, and that ie ‘files do not 
crowd. 

Arttcny IV. 


To 0) Waa Time, to. March in Double pee Time, 
| and the Back Step. 


124. The company being in the direct march 
and in quick time, the instructor, to cause it to 
mark fslonbe will command : 


| 1. Mark time. %. Mancu. 
125. To resume the march, he will command: 


1. Forward. 2. Maron. 


126. To cause the mareh in double quick time, 
the instructor will command : 


1. Double quick. 2. Manon. 


127. ‘The command march will be pronounced at. 
the instant either foot is. coming to the ground. 
128. To resume quick time, the instructor will 
command: 
1. Quick time. 2. Marcu. 


129. The command march will be pronounced at 
the instant either foot is coming to the ground. 

130. The company being at a halt, the instructor 
may cause it to march in the back step; to this 
effect, he will command: 


1. Company backward, 2. Maron. 


131. The back step will be executed according to 
the principles prescribed in the School of the Soldier, 
page 81, but the use of it being rare, the instructor 
will not cause more than fifteen or twenty steps to be 
taken in succession, and to that extent but seldom. 


. 1328) THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


132;, The instructor, ought, not. to exercise. the, 
company in marching in double quick, time: till the 
men-are well established in the length and'swiftness 
of the pace in quick time; he will then endeavor to. 
render the march of one hundred and sixty-five 
steps.in the minute equally easy and familiar, and 
also cause them to observe the same erectness of 
body and composure of mind as if marching in 
quick time... f fT) bS| 

133. When marching in double quick time, if a, 
subdivision (in a column) has..to change direction 
by turning, or has to. form into line, the men will 
quicken the pace to one hundred and eighty steps 
in a minute. The same swiftness of step willbe 
observed under all circumstances where great ra-_ 
pidity of movement is required. But as ranks of 
men'¢can not march any length of time at so swift 
arate without breaking or confusion, this accelera- « 
tion will not be considered a pruscribed exercise, 
and accordingly companies or battalions will only 
be habitually exercised in the double quick time of. 
one hundred and sixty-five steps im: the minute. © 


Arrictz V. 


To March in Retreat. 


134. The company being halted and correctly 
aligned, wlien, the instructor shall wish to cause it 
o march in, retreat, he will command : ~ 


4 


1. Company. 2. About--F acw. 


135. The company having faced to the rear, the 
instructor will: place himself in front of the direct- 
ing file, conforming to what is prescribed No. 99. 

136. The instructor, being correctly established 
on the prolongation of the directing file, will com- 
mand : . : 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 133 | 


3.. Company, forward. 


137. At this, the directing sergeant will conform 
himself to what is pr dectibied Nos. 101 and 102, with, 
this difference—he will place himself six paces in 
front of the line of file Rinne now leading. 

138, The covering sergeant will step into.the line 
of file closers, opposite. to his interval, and the cap- 
tain will place “Vhinself. 4 in the rear rank, now be- 
come the Rone 

139. This disposition being promptly made, the 
instructor will command : 


4, Maron. 


140. At this, a directing sergeant, the captain, 
and the men, wil gontory. themselves to what is 
prescribed No. 104, and following. 

141. The instructor will eause to be exoéiited, 
marching in retreat, all that is prescribed for mareh- 
ing’ in advance; the commands and the means’ of 
execution will be the same. 

142. The instructor having halted: the company, 
will, when he may wish, cause it to face to the front, 
by the commands preseribed No. 134... The captain, 
the covering sergeant, and the directing sergeant’ 
will resume their habitual places in line, he mo- 
ment they shall have faced’ about. 

143. The company being: in' march by the front 
rank, if the instructor should wish it to march in 
retr eat, he will cause the right about to be executed 
_ while marching, and to this effect will command : 


1, Company. 2 Ltight about. 3. Marcu. 


144. At the third command, the company will 
promptly face about; and recommence the march 
by the rear rank. . | 

145. The directing srgant will face about with 
the company, and will move rapidly six paces: ip 


184. THE SCHOOL MANUAL.’ 


front of the file closers, and upon the prolongation 
of the guide. The instructor will place him in. the 
roper direction by the means prescribed No. 119. . 
he captain, the covering sergeant, and the men. 
will conform to the principles prescribed for’ the . 
march in retreat. __ ¥ SS | | 
146. When the instructor wishes the company to 
march by the front rank, he will give the same com- 
-mands, and will regulate the direction of the march — 
by the same means. : ! ‘tea age Tt 
147. The company being in march either by the 
front or rear rank, and if the instructor should wish 
to face it about without continuing the march, he 
will command ; foe H+ FAO} 


1. Company. 2. Right about. 3. Hawn: 


148. At the command halt, the company will face 
about, and the men will conform to what is pre- 
scribed in the School of the Soldier. i 

149. The instrnetor will cause to be executed. in 
double quick time all the movements prescribed in_, 
the 3d, 4th, 5th, and 6th lessons of this school, with, 
the exception of the march backward, which, will. . 
be executed, only. in quick time. He will give, the 
same commands, observing to add double quick be-, 
fore the command march... BO 

150.. When. the pieces are carried on the right 
shoulder, in quick time, the distance between the 
ranks will. be sixteen inches. Whenever, therefore, 
the instructor brings the company from a shoulder 
to this position, the rear rank must shorten a little 
the first steps in order to gain the prescribed dis- 
tance, and will lengthen the steps, on the contrary, 
in order to close up when the pieces are again 
brought toa shoulder.. In. marching in double 
quick time, the distance between the ranks will be 


- (PHE BOHOOL MANUAL. ~485 


twenty-six inches, and the pieces will be carried 
habitually on the right shoulder. i 
151, Whenever a company is halted, the men 
will bring their pieces at once to.a shoulder at the 
command falt. The rear flank will close to its 
‘proper distance. These rules are general. 





‘LESSON FOURTH. 
Te “Artiotz I. i | 
To March by the Flank.—Plate 37. 
152. The company being in. : rae 
line’ of battle, and at a halt, 
when the instructor shall wish 


to cause it-to march by the 
right flank, he will command : 


ae 


1. Company, right—F ace. 
{15D Parad 3. Ph se 
153. At the first command, 
the company will face to the © 
‘right, the covering sergeant 6& 
will place himself at the head” ae 
of the front rank, the captain 7"*/ 
having stepped ie for the 7™/ , a 
urpose, so far as to find him- piste gs. To march by flan 
salt’ by the side of ithe ser-\ doubling the ties 
geant, and on. his left; the front rank will double, 
as is prescribed in the School of the Soldier ; the 
rear rank will, at the same time, side-step to |the 
right one pace, and double inthe same manner, 
so that when the movement.is completed, the files 
will be formed of four men aligned, and elbow. to 
elbow. The intervals will be preserved. 
154. The file closers will also move by'side-step 


oA ae 





136 THE SCHOOL ;-MANUAL. 


tothe .right,.so that. when,the ranks are formed, 
they will be two paces from the rearmost/rank. 
, 155: At the command. march, the company ewill 
ymoye off briskly in quick time; the covering ser- 
ygeant.at, the head of the-front rank, and the.captain 
on his left, will march straight-forward... The men | 
of each file will march abreast of their respective 
front-rank men, heads direct to the front; the file 
closers will march opposite their places in line of 
battle. REA VOR. F | 

156. The instructor will cause the principles of 
the march by the flank to ‘be observed, in placing 
himself; pending the march, as preseribed in the 
School oP the Soldier. 

157. The instructor will cause the march: by the 
left plank to be @xecuted by the same commands, 
substituting left for right ; the ranks will double, 





as\has been prescribed in the School of the Soldier ; 
‘the rear rank.will side-step to the left one pace be- 


fore doubling... , 3 | 

158. At-the instant the company faces:to the left, 
the left guide will place himself at the; head of the 
front rank; the captain will pass rapidly, to. the. left 
and place himself by the right. side of this guide ; 
‘the covering sergeant will replace the captain in 
the-front rank the moment, the: latter quits it to go 


$ 


“ Arricun IL. 
. To Change Direction.by File. 

159. ‘The company béing faced by the flank, and 
‘either in march, or at a halt, when the instructor 
shall’ wish to cause it to wheel by file, he will com- 
mand: ne | , | 


sd. By file, left (or right). 2. Maron.—Plate 39. 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 137 


‘160. At the command march, the first file will 
hie, 2 


wheel ; if to the side of the front- 
rank man, the latter will take 
care not to turn at once, but to de- 
scribe a short arc of a circle, 
shortening a little the first five or 
six steps in order to give time to 
the fourth man of this file to con- 
form himself to the movement. 
It the wheel be to the side of 
the rear rank, the front-rank man 
will wheel in the step of twenty- 
eight inches, and the fourth man Plate 39. Filing to the left. 
will conform himself tothe movement by describing 
a short are of a circle, as has been explained. Each 
» file will come to wheel on the same ground where 
that which preceded it wheeled. 

161. The instructor will see that the wheel be ex- 
ecuted according to these principles, in order that 
‘the distance between the files may always. be pre- 
served, and that there be no check or hindrance at 
the wheeling point. 

Artrot® IIT. 


To Halt the Company Marching by the Flank, and 
to Hace wt to the Front. 
162. To effect these objects, the instructor will 
command : : 


1.. Company. 2. Harr. 3. Front. 


163. The second and third commands will be exe- 
euted as prescribed in the School of the Soldier, p. 96. 
As soon as the files have undounbled, the rear rank 
will close to its proper distance. The captain and 
covering sergeant, as well as the left guide, if the 
march be by the left flank, ‘will return to, their la- 
bitual places in line, at the instant the company faces 
‘to the front. | ? 








138 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


, 164. The instructor may, then align the company 
by one of the means prescribed No. 115. 


ArtioLe IV. Bikes B 


Lhe Company being in March by the F lank: to 
Form wt on the Right (or Left) by File into Line 
of Battle.—Plate 40. : 


{ = 


H 
' 
‘ 
t 
‘ 
! 
' 
i 
f 


SS OY OG ee he niet We en eee we 


ee ee eee 


a a | 


Plate 40. On the ri 
file into line. 


selves toward the lin 


jae: | 


OD B D wo 





2ODRD0o ee 


165. If the company be marching by the right 


z 


flank, the instructor will com- 
mand ; eet | 


1. On the right, by file into line. 


io ete SEARCH... 
166. At the command mareh, 
the rear-rank men doubled, will 


mark time; the captainand the - 


covering sergeant will turn ‘to 
the right, march. straight. for- 
ward, and be halted by the in- 
strucior when: they shall have 


passed at least six-paces beyond 


the rank of file closers ; the cap- 
tain will place himself correctly 
on the.lie of battle, and will 
direct. the alignment as the men 
of the front rank successively 
arrive; the covering sergeant 


“will place himself behind the 


captain at the distance of the 
rear rank the two men on the 
right of the;front.rank doubled 


will, continue ;to. march, and 


passing beyond,,the covering 
sergeant and the captain, will 
turn to the right; after turn- 
ing, they will continue to march 


_elbow toelbow, and direct them- 


e of battle; but when they shall 


‘?HE SCHOOL MANUAL. , ‘139 


arrive at. two paces from this line, the even number 

‘will shorten the step so thatthe odd number may pre- 
cede him on the line, the odd number placing him- 
self by the side and on the left of the captain; the even 
number will afterward oblique to the left, and place 
himself on the left of the odd number; the next 
two men of: the front rank doubled will pass in the 
same manner béhind ‘the two first, turn then to the 
right, and place themselves, according'to the means 
just explained, to the left, and by the side of the 
two men already established on the line; the re- 
maining files of this rank will fellow in succession, 
and be formed to the left in the same manner. The 
rear rank doubledwilkexecutethe movement in the 
manner already éxplained for the:front rank, taking 
care not to commence the movement until four men 
of the front rank are established on the line of bat- 
‘tle; the rear-rank men, as they arrive on the line, 
will cover accurately their file leaders. ~ 

167. If the company be marching by the left 
flank, the instruetor will cause it to form by file on 
the left into line of battle, according to the same 
principles and by the same commands, substitutin 
the indication left for right: In this case, the od 
numbers will shorten the step, so that the even num- 
bers may»precede them on the line.~ The captain, 
placed on the left of the front rank, and the left 
guide, will*return to their places in line of battle, 
by orderof the instructor, after the company shall 
Be formed and aligned. 

168. To enable the men the better to comprehend 
the mechanism of this movement, the instructor will 
at first cause it’to be executed separately by each 
rank doubled, and afterward by the two ranks united 
and doubled. 

169. The instructor will place himself on the line 
of battle, and without the point where the right or 


140 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


left is :to rest, in order to establish the base of the 
alignment, and afterward he will follow up the 
movement to assure himself that each file conforms 
itself to what is prescribed No. 166. 


ARTICLE V. 


The Company being in. March by the Flank, to 
Form at by Company, or by Platoon, mto Line, 
and to cause at.to Hace tothe Right and Left m 
Marching.—Plate 41. 


+a -e m P oo 


Lx) 2. aust 
} 





Bb-=------- w rere ees 











o 
~ > 
ne 
= o 
i of 
| ? 
? 
GF 


ie aE 5 * e 


‘THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 141 


170. The company being in march by the right 
Hank, the instructor will.order the captain to form 
it into line; the captain will immediately com- 
mand: 1. By company, ito line; 2. Marcu... 

171. At the command, march, the covering ser- 
geant will continue to, march straight forward; the 
men will advance the right, shoulder, take the 
double quick step, and move into line, by the 
shortest route, taking care to undouble the files, and 
to come on the line one after the other... | 

172. As the front-rank men successively arrive in 
line with the covering sergeant, they will take from 
him the step, and then turn their eyes to the front. 

173. The men of: the rear rank will conform. to 
the movements of their respective. file leaders, but 
without endeavoring to arrive in line.at the same 
time with the latter. | , 

174. If the company, marching either by the 
right or left flank, be faced about previous to form- 
ing line, the men will come «into fina by twos, and 
according to the means:as above indicated, taking 
care to undouble files, the two front-rank men tak- 
ing their places in the line at the same time, to be 
covered by their rear-rank men ,taking an oblique 
step. i tisk ey | i 
175. At the instant the movement begins, the 
. captain will face to his company in order to follow 
up the execution; and, as soon.as the company is 
tormed, he will command, guide left, place himself 
two paces before the center, face to the front, and 
take the step of the company. 

(176, At the command guide left, the second ser- 
.geant, will promptly place himself in the front rank, 
on the left, to serve as guide, and the covering ser- 
geant who is. on the opposite flank will remain 
there. 7 ft ANalte | 

177. When the company marches by the left 


142 -pPHe” Soot MANTAL. 


flank, this movement will be executed by the same 
command, and according to the same principles ; 
the company being formed, the captain will com- 
mand guzde right, and place himself in front of his 
‘company as above ; the covering sergeant who ‘is on 
the right of the front rank will serve as etide, and 
the second sergeant placed on the left flank will re- 
main théré:! O'S! 97 ONE. DGS, Goro AIP Saasios 
178. Thus, 'in a column by company, right or left 
in front, the covering sergeant’ and the second ‘ser- 
geant of each company will always be'placed on the 
right and left, respectively, of the front rank; they 
will be denominated right guide and left guide, and 
the one or the other charged with the direction. 
- 179. The company being’ in march by the flank, 
if it be the wish of the instructor to cause it to 
form platoons, he will give an order to that’ ef- 
fect to the captain, who will command : 


1. By platoon, into line.. 2. Marcu. 


180. The movement will be executed by each 
platoon’ according to the above principles. The 
captain will place himself before the center of the 
first platoon, and’ the first lieutenant. before ‘the 
center of the second, passing through the opening 
made in the center of the company if the-march 
be by the right ‘flank, and around the left of his 
platoon if the march be by the left: in this last 
case, the captain will also pass around the left of the 
second platoon, in order to place himself in front of 
the first. Both the captain and lieutenant, without 
waiting for each other, will command guzde left (or 
right) at the instant their respective platoons are 
formed. PE RES OL Ato 

181. At the’ command guide left (or right), the 
guide of each platoon will pass rapidly to the indi- 
eated flank of the platoon, if not already there. 


_THE SCHOOL ‘MANUAL. 143 


1 182;. The right guide of the company will always 
serve as the guide of the rightvor left of the first 
platoon, and» the left gnide of: the company will 
serve, in like manner, as the guide of the second 
platoones teil of} 3A naibstt,9 | 8B 2 Dues 
- 183. Thus in-a, column, by platoon, there will be 
but one guide to each platoon; he will always ‘be 
placed on its left flank, if) the right be in front, and 
on the right flank if the left. be in front: —~ id 
184. In these movements the file closers will fol- 
low the platoons :to which they are attached. 
9185, The instructor may cause the company, 
marching by. the flank, to form by company or by 
‘platoon, into line, by his.own direct commands, 
using. those prescribed for the captain, No. 170 or 
17 9%ni- sojomtieal.odt: oe! es : 
186,; The instructor will exercise the company in 
passing, without.a halt,from. the march by the front, 
to the march by.theoflank, and reciprocally. In ei- 
ther case:he will-employ the commands prescribed 
in the School of the Soldier, substituting company for 
squad... The company will face to the right or left 
in marching, and the captain, the guides, and file 
closers» will conform ‘themselves to what is pre- 
scribed for each in the march by the flank, or in-the 
march by the front of a company supposed to-be a 
subdivision of a column. Boo 
187. If after facing to the right or left, in march- 
ing, the company find itself faced by the rear rank, 
the captain will place himself two paces behind the 
center of the front.rank, now in the rear; the guides 
will pass to the rear rank, now leading, and the file 
closers will march in front of this rank. “ 
188. The company being in march either by the 
front or flank, and if the instructor should wish to 
face it by a flank without continuing the march, it 
will be executed by the commands and means pre- 


144 {HE SCHOOL ‘MANUAL. 


scribed in the School of the Soldier, substituting 
company for squad. | | ! 

189. The company marching in column by pla- 
toon can be faced to the right or left, by com- 
mands, as above indicated. At the first command, 
the chiefs of platoons and the guides will go quickl 
to the indicated flank. At the command ‘march, 
each subdivision will face, and be led off in the 
new direction by its chief. If the right be in front, 
the subdivision can be filed to the left, immediately 
after being faced either to the right or left, by the 
command by jfile left before the command march. 
If the left be in front, the 
command will be by file right 
Be UTA before the command march. 

LTC 190. The instructor, in or- 
der to avoid fatiguing the men 
and to prevent them from 
es being negligent in the posi- 
: tion of shoulder arms, will 
semetimes order support arms 
in marching by the flank, and 
arms on the right shoulder, 
when marching in line. 








\....\ LAWALL all 





5 


LESSON FIFTH. 


Articie I. 


U 7% Break into Column by 
li gq) Platoon, either at a Halt 
or On March.—Plate 42,0 


| 








THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 445 


it into column, by platoon to the right, will com 
mand : : | 
1. By platoon, right wheel. 2. Marcu. 

192. At ‘the first command, the chiefs of platoon 
will rapidly place themselves two paces before the 
center of their respective platoons, the lieutenant 
passing around the left of the company. ‘They need 
not occupy themselves with dressing one upon the 
other. The covering sergeant will replace the cap- 
tain in the front rank. 1 

193. At the command march, the right front- 
rank man of each platoon will face to the right, the 
covering sergeant standing fast; the chief of each 
platoon will move quickly by the shortest line, a 
little beyond the point at which the marching flank 
will rest when the wheel shall be completed, face to 
the late rear, and place himself so that the line 
which he forms with the man on the right (who 
had faced), shall be perpendicular to that occupied 
by the company in line of battle; each platoon will 
wheel according to the principles prescribed for the 
wheel on a fixed pivot; and when the man who 
conducts the marching flank shall approach near to 
the perpendicular, its chief will command: 

1. Platoon. 2. Hatz. 


194. At the command halt, which will be given 
at the instant: the man who conducts the marching 
flank shall have arrived at three paces from the 
perpendicular, the platoon will halt; the covering 
sergeant will move to the point where ‘the left of 
the first platoon is to rest, passing by the front 
rank; the second sergeant ‘will place himself, in 
like manner, in respect to the second platoon. Each 
will take care to leave between himself and the 
man on the right of his platoon a space equal to its 
front; the captain and fivst lieutenant will look to 


7 


146 THE SOHOOL MANUAL. 


this, and each take care to align the sergeant be- 

tween himself and the man of the platoon who’ had 

faced to the right. Age ROME YE 

_, 195. The guide of each platoon being thus! es- 
tablished on the perpendicular, each chief will place 

himself two paces outside of his guide, and, facing 


toward him, will command: 
| 3. Left—Dress. 


196. The alignment being ‘ended, each chief of 
platoon will command, Front, and place himself 
two paces before its center. shi 

197. The file closers will conform thensselves to 
the movement of their respective platoons, presery- 
ing aie the distance of two paces from the rear 
rank. 3 

198. The company will break by platoon to the 
left, according to the same principles. The in- 
structor will command: Sind : 


‘1. By platoon, left wheel. 2. Marcu. 


. 199. The first command will be executed in the 
same manner asif breaking by platoon to, the right, 
- 200. At the command im the left front-rank 
man of each platoon will face to the left, and the 
platoons will wheel to. the left, according to the 
principles prescribed forthe wheel on a fixed pivot; 
the chiefs of platoon will conform to:the principles 
indicated Nos. 193 and 194. ‘fo | 
201. At the command halt, given by the chief of 
each platoon, the covering sergeant on the right of 
the front rank of the first platoon, and. the second 
sergeant near the left of the second platoon, will 
each move to the points where the right of his pla- 
toon is to rest. The chief of each platoon should 
be careful to align the sergeant between himeelf 


AFB, SEH OO: MANUAL. 147 


left, and will then command : 
Right—Dress. 


202. The platoons being aligned, eaphi chief ot 

platoon will command, Front, and st hameelt 

opposite its center., 

|, 203..The instructor wishing to hiresk the’ com 
pany by platoon to the right, and to move the col 

unum forward. after the wheel is compléted, will cau | 

. tion the company to that effect, and command; 


and, the man of the plies who hed faced to the 


ws By platoon, right wheel. 2. Maron. 00 


204. At the first command, the chiefs of platoon 
will move rapidly in front of’ their respective pla- 
_ toons, conforming to what: has been prescribed } on 
192, and will remaiti in: this position during the 
continuance: of: the wheel... The covering sergeant 
ei replace the chief of the first platoon in the { front 
vrann,. 

205. At. the vigrsiend march, the platoons will 
» Wheel to: the right, conforming. to the principles 
herein prescribed; the man onthe pivot will not 
face to the righty ‘but will mark ‘time, conforming 
himself to the movement of. the marching: flank ; 
and whet the man who is on the left of. this: flank 
shall. arrive near the perpendicular, the instructor 
will command : 


3. Lorward. 4. Mancu. 5. Gurde left... 


(206. At. the. fourth command, which. will, be 

given at the instant:.the wheel: is completed, the 
platoons willsmove straight to the front, all the men 
taking the step of twenty-eight. inches... The cov- 
ering sergeant and the-second sergeant will move 
“rapidly. to the left of their respective platoons, the 
former passing before, the front rank, The leading 


—- - oe Fem 8 meet he eeomepapedee 


148 THE SCHOOL “WANUAL. 


guide will immediately take points on the ground 
in the direction which may be indicated to him by 
.the instructor. | 

207. At the fifth command, the men will take the 
touch of elbows lightly to the left. 

208. If the guide of the second platoon should 
lose his distance, or the line of direction, he will 
‘conform to the principles hereinafter prescribed, 
Nos. 222 and 2238. 

209. If the company be marching in line to ‘the 
front, the instructor will cause it to break by pla- 
toon to the right by the same commands. At the 
command march, the platoons will wheel in the 
manner already explained; the man on the pivot 
will take care'to mark time in his place, without 
advancing or receding; the instructor, the chiefs 
of platoon, and the guides will conform to what has 
been prescribed No. 204, and following. | 

210. The company may be broken by platoons ‘to 
the left, according to the same principles, and by 
inverse means, the instructor giving the commands 
prescribed Nos. 203 and 205, substituting left for 
right, and reciprocally. 

211. The movements explained in Nos. 203 and 
209. will only be executed after the company: has 
become well established in the principles of the 
march in column, Articles Second and Third. » 


REMARKS. 


212. The instructor, placed in front of the com- 
pany, will observe whether the movement be ex- 
ecuted according to the principles prescribed above ; 
whether the platoons, after breaking into column, 
are perpendicular to the line of battle just occu- 
pied; and whether the guide, who placed himself 
where the marching flank of his platoon had to 
rest, has left, between himself and the front-rank 


‘THE SCHOOL’ MANUAL. 149 
man on theoright (or left), the space necessary to 
contain the front of the platoon. 

213. After the platoons have broken, if the rear- 
-most guide should not accurately cover the-leadin 
one, he will not:seek to. correct. his position till the 
column be put in march, unless the instructor; wish- 
-ing to wheel immediately,into line, should think it 
necessary to rectify the direction of the guides, 
which would be executed as will be hereinafter ex- 
»plained in Article V. of this Lesson. 

>, 214. The instructor will) observe, that the man 
on the right (or left) of each platoon who, at the 
command march, faces to the right (or left) being 
the true pivot of the wheel, the front-rank man 
next to him ought to gain a little ground to the 


front in wheeling, so as to clear the pivot-man. 


ArticiE II. 
. To March in Column. 
Wiiien Plate 43. 
915. The 
»having broken by 
front, © the 


wishing to 
seolumn to »march, will 


company 
pla- 
toon, right (or left) in / 
instructor, ' 
cause . the. 


e 


/ 











‘place himself twenty-five seer 


oto thirty paces in front, 


face to the guides, estab-: 


lish himself correctly, on 
»on their direction, and 
yeaution the leading guide 
yto ‘take points on the 


/ ground. 3 
9216. The instructor be- 
ing thus placed, the 


guide of the leading pla- 








Hae et a 
1 





ms of 
4 


Se ek FB 4 
es a ay a 
F Aa oS 


aw dee oe orem 








° 

i 

Plate 48. To march in column, and 
change of direction to the t. 


onh50 . THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 











toon will take two points on the \ground) in: the 
straight line passing between his own and the heel 
of. the instructor. : 
_ 217. These dispositions being made, the instrue 
_tor will step aside, and command : 


fe Column, forward. 2. Guide left fa right) 
| 3.. Marcu. - . 


_ 218. At the command march, pedtipailgy ndpedie i 
by the chiefs of platoons, they, as well as the guides, 
will lead. off, by a decided stép, their respective 
platoons, in order that the whole may move aes 
and at the same moment. — 

219..The men will each feel lightly the elbow of” 
his neighbor toward the guide, and conform him~ 
self, 1 in marching, to the principles prescribed in the 

School of the Soldier. The man next to the guide, 
in each platoon, will take care never to pass lim, 
and also to march always about six inches to’ the 
right (or left) from-him, in order not to push him: 
out of the-direction. — 

220. The leading pein will phniaiaie with the 
greatest Eernon. the length and. cadence of: the 
step, and maintain the direction of his march b : 
the means prescribed No. 104. | . 

221. The following guide will march exactly i 
the trace of the leading one, preserving betwee1 
the latter and himself”a distance precisely equal to 
the front of his,platoon, and imonibe in the sam 
step with the leading guide. | 

222. If the following guide lose: his diktens 

_ from the one leading (which can only happenby 
his own fault), he will correct: himself by slightly 
lengthening or shortening a few steps, in order that 
there may not be sudden” quickenings or slacken- 
ings in the march of his platoon... 

223. If the same — sien neglected to mnarel: 










THE SCHOOL ‘MANUAL. 151 


exactly in the trace of the preceding one, find him- - 
self sensibly out of the direction, he will remedy — 
this fault by advancing more or less the shoulder 
opposite to the true direction, and thus, in a few © 
steps, insensibly regain it, without the mconveni- 
ence of the oblique step, which would cause a loss - 
of distance. In all cases, each chief of platoon 
will cause it to conform to the movements of its 


guide. . 
















REMARKS ON THE MARCH IN COLUMN. 


+924, If the chiefs and ‘guides of subdivisions 
neglect to lead off, and to decide the march from 
the first step, the. march will be begun in uncer- 
tainty, which will cause waverings, a loss of step, 
and a loss of distance. © | 
~ 225. If the leading guide take unequal steps, the 
march of his. subdivision, and that which follows, 
will be uncertain; there will be undulations, quick- 
enings, and slackenings in the march. | 
226. If the same guide be not habituated to pro- 
long a given direction, without deviation, he will’ 
describe a crooked line, and the column must wind 
to conform itself’ to such line. | 
227. If the following guide be not habituated to 
march in the trace of the preceding one, he will 
lose his distance at every moment in endeavors to 
regain the trace, the ‘preservation of which is the 
ost important principle in the march in column. - 
228. The guide of each subdivision in column 
will be responsible for the direction, distance, and 
step; the chief of the subdivision, for the order 
and conformity of his subdivision with the move- 
ments of the guide. Accordingly, the chief will 
frequently turn, in the march, to observe his sub- 
division. | | 
229. The instructor, placed on’ the flank of the 








“152: ‘THE SCHOOL - MANUAL 


guides, - will watch) over. the) éxecutiom of ; all the: 
Praeipie prescribed ; he will, also, sometimes place: 
himself in the rear, align himself. on, the gnides,: 
aril att pending some, thirty paces together, to. 
verify the accuracy of the guides. 
230. In column, chiefs of subdivisions will always 
repeat, with, the. greatest promptitude, the: com- 
mands march and, halt, no chief waiting for another’, 
but each repeating the command the momentyhe 
catches it from the instructor. They will repeat no 
other command given by him; but will explain, if 
necessary; to. their subdivisions, in anounder tone 
of. voice, what they. will have, to execute) as. indi 
cated by the. commands of, caution... ati 


Arnone It... 
To Change Direction. —Plate 43, 


231. The changes of direction of a column while 
marching will be; executed according, to. the prin: 
ciples. prescribed for wheeling on the mareh. When 
ever, therefore, a column is to change direction, the 
instructor will change the guide, if not. already 
there, to the flank opposite the, side: to whicli the 
change is to, be made. | 

235. The column being in, march pe fi trah in front, 
if i be the wish of the. instructor to change diree- 
tion to the right, he will. give the.order, to the chief: 
of the first platoon, and immediately go himself, or 
send a marker to the point:at which the change of 
direction is to be made; the instructor, or marker, 
will place himself on. the direction of the guides, 
so as to present the breast. to: that flank of. the 
column. 

233. The leading guide, will direct his march on 
that person, so that, in passing, his left arm may. 
just graze his breast, _ When: the leading’ guide 


THE SCHOOL, MANUAL... 153) 


shall have approached near to the marker, the chief: 
of his platoon will command: : 


1. Right wheel. "2. Maxcu. 


234. The first command will be given when the 
platoon ‘is at the distance of four paces from the 
- marker. , 
‘ 935. At the command march, which will be pro- 
nounced at the instant the guide shall have arrived 
opposite the marker, the platoon will’ wheel to the 
right, conforming to what is prescribed in the 
School of the Soldier. fie . 
236. The wheel being finished, the chief of each 
platoon will command: | faeper 


3. Forward, 4. Marcu. 


937. These commands will be pronounced. and 
executed as is prescribed in the School of the Sal 
dier. The guide of the first platoon will take points 
on the ground in the new direction, in order, the 
better to regulate the march. 

238. The second platoon will continue to. march 
straight forward till up with the marker, when it 
will wheel to the right, and retake the direct march 
by the same commands and the same*means which 
governed the first platoon. 

239. The column being in march right in front, 
if the instructor should wish to change direction to 
the left, he will command, guede right... At. this 
comPaS the two guides will move rapidly to the 
right of their respective platoons, each passing in 
front of his subdivision; the men will take the 
touch of elbows to the right; the, instructor will 
afterwards conform to what is prescribed, 232. 

240. The change of direetion to the left will then 
be executed according to the same. principles.as the 

7 : 


154 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. — 


change of direction to the right, but by inverse — 
means. | , 

241. When the change of direction is completed, 
the instructor will command, guide left. 

242, The changes of direction in a,column, left 
in front, will be executed. according to the same 
} vinciples. 

243. In changes. of direction in double quick 
une, the platoon will wheel according to the prin- 
ciples prescribed in, the School of the Soldier... 

244. In order to prepare the men for those forma- 
tions in line, which can be executed only. by. turn- 
ing to the right or the left, the instructor will 
sometimes cause the column to change direction to! 
the side of the guide. In this case, the chief of the 
leading platoon will command : Left (or right) turn, 
instead of left (or right) wheel. The subdivisions 
will each turn, in succession, conforming to what is 
prescribed in the School of the Soldier. The leading 
guide, as soon as he has turned, will take points on 
the ground, the better to regulate the direction of 
the march. 

245. It is highly important, in order to preserve 
distances and the direction, that all the subdivisions 
of the eolumn should change direction precisely at 
the point where the leading subdivision changed 5 it 
is for this reason that that point ought to be marked 
in advance, and that it is prescribed that the guides 
direct their march on the marker, also that each 
chief of subdivision shall not cause the change to 
commence “till the guide of his subdivisio# has 
grazed the breast of this marker. 

246. Each chief will take care that his subdi- 
vision arrives at the point of change in a square 
with the line of direction: with this view, he will 
face to his subdivision when the one which precedes 
has commenced to turn or to wheel, and he will be 


THE SOHOOL MANUAL. 155 


watchful that it continues to march squarely until — 
it arrives at the point where the change of. direction 
is to Commence. __, ai ay 

247. If, in changes of direction, the pivot of the 
subdivision which wheels should not clear the wheel- 
ing point, the next subdivision would be arrested 
and distances lost; for the guide who conducts the: 
marching flank having to describe an are, in length 
about once and a half the front of the subdivision, 
the second subdivision would be already up with 
the wheeling point, while the first which wheels has 
yet the half of its front to execute, and hence would 
be obliged to niark time until that half be executed. 
It is therefore prescribed, that. the pivot of each 
subdivision should: take steps of nine or eleven 
inches in length, according to the swiftness of the 
gait, in order not to arrest the march of the next 
subdivision. « The chiefs of subdivision will look 
well to the step of the pivot, and cause his step to 
be lengthened or shortened as may be judgéd ne- 
cessary. Byithe nature of this movement, the 
center of each: subdivision will bend a little to the 
rear. | 

248. The guides will never alter the length or the 
cadence of the step, whether the change of direc- 
tion be to the side ofthe guide or to the opposite 
side, : ik 
249. The marker, placed at the wheeling point, 
will always present his breast to the flank of the 
column. . The instructor will take the greatest pains 
in causing the prescribed principles to be observed ; 
he will see that each subdivision only commences 
the change of direction when the guide, grazing the 
breast of the marker, has nearly passed him, and, 
that the marching flank does not deseribe the arc of 
too large a circle, in order that-it may not be thrown 
beyond the new direction. - 


156... .THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


950. In Bey of direction by wheel, the euide 
of the, wheeling flank. will. cast his eyes over the 
ground at the moment of commencing the wheel, 
and will describe an are of a circle whose radius is 
equal to the front of the subdivision. 


Arricrm lV. 


To Halt the Column. 


251. The column being in march, when. the in- 
structor shall wish to halt it, he will epiniaand ; : 


1. Column. . 2. Haur. 


252. At the second command, promptly repeated 
bythe chiefs of platoon, the column will halt; the» 
guides also will stand fast, although they aris have 
lost»both distance:and direction. 

253, If the command. halt ‘be not repeated with 
the preatest vivacity, and executed at the same in- 
stant; distances will be lost. : 

254. If a guide, having lost his distance, seals to 
recover it after that command, he will only throw 
his fault-on the following ouide, who, if he have 
marched ‘well, will no longer be at his proper dis- 


tances and if the latter regain’ what he has thus 


lost, the movement will be propagated to the rear 
of the poriean: 
Arrictm Vv. 


Béihig't in orden by Platoon, to form to the Right 
or Left into Line of Battle, eather at a@ Halt or 
on the March.—Plate 44. 

















Plate 44. Left into line wheel. 


JAY rH: | | B8] 
_ THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 137 


O5D. ‘The Saitherotor bbbutiait halted. the Galan % 
right’in front, and wishing: to form it into, line of, 
battle, will place himself at platoon distance, in 
front of the leading guide, face to.him, and rectify, 
if .necessary, the. position of. the guide beyond ; 
which being executed, he will command; — 


Left—Drxss. 


256. At this command, which will ‘Gt be re- 
peated by the chiefs of platoon, each of them will 
place himself briskly two paces outside of his guide, 
and direct the alignment of the platoon perpendicu- » 
lar to the St eantton of the column. i 

257. Hach chief having aligned his platoon, will 
command Fronv, and return quickly to his place § in 
column. 

258, ‘This: disposition being modes the instructor 
will command : 


1. Left into line, sche, 9, Vee | 


259. At the command march, briskly repeated, by 
the chiefs of platoon, the front-rank man.on the: at * 
of each platoon will face to the Jeft,;and place:his. 
breast lightly against the arm of the guide by his 
side, who stands fast ; the platoons wili wheel to the 
left.on the principle of wheels from a halt, and in 
conformity to what is prescribed No. 914, Each 
chief will turn to his platoon to observe its move- 
ment, and when the marching flank has approached 
near the line of battle, he will command: 


vy, Platoon....2.. Harr, 


260. The command halt will be given when the . 
marching flank of the platoon is three paces from, 
the line of battle. = -— cf 

261. The chief of ‘the second platoon, bagitip 
halted it, will return to his place as a file closer, 
passing around the left of his subdivision. 


158 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


262. The captain ahaa halted the first platoon, 
will move rapidly to the point at which the right 
of the company will rest in line of battle, and com- '. 


mand : 
Right—Dunss, 


263. At this command the two platoons will divéhe i 
up on the alignment; the front-rank man on the’ 
_right of the leading platoon, who finds himself op- 
| posite the instructor established on the direction of 
the guides, will place his breast lightly against the 
left, arm of ‘this officer. The captain will direct the 
alignment from the right on the man on the Oppo- 
site flank of the company. | : 

264. The company being aligned, the captain will 
command : 


owe 


265. The instructor seeing the company in line 
of battle, will command: 


Guides—Posts. 


266. At this command the covering sergeant. will 
cover the captain, and the left guide will return to 
his place as a file closer. 5 3 

267. If the column be left in front, ‘and the i in- 
structor should wish to form it to the right into line 
of battle, he will place himself at platoon distance. 
in front of the leading guide, face to him, and ree- 
tify, if necessary, the } position of the onide beyond; 
which being executed, he will command : hire" 


4. Right into line, wheel. 2, Maron. 


268. At the command march, the front-rank man 
on the right of each platoon will face to the right 
and place his breast lightly against the in arm of. 
the guide by his side, who stands fast ; each platoon, 
will wheel to the right, and will be baling: by its 
chief, when the marching flank has appriaphed near 


# 


(HE SCHOOL MANUAL. | ~159 


the line of battle; for this purpose the chief of each 
platoon will command: | 3 
1. Platoon. 2. Harr. 


269. The command /alé, will be given when the 
marching flank of the platoon is three paces from 
the line of battle. ‘The chief of the second platoon 
having halted his platoon, will resume his place in 
- the. rank of file closers. | 4 

270. The captain having halted the first platoon, 
will move briskly to the point at which the left of 
the company will rest, and command: 


Left— Dress. 


271. At this command, the two platoons gill 
dress up on the alignment; the man on the left of 
the second platoon, opposite the instructor, will 
place his breast lightly against the right arm of this 
officer, and the captain will direct the alignment 
from the left on the man on the opposite flank of 
the company. — 

272. The company being aligned, the captain 
will command* — 

_ Front. 


- 273. The instructor will afterward command : 


Guides—Posts: 


974. At this command, the captain will move to 
the right of his company, the covering sergeant will 
cover. him, and the left guide will return to his 
place as a file closer. 

275. The instructor may omit the comfhand left 
or right dress, previous to commanding left or right. 
inte line, wheel, unless after rectifying the position | 
of the guides, it should become necessary to dress 
the platoons, or,one of them, laterally to the right 


or left. | 3 


- 
h ed 
VW 


160 _THE SCHOOL’ MANUAD. 


-276.. The instructor, before the command /ef¢ (or 


“pight) into line, wheel, will assure himself that’ the 


rearmost platoon is at its exact wheeling distance 
from the one in front. This attention is important, 
in order to detect negligence on the part of guides 


_ in. this essential point... 


277. If the column be marching right in front, — 
and the instructor should wish to form it, into line 
without halting the column, he will give the com- 
mands prescribed No. 258, and move rapidly to 


» platoon distance in front of the leading guide. 


278. At the command march, briskly repeated 
by the chiefs of platoon, the left guides will halt 
short, the instructor, the chiefs of platoon and the 


‘platoons,. will, conform: to what, is prescribed. No. 
2599, and following. 


279. If the column be in march left in. front, 
this formation will be made according to the same 
principles, and by inverse means, | 

280. Ifthe column, be marching right in front, 
and the instructor should wish to form, it into line 


-withont, halting the column, and to march the com- 


pany in line to the front, he will command : 
1. By platoons left wheel. 2. Maron. 


981. At the command march, briskly repeated by 
the chiefs of platoon, the left guides will halt: the 
man next to the left guide in each platoon will mark 


‘time: the platoons will wheel to the left, conform- 
‘ing to the principles of the wheel on a fixed pivot. | 


When the right of the platoons shall‘arrive near 


the line,of battle, the instructor will command’: 


3. Forward. 4. Maron. 5. Gwides right (or left). 
989. At the fourth command, given at the instant 


‘the wheel is completed, all the men of the company 
“will move off together with the step of twenty-eight 


* 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 161 


inches; the captain, the chief of the second platoon, 
the covering sergeant, and the left guide will take 
their, positions as in line of battle. 
283. At the fifth command, which will be given 
- immediately after the fourth, the captain and cov- 
ering sergeant, if. not already. there, will move 
» briskly to’ the side on which the guide is designated. 
The non-commissioned. officer. charged with the di- 
rection will move rapidly in front of the guide, and 
will be assured in his line of march by the insiruc- 
|-tor,. as. is, prescribed No. 119. 
That’ non-commissioned. officer 2, 
will immediately take points on... | 
the ground as indicated in the ee es 
same number. The men will [S]e=mEEm 
take the touch of elbows to the Veh OG 
side of the guide, conforming : 
themselves to the principles of 
the march in line. 7 
284. The same principles are >= EEEDS 


applicable to a column. left in 





ae me * 























front, ! a. a 
“wit ; j 
LESSON SIXTH. . ea | 
Azticite I... er ey 
To Break the Company into oo Oo 
Platoons, and to Le-form the woe oo 
ods SWWWLGGVYAF 
Company.—Plate 45. AWW 
TO BREAK THE COMPANY INTO Pegs 
) PLATOONS. — bia: $$ 8.4 
_, 285, Thé company marching 
in the cadenced step, Ks 
aud supposed to make @SS === reer 








SPs OU SE, CE! ANG as MS NP ee ee 


_partofacolumn, right * 
in front, when the ine & A aoa 
; v : ee ‘ 
structor shall wish to To break into platoons, Pir! 45. 


163... THR SCHOOL MANUAL. - 


cause it to hreak by piatoon, he will give the order 
to the captain, who will comniand: 1. Break into 
platoons, and immediately place himself before the 


~ center of the first platoon. ai Gi 
286. At the command break wnto platoons, the © 
first lieutenant will, pass quickly around the left to 
the center of his platoon, and give ‘the caution: 
Mark time. - | ; 
287. The captain will then command: 2. Marcu. 
988. The first platoon will continue to march 
straight forward ; the covering sergeant will move 
rapidly to the left flank of this eacins (passing by 
“the front rank) as soon as the flank shall be disen- 
“gaged. ong . tr | 
289, At the command march, given. by the cap- 
tain, the second platoon will begin to mark time ; 
its chief will immediately add: 1. 20ight oblique ; 
2. Marcu. The last command will be given so 
that this platoon may commence obliquing the in- 
stant the rear rank of ‘the’ first ‘platoon shall have 
passed. - The men will shorten the step in obliquing, 
so that when the command forward march is given, 
the platoon may have its exact-distance.” ~ 
290:The- guide of the second platoon being near 
the direction of the guide» of the first, the ‘chief of 
the second, will command Forward.and add Marcu, 
the instant that the guide of his:platoon shall cover 
the guide of thecfirste. veep esenn) aye a) : 
291. In a Golumn, left in front, the company will 
break into platoons by inverse means, applying to 
the first platoon all that has been prescribed for the 
second, and reciprocally... sie xt 
292. In-this case, the left guide of the company 
will shift to the right flank of the second platoon, 
and the covering sergeant will remain on the right 
of the first, ene ae | 


= 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. | 163. 


ee TO. RE-FORM THE COMPANY. 9 © 

| 298. The, column, by platoon, being in march, 
right ‘in. front, when the instructor shall wish to 
cause it to form company, he will give the order to 
the captain, who will command: orm company. 

994. Having given’this command, the captain 
will immediately.add: 1. Lirst. platoon ; 2. Right | 
gbliquési: isidodea i | ery ips . 

295..Thechief of the second platoon will caution 
it to continue to march straight forward. | 

296. The captain will then command: 3. Marcu. 

297. At this command, repeated by the chief of 
the second, the first platoon will oblique to the 
right, in order to unmask the second ; the covering 
sergeant, on the left of the first. platoon, will re- 
turn. tothe right of the company, passing by the 
front rank. 

298, When the first platoon shall have nearly 

unmasked the second, the captain will,command: 
1. Mark tume, and at the instant the unmasking 
shall’ be complete, he will add: 2. Marcu. The 
first platoon will then cease to oblique, and mark 
time. eslvrees : 
299. In the mean time the second platoon will 
have continued to marchstraight forward, and when 
it shall be nearly up with the first, the captain will 
command #orward, and at the instant the two 
platoons shall unite, add Maron; the first platoon 
will then cease to mark time. 

300. In a column, left in front, the same move- 
ment will, be executed by inverse means, the chief 
of the second. platoon giving the command For- 
ward, and the captain adding the command Marca, 
when the platoons are united, 

301. The guide of the second platoon, on its right, 
will pass to its left flank the moment the platoon 


164 {THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


begins to oblique; the guide of the first, on its right, 
remaining on that flank of the platoon. 

302. The ‘instructor will’ also sometimes cause 
the company to break and re-form, by platoon, by 
his own direct commands. In this case, ‘he’ will 
give the general commands ‘prescribed for the cap- 
tain above: 1. Break into platoons ; 2. Maron; 
and 1. Form company ; 2. Marcu. : 

303.. If, in breaking the company into platoons, 
the subdivision that breaks off should mark time 
too long, it might, in a column of many subdi- 
visions, arrest the march of the following one, 
which would cause a lengthening of the column 
and a loss of distances. 

304, In breaking into platoons, it is necessary 
that the slit aotusowtes ok oblique’ should not shorten 
the step too much, in order not to lose distance in 
column, and not to arrest the march of the following 
subdivision. - oA , 

805. Ifa platoon obliques too far to a flank, it 
would be obliged to oblique again to the opposite 
flank to regain the direction, and by the double 
movement arrest probably the march of the follow- | 
ing subdivision. 

306. The chiefs of those platoons which oblique 
will face to their platoons, in order to enforce the 
observance of the foregoing principles. 

807. When, ina column of several companies, they 
break in succession, it is of the greatest importance 
that each company should continue to march in the 
same step, without shortening or slackening, while 
that which ome breaks, although the following 
‘company. should close up on’ the preceding one. 
This attention is essential to guard against an elon- 
gation of the column. . | 

308. Faults of but little moment, in a column of — 
a few companies, would be serious inconveniences 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. | 165 


in a general column of many battalions. Hence 
the instructor will give the greatest care in causing 
all the prescribed principles to be strictly observed. 
To this end, he will hold himself on the. directing 
flank, the better to ob- — vite eer ie | 
serve all the movements. S 
eo 4 OE oe ie 
Being wm .,Column, to8 B 
Break. Files to the 5 
Rear, and to cause  -. 
them .to. re-enter. into. 4 
-( -Lone.—Plate 46. 


309. The company be- 
ing in march, and sup- 
~ posed to constitute ‘a sub- 
“division of a column right 
“(or left) in front, when 
the instructor shall wish 
to cause files to break off, “<N- 
“he will give the order to Plate 46. ‘To break files to the rear. 
the captain, who will immediately turn to his. com 
pany, and command: | 


1. Lwo files from left (or right) to rear. 2. Maxcu. 


810. At the command march, the two files on 
the left (or right) of the company will face to the 
right, (or left) and .double, the others will continue 
to march straight forward. . If the files are broken 
from the left; the.men will immediately file to the 
left, so that the odd numbers will cover the first 
and third, and the even numbers, the second and 

» fourth files, from that flank of the company. Ifthe 
files are broken from the right, the men will imme- 
diately file to the right so that the even numbers 
will cover the first and third, and the odd numbers, 











166, | THE SoMOOL Manuat.. 


the second and fourth files, from ihiat flank’ of the 
company. . The men. will be careful not to in their 
distances, and to keep aligned. 

311. If the instructor should still wish to break 
two files from the same side, he will give the order 
to the captain, who will proceed; as.above/directed. 

812. At the command march, given by the cap- 
tain, the flles already broken, advancing a little the 
outer shoulder, will gain the space of two files to 
the right, if the files are broken from the left; and 
to the left, if the files are broken from the right, 
shortening at the same time the step, in order to 
make room between themselves and, the; rear.rank 
of the company for the files last, ordered to the rear; 
the latter will break by the same commands, and i in 
the same manner as the first.. The men who donble 
should increase the length of the step, in order to 
prevent distances from being lost. 

313. The instructor may thus diminish the front 
of a company by breaking off successive groups of 
two files, but the new files must always be broken 
from the same side. 

314. The instructor, wishing to cause files ‘broken 
off to return into line, will give the: order. to the 
captain, who will immediately command : 


1. Two files into line, 2. Maxony 


815. At the command march, the first two’ files 
of those marching by the flank will: return briskly 
into line, and the others will gain the space of two 
files by advancing the inner shoulder so wand the 
flank to which they belong. 

816. The captain’ will turn to his: ésinplaney to 
watch the observance of the principles shee have 
just been prescribed. 

317. The instructor having caused groups of #0 
files to break one after another, and to return again 


1f4s > TT? 


7 


_ "HE SCHOOL MANUAL. _  _—s_—«wi1 67 


o4nto line, will afterward cause two or three groups 
to break together, and for this purpose will. c¢om- 
“imand : Pour or'siw files from left (or right) to-rear ; 
Maron.’ The’ files designated will face'to the right 
(or deft) and double, ‘and will then immediately file 
into their proper places as indicated No. 310, taking 
‘care that the distances ave preserved...0 005) | 
318. The instructor will next’ order the captain 
to cause two or three groups to be brought into line 
- at once, who, turning to the company, will com- 
AMRWGTAL. OF Tai. MOT Uh KATIA Rocck oT 
Hour or sia files into line—Manron. 


oao7819.. At the command march,,the. files | desig- 
nated, will advance the inner shoulder, move, up and 
form on the, flank of the company by.the. shortest 
‘AA AOBe ree fy fad » 46 onmiod. vie At oe 
320...As often as files shall break. off.to the, rear, 
. the,guide.on that flank will gradually close. on.the 
nearest front-rank man remaining, in: line, and he 
will also open out to make room for files ordered 
Wee sine ee See ee re ae 

321. Thé files which march in the rear are dis- 
posed in the following order’: the left files as if the 
~ company was marehing by the’ right flank; andthe 
right files as ifthe company was marching bythe 
left flank. Consequently, whenever there is on the 
right or left of a subdivision a file which does not 
belongto a group, it will be broken singly. 

322: It is necessary to the preservation of dis- 
- tances in column, that the men should be habitu- 
-ated in the schools of detail to execute the move- 
ments of this article with precision. | 

. 323. If the new files broken to the rear do not 
step well. off when filing to the left or right 5 if, 
when files are ordered’ into line, they do not move 
up with promptitude and precision, in either case 


168 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


the following files will be arrested in their march, 
and. thereby cause. the column to be lengthened 
out. — | at algotd: 0 
324, The instructor will place himself on the 
flank from which the files are broken, to assure him- 
self of the exact observance of the principles. 
| 825. Files will only be broken off from the side 
of direction, in order that the whole company may 
easily pass from the front to the flank march. 


Articix III. 


To March the Column in Route and to Excecute the 
Movements incident thereto. 


326. The swiftness of the route step will be one 
hundred and ten steps in a minute}; this swiftness 
will be habitually maintained in columns in route, 
when the roads and ground may permit. if 

327. The company being at a halt, and supposed 
to constitute a subdivision of a column, when the 
instructor shall wish to cause it to march in the 
route step, he will command: 


1..Column, forward. 2. Guide, left (or right). 

i :. Foute step. 4. Moe. aff) 

328. At the command march, repeated by the 
captain, the two ranks will step off together; the 
rear rank will take in marching,*by shortening a 
few. steps, a distance of one» pace } (twenty-eight 
inches) from the rank preceding, which. distance 
will be computed from the breasts of the men in 
the rear rank to the knapsacks of the men in the 
front rank. The men, without further command, 
will immediately carry their arms a¢ will,.as indi- 
cated in the School of the Soldier, or they may sling 
them on their backs muzzleup. They will no longer 
be required to march in the cadence pace, or with the 
same foot, or to remain silent... The files will march 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL, | 169 


at ease; but care will be taken:to prevent the ranks 
from. intermixing, the front rank. from. getting in 
advance of the guide, and the rear rank from: open- 
ing to too great a distance. : 

329. The company marching in the route step, 
the instructor will cause it to change direction, 
which will be executed without formal commands, 
on a simple caution from the captain ; the rear rank 
will come up te, change direction in the same: man- 
ner as the front rank. Each rank will conform. it- 
self, although in the route step, to the principles 
which have been prescribed for the change in closed 
ranks, with this difference only, that the pivot man, 
instead of taking steps of nine, will take steps of 
fourteen inches, in order to clear the wheeling 
point. 189 | | rs 

' 330. The company marching inthe route step, 
to cause it to pass to the cadence step, the instruc- 

tor will first order pieces to be brought to the right 
shoulder, and then command : : 


1. Quick tume. 2. Maron. 


331. At the command march, the men will re- 
sume the cadenced step, and will close so as to leave 
a distance of sixteen inches between each rank. 

332. The company marching in the cadenced 
pace, the instructor, to cause it to take the route 
step, will command : 


1. Leoute step. 2. Marcu. 
333. At the command march, the front rank will 


continue the step of twenty-eight inches, the rear — 


rank will take, by gradually shortening the step, 
the distance of twenty-eight inches from the front 
rank; the men will carry their arms at will. 


334. If the company be marching in the route> 


step, and the instructor should suppose the. neees- 


i 


G93 j . F ° 
: ah Fid : 5 hs 


170 | ——- -‘THE scHOOL MANUAL. 


sity of marching by the flank in the same Atieption, 

he will command: © | bad 

1. Company by the right (or left) flank. 2. By 
0, file left (or right). . 3. Marcu. 


335. At the command march, the company will 
face to the right (or left)'in marching, the captain 
will place himself by the side ofthe guide who 
conducts the leading flank ; this’ guide will wheel 
‘tinmediately to the left or right; all the files will 
come in succession to wheel on the same spot as the 
guide; ‘if there be files broken off to the rear, they 
will, by wheeling, regain ‘their respective places, 
and follow the movement of the company. 

336. The instructor having caused the company 
to be again formed into line, will exercise it in in- 
creasing and diminishing’ front,-by platoon, which 
will be executed by the same commands, and ‘the 
same means, as if the company were marching in 
the cadenced step. When the company breaks into 
platoons, the chief of each will move to the flank 
of his platoon, and will take the place of the guide, 
who will'step back into the rear rank. | 

337. The company being in column, by-platoon, 
and supposed to march in the route step, the in- 
structor can cause the front to be diminished and 
increased, by section, if the platoons have ‘a front 
of twelve files orymore. ... . « | 
_ 8388. The movements of diminishing and inereas- 
ing front, by section, will be executed according to 
the principles indicated for the same movements by 
platoon. . The right’ sections of platoons will be 
commanded by the captain and first lieutenant, 
respectively ; the left sections, by the two next 
subalterns in’ rank, or, in their absence, by ser- 
geants. : a, | 

389. The instructor wishing to diminish by sec- 


THE SOHOOL MANUAL. 1 1 
7 tion} with give » the order to the ‘captain, who will 
. command : 


ide Break into secbions. yi Mazon 


840. As soon as the platoons shall be broken, | 
fed chief of section will place himself on its di- 
recting flank in the front rank, the guides, who will 
be thus displaced, will fall back: into the rear rank: 
the file closers will close up to within one apa of. 
this: rank. 
» 841. Platoons will be broke’ into! Sections only 
in the column in route, the movement will never 
be executed in the maneuvers, whatever mays be 
the front of the company. : 
342. When the instructor shall wish to re-form 
platoons, he will give the ordet to the captain, who 
will peje 


1. Form platoons. 2. Marcu. 


343. At the first command, each chief of section 
will place himself before its center, and the guides 
_will pass into the front rank. At the command 
‘ mareh, the movement will be executed as has been 
prescribed for forming company. © The moment the 
‘platoons are formed, ‘the chiefs of the left séctions 
will return to their places as file closers. 

844. The instructor will also cause to be executed 
‘the diminishing’ and increasing front by files, ‘as 
~ prescribed in the preceding artidle, and in the same ~ 
manner, as if marching in’ the eadenced step. 
When the company is: broken into sections, the sub- 
divisions must-not be reduced toa front of less than | 
six files, not counting the chief of the section. 

845. The company being broken by Big toon or 
by section, the instructor will ecause-it, marching’ in 
the route step, to march by the flank in the ‘same 
direction, by the commands - the means indicat- 


172 {HE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


ed, Nos. 334 and 335. The moment the subdivi- 
sions shall face.to-the right! (or left),.the first file of 
each will wheel to the “eft (or right), insmarching, 
to prolong the direction, and to unite.with the rear 
file of the subdivision immediately preceding. The 
file closers will take their’ habitual places in the 
‘march by the flank, before the union of ‘the subdi- 
visions, "- | 

346. If the company be marching by the right 
flank, and, the instructor should wish to. undouble 
the files, which might sometimes be found: neces- 
‘sary, he will inform the captain, who, after causing 
the cadenced step to be resumed, and arms to. be 
shouldered or supported, will command: 


1. In two ranks, wndouble files. 2. Marcu. 


347. At the second.command, the odd numbers 
will continue to march straight forward,.the even 
numbers will shorten the step, and obliquing to the 
left, will place themselves promptly behind the odd 
numbers: the, rear, rank will gain a step to the left 
so as to retake the touch of elbows on the side of 
the front rank. | , ¥ 

348. If the company be marching by the left 
flank, it will be the even numbers who will con- 
tinue to march forward, and the odd numbers who 
will undouble. | | 

349. If it be found necessary, from the narrow- 
ness of the way or other cause, to.reduce-the, front 
still further, the aaptain, onan intimation from, the 
instructor, will command: | . 


1. In one rank, undouble files. - 2. Manon. 
350. At. the command march, the right. or left 
guide, with the leading front-rank man, will con- 
tinue ‘the march, the rear-rank man stepping in rear 
of his file leader as soon as he is able to) pass ; the 


‘ 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 178 
other files marking time. The second file, and suc- 
cessively all the other files, will step off as soon as 
sufficient distance is gained, the front-rank man of 
each file following immediately the rear-rank man 
of the file next in front of him, and each rear-rank 
man. taking his place as above indicated. © 

851. If theoinstructor wishes to double files, he 
will so indicate to the captain, who will command : 


1. Jn two-ranks, double files. 2. Maron. 


352. At the command march, the rear-rank men 
will take a side step to the right (or left), and each 
rank will close up on its leading file. =~ 3 

353. If the instructor should wish again to double 
the files, he will give the order to the captain, who 
will command: : 


1. In four ranks, double files. 2. Marcu. 


354. At the command march, the files will double 
in the manner as explained, when the company 
faces by the right or the left flank. The instructor 
will afterward cause the route step to be resumed. 

355. The various movements prescribed in this 
lesson may be executed in double quick time. The 
men will be brought, by, degrees, to pass over at 
this gait about eleven hundred yards in seven min- 
utes. i | : wae 

356. When the company marching in the route 
step shall ‘halt, the rear rank’ will close up at the 
command halt, and the whole will shoulder‘arms. 

357.’ Marching in the route step, the men will be 
permitted to carry their pieces in the manner they 
shall find most convenient, paying attention only to 
“holding the muzzles up, so as to avoid accidents. 


174 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


Articte LY. vi | 

—- Countermarch.—-Plate 47. | : 
858. The company being at a halt, and supposed — 
to constitute part of a column, right in front, ;~when 


the instructor shall wish to cause it to counter- . 
march, he will command: HDaLoaiiw | 


1. Countermarch. 2. Company, -right—F acn. : 
| 3. By file left. 4. Maron. ors 
859, At the second command, the.company will 
face to the right; the two guides. to the right about ; 

| SEAR ge Dl pa cineae! aes eg | 


LIZA N ZAZA AAA EE 
W292 WALA TD CCL lh UL Yl il WO UL, a 













=i iets 


ne 








PD of a ra 
STOCTTTTOCO CLO 


rrr yr Tht tT dl) 


Plate 47. The countermar¢h. | 
| 














the captain will go to the right of his company and 
‘cause two files to break to the rear, and then place 
himself bythe side ofthe front-rank man, to con- 
duct him. of | : 
360..At the command march, both. guides will © 
stand fast; the company. will step.off smartly ; the — 
first. file, conducted, by. the captain, will wheel | 
around the right guide, and, direct its march along — 
the front rank so as to arrive behind, and two paces — 
from the left guide; each file will come in suc- 
cession to wheel on the same ground around the © 
‘right guide; the leading file having arrived at a 


; 
\ 
: 
7 
. 


‘ ‘ 
THE SOHOOL MANUAL. 175 


‘point opposite to the left guide, the captain will 
command : 
1. Company. 2. Harr. 3. Front. 4. Light— 
3 Dress. sae ¢ 

361. The first command will be given at fowr 
paces from the point where the leading file. is.to. 
rest. | Ts gee gee 

362. At the second command, the company will 
halt. 3 alicia 

863. At the third, it will face to the front. 

364. At the fourth, the company will dress by the 
right; the captain will step two paces outside of 
the left guide, now on the right, and direct the 
alignment so that the front rank may be inclosed 
between the two guides; the company being align- 
ed, he will command Front, and *place himself be- 
fore the center of the company-as if in column; the 
guides, passing along the front rank, will shift to 
their proper tiaces, on the right and left of that 
ranks VOR | , 

865. In a column, by platoon, the countermarch 
will be executed by the same commands, and ac- 
cording to the same principles; the guide of each 
platoon will face about, and its chief will place him- 
self by the side of the file on the right, to conduct it. 

366. In a column, left in front, the countermarch— 
will be executed by inverse commands and means, 
but according to the same principles. Thus, the 
movement will be made by the right flank of sub- 
divisions, if the right be in front, and. by the left. 
flank, if the left be in front ; in both cases the sub- 
tie Ri will wheel by file to the side ofthe front 
rank, | 


G) ; oh é 


176 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


L wei} 


ARTICLE V. | 


Beg 


in Column by Platoon, to Form on the 


a = nhs t) nto Line of Battle.—Plate 48. 
367. ‘The column nN iti r ight 4 in front, being” 





























; 


Jab ke 











CT — 


a clasrst 
4 





i ae 
| AE BON es ea Nis ak 
] OS A OTS BS MD PEE 


“alta 














Plate 48. On the rightintoline. Guide right. 


A. command, the, 


a Ar 

2D 

a we 

ll (4 

AYA right 
7. 

awa rig 





in- march, the instrue- 
tor, wishing to form it, 
on the right into line 


if of pettdes will com- 


mand : ' i 
1. On the wight tht 


vey line. 2. Guide meght. 


368., At the second, 
guide, 
slatoon will. 
quiciss to itsy 
ank, and the 
men. will ‘touch ; el- 
bows to the right; the ., 


of.each - 
shift 


eolumn will. continue 


to march straight for-\ 
ward... dt vd-ils 
369.. The instructor 
having given, the sec- 
ond) command,..will,. 
move. briskly,,to,, the; 
point at which. the 
right of the company, 


ought. to. rest, inline, 


and place himself fa- 
cing the point of di- 
rection to the. left, 
which he will chabea, 

370. The line of bat- 


tle ought to be so chosen that the guide of each 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. ETT 


platoon, after having turned ‘to the right, may have, 
* least, ten paces to take before arriving upon that 
ine. : 

871. The head of the column being nearly oppo- 
site to the instructor, the chief of the ‘first platoon 
will command: 1. ight turn; and when exactly 
opposite to that point, he will add: 


2. Marcu. 


872. At the command march, the first platoon 
will turn to the right, in conformity with the prin- 
ciples prescribed’ in the School of the Soldier. 
Its: guide will’ so direct his march as to bring 
the front-rank man, next on his left, opposite to the 
instructor; the chief of the platoon will march be- 
fore its center; and when its guide shall be near the 
line of battle, he will command :.. | 


yn» A. Platoon... 2. Harr. 


373. At the command halt, which will be given 
at the instant the right of the platoon shall arrive at 
the distance of three paces from ‘the line of battle, 
the platoon will halt; the files, not yet in line, will 
come up promptly. The guide will throw himself 
onthe line of battle; opposite to one of the three left 
files of his platoon; he will face to the instructor, 
who will align him on.the point. of direction to the 
left. The chief of platoon having, at the same time, 
gone to the'point where the right of the company is 
to rest, will, as soon as he sees all the files of the 
platoon in line, command: — 


| Lef%yht—Drxss. 

874: At this, the ‘first platoon will align itself; 
the front-rank man, who finds himself opposite to 
the guide, will rest his breast lightly against the 
right arm of this guide, and the chief of the platoon, 

8* | 


17 8 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


from the right, will, direct the alignment on this 
man... 

375. The second ‘platoon will eontinye to denelsts 
straight forward, until its guide shall arrive oppo#i 
site to the left file of the first; it will then: turn to 
the right at the command of its chief, andi march 
toward the line of battle, its guide directing himself 
on. the left file of the first platoon. 

376. The guide having arrived at the distance of 
three paces from the line of battle, this platoon will 
be halted, as prescribed for the first; at the instant 
it halts, its guide will.spring on the. line of ‘battle, 
opposite to one of the three left files of his platoon, © 
and will be assured in his position by the instructor. | 

377..The chief of the second: platoon,:seeing all. 
its files in line, and its guide establibhed: on te die. 
rection, will command: 69 ait ot 


Righi=“D ie! 


378. Having given this command, he will return 
to his place as.a, file closer, passing around the left ; 
the second platoon, will dress up on the, alignment: 
of the first, and, when. established, the” iespeeme will 
command : . 7 

FRonv. 


379. The movement ended, the instructor will 
command: 
Guides—Posts. 


380. At this command, the two guides. will re- 
turn to their places in line of battle, 

881. A column, by platoon, left. in front, will 
- form on the left into line of battle, according to the 

same principles, and, by inverse’means, ibpiyine to 
the second platoon what i is prescribed for the first, 
and reciprocally. The chief of the second platoon. 
hate aligned it, from. the ROvEnS of fakeline ed kan 


THE CCH OOL MANU a 179 
will retire to his place as.a file closer. ,The captain 
having halted t 1e first platoon ‘three paces behind 
the line of battle, will go to the same point to align 
this platoon, and then command: Front. At the 
command, guzdes—posts, given by the instructor, 
the captain will shift to his, proper flank, and the 
guides take their places in line of battle. |” 

“382. When the companies of a regiment. are to 
be exercised at the same time in the school of the 
company, the colonel will indicate the lesson or 
lessons, they are severally to execute. The whole 
will commence:by:a bugle signal, and terminate in 
like manner. on fad 


Formation of .a. Company from two. Ranks: into 
single, Lranks, and, reciprocally. 

883. The company being formed into two ranks 
_in the manner indicated in the School of the Sol- 
dier, and supposed to make part of a column, right 
or left in front; when the instructor shall wish to 
form it into single rank, he will command : | 


1. In one ranky.form company, 2. Maron: > 
384. At the’ first command, the right guide will 


face to the right! ~~ | og 

385. Atthe command march, the right guide will 
ere he ‘and march in the prolongation of the front 
ee, 2 ein os Sige 4 BG 

386. The first file will step off at the same time 
with the guide; the front-rank man will turn to the 
right at the first step, follow the guide, and be him- 
self followed by the rear-rank man of his file, who. 
will come to turn on the same spot where he had 
turned. ‘The second file, and successively all the 
other files, will step off as has been prescribed for - 
the first, the’ front-rank man of each ‘file following 
immediately the rear-rank man of the file next on 


180 THE SOHOOL MANUAL. 


his right. The captain will superintend the move- 
ment, and when the last man shall, have stepped. 
on he will halt the company, and face it, to the. 
ront. | AE GLO a a 
387. The file closers will take their places in line 
of battle, two paces in rear of the rank. 
388. The company being in single rank, when 
the instructor shall wish.to form it into two ranks, , 
he will command: .._. Dee ce ee ee 


BA 


1. In too ranks, form company. 2. Company ~ 
right—F scx. © 3. Manrou: MIAO 44 

389. At the second command, the company will 
face to the right: the right guide and:the man on 
the right will remain faced ‘to the front: > _ 

390. At the command. march, the men,who have 
faced to. the right will step off and form. files in, the, 
following manner: the.second man in the rank will, 
place himself behind the first to form the first file; 
the third will place himself by the. side of the first 
in the front rank; the fourth behind the third in 
the rear rank. All the others will, in‘ like manner, 
place themselves, alternately, in the front and ,rear 
rank, and will thus form files of two. men),on, the, 
left_of: those already formed.) coos adeth Bae 

391. The formations above deseribed will be ha-, 
bitually executed by the right of companies; but. 
when the instructor shall wish to;haye them ,exe- 
cuted by the lett, he will face the,.company, ebout,. 


and post the guides in the rear rank...) ial 

392. The formation will then be executed. ay tue 
same commands, and according to the same princi- 
ples as by the front rank; the movement commenc- 
ing with the left file, now become,the right, and in 
each file by, the rear-rank man, now. become the 
front; the left guide will conform, to what has been. 
prescribed for the right. | 


THE SCHOOL’ MANUAL. 181 


393. The formation ended, the instructor will 
face the company to its proper front. » 

394. When a battalion in line has to execute 
either of the formations above described, the colonel 
will cause it to break to the rear by the right or 
left of companies, and will then give the commands 
just prescribed for the instructor. Each company 
will execnte the movement as if acting singly. 


Formation of a Company from two Leanks into four, 
and reciprocally, at a Halt, and % m March. 


- 395. The company being formed. iu two pile at 
a halt, and supposed to form part of a column right. 
in front, when the instructor shall wish, to. formi it 
into’four ranks, he will command: 


1. In four ranks, form company. 3, Com, ypany 
left—F ack. 3. Marcu (or double guick—Maxcn). 


396. At the second command, the left guidé will 
remain faced to the front, the company will face to 
the left; the rear rank will gain the distance of one 
pace from. the front rank by a side step to the lett 
and rear, and the men will form into four ranks as 
prescribed i in the School of the Soldier. 

397. Atthe command march, the first file of four 
men:will reface to the front without undoubling. 
All the other files of four will step off, and closing 
successively to about five inches of the preceding 
file, will halt, and immediately face to the front, 
the men remaining doubled. : 

398. The tile closers will take their new places in 
une battle, at two paces in rear of the fourth 
ran 

399. The captain will superintend the movement. 

400. The company being in four ranks, when the 
instructor shall wish to form it into two ranks, he 
will command : a 


182 _ THE SCHOOL MANUAL * 


1. In tworanks, form coinpany. 2. Company right. — 
—Face. 3. Manon (or:double guack—Maren).« 
401. At the second ‘command, the left guide will 

stand fast, the coinpany will face to the right. °°” 

' 402. At the conimand march, the right guide 

will step off and march in prolongation of the front 

rank. The leading file’ of four men will step off at 
the same time, the other files ‘standing fast; the 
second tile will step.off when there shall.be between 
it and the; first space.sufficient) to form. into.two 
ranks. The following files will execute successively 
what has been' prescribed for the second.’ As‘soon 
as the last file shall have its distance, the instructor 
willtcommand? Unde tolontient ont modw: s08t | 
1. Company. 2. Hatr. 3. Fronr._ 


ill 


403. At the command front, the company w 
face to the front, and the files will undouble. 

404. The company being formed in two ranks, 
and marching to‘ the front, when the instructor shall 
wish to form it into four ranks,he will command: 
1. In four ranks, form company. 2. By the left, 

double files. 3, Marcu (or double quick—Mancu). 

405. At the command march, the left gnide and 
the left file of the company will continue to march: 
straight to, thefront; the company will make a half. 
face to, the left, the odd. numbers placing -themselves 
behind the even numbers... The even numbers of 
the rear rank will shorten their. steps: alittle, to 
permit. the,odd ;nunsbers of the front rank! to get . 
between, them and. the even numbers of) that rank: 
‘The files thus formed of fours, except the left file, 
will continue to: march obliquely, lengthening their 
steps slightly, so. as) to keep constantly abreast of 
the guide :, each file will close successively on the 
file next on its left, and when at the proper distance 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 1838 


from that file, will face to the front by a half face 
to the right, and take the touch of elbows to the 
left. 

406. The company being in march to the front 
in four ranks, when the instructor shall wish to 
form it into two ranks, he will eommand : 


>4 { . 


7 | 


' 


1. In two ranks, form company. 2. By the right, 
undouble files. 3. Marcu (or double quick— 


Maron). 


407. At the command march, the left guide and 
the left file of the company will continue to march” 
straight to the front; the company will make a half 
face to the right and. march obliquely, lengthening 
the step a little, in order to keep, as near, as possi- 
ble, abreast of the gnide.- As soon as the second 
file from the left shall have gained to the right the 
interval necessary for the left file to form into two 
ranks, the second: file will face to the front by a 
half face to the left, and march straight forward ; 
the left file will immediately form into two ranks, 
and take the touch of elbows to.the left... Each file 
will execute successively what has just been pre- 
scribed for the file next. to the left, and each file 
will form into two ranks when the file next on its 
right has obliqned the required distance, and faced 
to the front... .. ., | race Tin aie , 

408. If the company be supposed to,make, part 
of a column, left in front, these different movements 
will be executed according to the same principles 
and by inverse means, substituting the indication 


& Re 


“END OF THE SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. ed 


one 
‘ 1 
: ee err ental 


INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHURS 





GENERAL PRINCIPLES. AND DIVISION OF THE) IN>/. 
; STRUCTION... ol 


“Tar movements of skirmishers should be subjected 
to such rules as will give to the commander the 
means"of moving them in any direction with the 
greatest promptitude. | i 

“It is not expected that. these movements should 
be executed with the same precision as in closed 
ranks, nor. is it desirable, as such. exactness would 
materially interfere with their prompt execution. 

When skirmishers ‘are thrown out to clear the 
way for, and ‘to protect the advance of, the main 
corps, their‘movements should be so regulated by. 
this corps as to keep it constantly covered. : 

‘Every body of skirmishers should have a reserve, 
the strength and composition of which will vary 
according to circumstances. hae Pe? 

If the body thrown out be within sustaining dis- 
tance of the main corps, a very small reserve will 
be suflicient’for each company, whose duty it shall 
be to fill vacant places, furnish the line with’ car- 
tridges, relieve the fatigued, and serve as a rallying 
point for the skirmishers. 

If the main corps, be at a, considerable, distance, 
besides the company reserves, another reserve will 
be required, composed of entire companies, which 


THE, SCHOOL MANUAL. 185 


will be employed to sustain and reinforce such parts 
of the line as may be ‘warmly attacked ; this re- 
serve should be strong,enough to relieve at least 
half the companies deployed as skirmishers. 

The reserves should, be placed behind the center 
of the line of skirmishers, the ;company reserves at 
one hundred and fifty; and.the principal reserve at 
four hundred paces. This rule, however, is not in- 
variable. The reserves, while holding themselves 
within sustaining distance of the line, should be, as 
much as possible, in- position, to afford each other 
mutual protection,. and. must carefully profit by any 
accidents of the ground to conceal themselves from 
the view of the enemy, and to shelter themselves 
from his fire. ° 1a By 

The movements of skirmishers will be executed 
in quick, or double quick time. The run will be 
resorted to only in eases of urgent necessity. 

Skirmishers will be permitted to carry their pieces 
in the manner most convenient to them. | 

The movements will be habitually indicated by 
the sounds of the bugle.) ©) O40 MS 

The officers, and, if necessary, the non-commis- 

sioned officers, will repeat, and, cause the commands 
to be executed, as soon as they are given; but to 
avoid mistakes, when the signals are employed, 
they will wait until the last bugle note is sounded 
before commencing the movement. ; ' 
-» When skirmishers. are ordered to move rapidly, 
the officers and non-commissioned, officers will see 
that the men economize. their strength; keep ol, 
and. profit by all the. advantages which the ground 
may offer for eover..'It-is, only by this continual 
watehfulness on the part of all grades that a lineof 
skirmishers can attain suecess. |). heb od 
. This instruction, will be divided into. five. :arti- 
cles, and subdivided as follows: (0 fo))) bosom 


186 THE ‘SCHOOL MANUAL. 
ip Po : datos forward, 


9) 
ogi 
ime To alan sfaataias 
BO To rélieve skirmishers. 
i abiebin.a IT. rT | 
To advance i in line. . | 
x fe retreat in line. 


O ae direction. 
. To mare iby the flank, . 


ARTICLE, II. 


1, To fire at.a halt. 
2. To fire PORTODIAS 


» Arnone rv. 


di ee erp : 
2. To form easy to lta in any direction. 
3, The assembly. 0.95 0 Big 


‘Anricnn v 


1.'To deploy a battalion as ie ag A A ff AO B 

2: To rally the battalion deployed as skirmishers, 

In the first four articles, it is supposed that the 
movements are executed by a company: deployed as 
skirmishers, on a front equal to that of the battalion 
in order of battle, In the fifth artiele, itis sup- 
posed that each company of the battalion, being de 
ployed as skirmishers, occupies a front of one han 
dred paces. From these°two jexamiples, rules may 
be deduced for all cases, whatever may be the nu- 
merical strength of the skirmishers ‘and the extent 
of ground they ought’ to occupy. Divthd.ga Dos 


ath SeHbot, SKANUAL, 187 


Articté I. 
_ DEPLOYMENTS.. 


A Gompany may be deployed as skirmishers in 
two ways: forward, and by the flank. | 

The deployment forward will be adopted when 
the company is behind the line on which it is:to be 
established as skirmishers; it will be deployed by 
the flank, when it finds itself already on that line. _ 

Whenever a company is to be deployed as skir- 
mishers, it will be divided into two platoons, and 
each platoon will be subdivided into two sections; 
the comrades in battle, forming groups of four men, 
will be careful to know and to sustain each other. 
The captain will assure himself that the files in the 
center of each platoon andsection are designated. 

A compatly may be deployed as skirmishers on 
its right, left, or center file, or any other named file 
whatsoever. In this manner skirmishers may be 
thrown forward with the greatest possible rapidity 
on any ground they may be required to occupy. 

A chain of skirmishers ought ‘generally to pre- 
serve their alignment, but no advantages which the 
ground may present should be sacrificed-to attain 
this. regularity. ee CEM ip Hh GO} ay 

The interval between skirmishers dépends on the 
extent of ground to be covered; but in general it is 
not proper that the groups of four men should be 
removed more than forty paces from:each other. 
The habitual, distanee between men of the same 
group in open grounds will be five paces; in no 
case will they lose sight of each other. 

The front to be oceupied to cover a battalion 
comprehends its front and the half of each interval 
which separates it from the battalion on its right 
and left. If a line whose wings are not supported 





4 








On 


Trex 


left file—take intervals. 





























13 
= 
: 
See eras \ x 3 , 
+ SONS % 
i ‘Se he: 
¢ 5. Oe ee Nee * & 
+ SE EE a ei “s . 
me es ata SOX 
BB-~=—-~--..5__ : ee, SN a 5 - 
- ee--.- [Pah aaa a A Os he & 
ae = gens NO ee 23 * 
— : BeX. Ss , « \ 
| i BE Nee Ss 
: ee wee . B SL SS \\\ 3 
Be. > TSH = -S-- = a NS 
=} é / ea. SA Ry . 
\ x ‘ 
eae dak NNN 
SS-- .? ' > “ an : ASN \\ 
4 E ” - S My 
Be ae = Wi 
Be. e= : xy 
a ‘ AN 
" SS 
==: . SF 








F4, 





DRDO SO OOU MMA OR AHGk Beene 


=a 


— 






, 
44, 
4 77. 
ere 
ca 
2A, 6 52. 


44. 


























it 


1858; 


| Fe : : br ~ . 
eee vociochesStaggessssscssoe! 
“age asy , 


: 


Plate 45; 





THE SOH( JL M iNUAL, | 189 


should be covered by skirmishers, it will be ueces- 
sary either to protect the flanks with skirmishers, 
or to extend them in front of the’line so far be- 
yond the wings as effectually to oppose any attempt 
which might be made by the enemy’s ‘skirmishers 
to disturb the flanks. HH | 9 Hes Pal 9 GO 3101 zt 

* 0 DEPLOY FoRWaRD.’ (Plate45.), | 

(A.).A company being at a halt or in march, when 
the captain shall wish to deploy it forward on the 
left file of the first platoon, holding the‘ second 


platoon in reserve, he will command; ~ 
1. Ferst platoon—as skirmishers... 

2. On the left fle—take intervals. , 
i © '8. Maron (or double quick—Maron),, »_ 


| (0.): At the first. command, the second and third 
lieutenants will place, themselves rapidly two paces 
behind the centers of the right, and left sections of 
the first platoon; the’ fifth sergeant will move one 
pace in front of the center of the first platoon, and 
will place himself between the two sections in the 
front rank as soon as the movement. begins; the 
fourth sergeant will place himself. on the left of the 
front rank of the same platoon as soon as he can 
pass. ° The captain will indicate to, this sergeant the 
point om which he wishes him to. direct his, march. 
The first lieutenant, placing himself before the center 
of’ the second platoon, will. command : | 


ted Second. platoon backward —MArot. | 


...(D.) At, this command, the second platoon will 
step three paces to the rear, so as to unmask the 
flank of the first platoon. It will then be-halted by. 
its chief, and the second sergeant will place himself 


on the left, and the third sergeant on the right flank 


~~ 


a : SMe J Ug i 
196 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


of this platoon... If [ ifthe: co ompany. is “on. ‘the: match; 
the second platoon, bia BB: Haus! at the, fi rst com- 


ee 





and. ogo oO} wliisntogite a 
ohh At the, ¢ and nah gio 
four men, conducted b yt e fo Ae aot 

direct itself on the point indicate ie 


Siete 





shoulder, pei moye, diagonally to the het. in 
double quick time, so as to gain: to to ‘the®, le 
space of, twenty paces, Ww ae “chil! ‘be the® a ies 
between each. group, and that i immiédia Sec 

left. When the second group from’ the’ fe ial 
arrive on a‘line with.and twenty, paces from the 
first, it will:march straight to: the(front, conforming 
to the gaitoand direction\ ofthe, first, keeping con- 
stantly on the same alignment and at twenty paces 
from it. The third group, ‘and alli ‘theliothers, will 
conform to what has just been “prescribed for: the 
second; they will ‘arrive successively conc'the: line: 
The right guide will arrive with the: Jast:proup,! 90. 

(C. ) "The left guide having reached the sevens 
ths ret of the line should rest, the: apt will ‘com- 
mand the skirmishers''to halt; the men domposing 
each group of fours ‘will : then immediately: deploy 
at five paces from’ each other, andoto the:!night and 
left of the front-rank ‘man of the!‘even» filé! in each 
group, the rear-rank men placing themselves on: the 

eft of their file leaders. If any groups) ‘be»mot; in 
line at the command Aalt, they will: move mp rapidly, 
conforming to, what has just been prescribed. 

If, during the deployment, the line should be fired 
upon, by. t se enemy, the captain may cause. the 
groups: of fours to deploy, as ey gain their proper 

istances. ., 

‘The line. being, formed, the non: -cotiimissioner 
officers on the ri ai left, and. center, of the platoo’ 
will place heameel es ten paces in reat of the lin” 


e 


fh" SoHob1) MANTLE. 101 


sitet the’ ‘positions, they" respectively oceii- 
ae . hiefs of" sects > Will “proaptly' Fé: 
ian irregularities,’ and thén place here les 
Bf -fivé or thitty paces ‘in tear of the center of 
Betions, each dving with him four men taken 
paved the reserve and also a bug ler, who will repeat, 
if ‘belay > the'signals’ Teoiiseide by ‘thé captain. \ 
-Skirmis ers ‘shou uld_ be Particnilaits iPabPaietsdons 
th \ ve of any covet which thé giound may 
offer, and should ‘lie flat ‘on thé ground whénever 
Rea a Movement is*nécéssary to protect them from 
the fire,of the enemy. Regularity in the alignmetit 
should ‘yiéld to this 1mportant ‘advaiitage. 9 
(A) Wilen the mo¥ethent begins, the fip st Feu: 
ténant will face the secoiid platsirwdoud, aud inareh 
it promptly, and ie the ifs rest line, to'about ore 
bind rand Aft Jacés in rear Of ‘the: ‘center 6f the 
line, He will hold it always at this distance, unless 
or ered to the contrary: | 
~The reserve will conform itself 26? afl the: tove- 
niénts of the lite: ° LAis rule vs generar © 
Light. troops will carry their bayotiéts sanbagtrly 
in’ ‘tha’ scabbafd, and this rulé appliés equally to the 
skirmishers and ' he reserve} Wwhehevér bayon 1ets-are 
required! to: be jfixed,, a, particular, signal will be 
iven. The captain will give a general superin- 
tendetice to the whole deployment, and then promptly — 
place himself about eighty paces in rear ‘of ‘the 
the i of the line. He will ‘have with hima bagi 
four men taken from the reserve ; 
_ The deployment.may be made.ou ir right or the 
center of the platoon, by the same commands, sub- 
stituting the indication right | or center for that of 
left file. _. | 
The. deployment. on thé i ities ae 4 “nontet will 
be made according. te te ea UBD LY 
above; in this latter case, the center Ut Fhe platoon 









192 THE SOHOOL MANUAL. 


will, be marked by, the right group of. fours in the 
second section; the fifth sergeant will place him- 
self on the right of this group,.and, serve as the 
guide of the platoon during the deployment. | __, 
In whatever manner the deployment be made, on 
the right, left, center (or any file), the men in each — 
roup of fours will habitually deploy at. five paces 
trom, each other, and upon the front-rank man of 
the, even-numbered: file., The, deployments will’ 
habitually be made at twenty. paces interval; but 
if a.greater interval be required, it will be indicated 
in SAG CURIA Sie lichl :  ceeren rin cat Be bei 
If a company be thrown out as skirmishers, so 
near the main body as to render a reserve unneces- 
sary, the entire company will be extended in the 
same manner, and according to the same, principles, 
as for, the deployment of a platoon. In this case, 
the third lieutenant will command _ the fourth sec- 
tion, and a non-commissioned officer designated for 
that purpose, the second. section ; the fifth sergeant 
will act as center guide; the: file closers will place 
themselves ten paces in rear of the line, and oppo- 
site their. places in line of battle. dhe first and 
second lieutenant will each have a bugler near him, 


TO DEPLOY BY THE FLANK. (Plate 46.) - 


(D.) The company being at) a. halt, when the cap: 
tain shall wish to. deploy it, by, the flank, holding 
the first platoon in reserve, he will command ; 


1.. Second platoon—as skirmishers. 2. By the wight 
jflank—take intervals. 3. Maron (or double quick — 
— Maron). | ie 
(A.) At the first command, the first and third lieu- 
tenants, will place themselves, . respectively, two 
paces behind the centers of the first and second sec- 
tions of the second platoon; the fifth sergeant will 


Pi 2 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 193 


(i 


AQDOTOUEUURUOUR ORO neee ae BURR neeee 
1S ; : 
¥--_y 





4 : mm: F; i wi 

yy 

eae B, . = Ba 
9.81 ae Le 


 Jop 








Poli 
ei. Sie. a a 4 ) 
« Ca é 7 
care  iguwuwpptieeuneee wip da 
> 4 P " am 
aor: i? TW GTO) t ny } 
pe 
Gaaa 
: : b] a z 
"a a aa -: - p> 
a a we | 
ft 
ie 
| it r aa a 








Second platoon as Skirmishers. By 
the right flank, take intervals. 











| Plate 46. 


SY a 


194 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 
GE WAUAAM @FOOHDS FHT 
place himself one'pace in front of the center of the 
second platoon; the third sergeant, as soon as he 
can pass, will place himself on the right of the front 
rank of the ‘same’ platoon, The ‘captain will. indi- 
cate to him the point om which he wishes.him to 
direct his march., The chief of the first platoon will 
execute what has*been prescribed:for the chief of 
the second platoon, page 155, C and D. The fourth 
para will place himself on the left flank of the re- 
serve, the first sergeant will remain on the right flank. 
At the second command, the first and third lieu- 
tenants will place themselves two paces behind the 
left group of their respective sections. ri 
ws) At the command march, the second platoon 
will face to the right, and commence the movement ; 
the left group of fours, will.stand fast, but will de- 
ploy as soon as there is room on its right, conforming 
to what has_been.prescribed,.page 156,.C; the third 
sergeant will place himself on the left of the right 
group, to conduct it; the second group will halt at 
twenty paces from the one jon its left, the third 
group at twenty paces from the second, and so on 
to the right. ““As'the groups halt; they will face to 
the enemy, and deploy, as has been explained for 
the left era | | 
The chiefs of sections will pay particular atten- 
tion to the successive deployments of the groups, 
keeping near the group about to halt, so as to ree- 
tify any errors which may be committed. When. 
the deployment -is-completed, they-will-place theim- 
selves thirty paces in rear of the center of their sec- 
tions, as has ‘been‘heretofore: prescribed. The non- 
commissioned officers will also place themselves as 
PIOVEQIELy See oe a cee ek al 
As soon as the movement commences, the chief 
of the first platoon, causing it to face about, will 
move it as indicated, page 157, A. 


THE SOHOOL MANUAL. 195 

JAUBAM J00HO? HT oe] 

The deployment may be made by the left flank 
according to the same principles, substituting left 
flank for roght famk. : 
If re Sean should wish to deploy the company 








upon the center of one of the platoons, hé will com- 
mand:= oad 
Rapes | : 

1. Second platoon—as skirmishers. 2. By the right 
and deft flanks—take intervals. 3. Maron (or 
At the first command, the officers and non-com- 

missioned officers will conform to what has been 

prescribed, page 157, A. . 

. At the sécond command, the first lieutenant will 

place himself behind the left group of the right sec- 

tion of the second. platoon; the third lieutenant be- 
hind the right group of the:left section of the same 

platoom =~ te a 
At the command march, the right section will 

face to thetright, the left section will face to the - 

left, the group on the right of this latter section will 
stand fast. “The two sections will move off in Op- 
posite directions; the third sergeant will place him- 
self on the left of the right file to coals it, the 
second sergeant on the right of theeleft file. The 
two groups fearest that which stands fast, will-each 
halt at twenty paces from this group, andeeach of 
the other groups will halt at twenty paces from the 
group which-is in the rear of it. Each group will 
eploy as heretofore prescribed, page 160, B. © 
he first and third lieutenants. will direct the » 
movement, holding themselves always abreast of 
the group which is about to halt. ie, TE 
The captain can cavse'the deployment to be made 
on any named group whatsoever; in this case, the 
fifth sergeant will place himself before the group 


, i 


rat f 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


bs 








pee a oe, end “ ~ 
aw 


. ‘s1Davezug 


COnGEG DAES OCeE REE te prope “ou val afer 93 figy 





rod 


@aga 82a acnoc¢ 8 606 Sen 


“Plate 41. 








THE, SOHOOL, MANUAL. 197 


indicated, and the deployment will be made accord- 
ing to the principles heretofore prescribed. 

[he entire company may be also deployed, ac- 
cording to the same principles. 


TO" EXTEND INTERVALS.—(Plate 47.) _ 


This movement, which is employed to extend a 
line of skirmishers, will be executed according to 
the principles prescribed for deployments. | 

If it be supposed that the line of skirmishers is at 
a halt, and. that the captain wishes to extend it to 
the left, he: will command : ae 


1. By the left flank (so many paces), catend inter- 
vals. 2. Maron (or double quick—Marcn). 


At the command march, the group on the right 
will stand fast, all the other groups will face to the 
left, and each group will extend its interval to the 
es dae distance by the means indicated, page 
160,B. . | | 

(C.) Themen of the same group will continue to 
preserve. between each other the distance of five 
paces, unless the nature of the ground should render 
it necessary that they should close nearer, in-order to 
keep in sight of each other. The intervals refer to 
the spaces. between the groups, and not to the dis- 
tances between the men in each group. The inter- 
vals will be taken from the right or left man of the 
ee ym group. ae, 

‘the line of skirmishers be marching to the 
front, and the captain should wish to extend it to 
the right, he will command: es 
1. On*the left group (so many paces), extend inter- 

vals.” ‘¢ ace ise dub sect Besbox} : 

(A:) The-left- group;-ecnducted-by the guide, will 
continue to march on the ‘point of direction; the 
other groups throwing forward the left shoulder, 


| 


ANUAL. 


“ $OHOOT, Ne 


£98 





ti 





8 oid 


“eebuibuy 9070 “quent afot ou Ne 


> e >~ 

we « 

oo ~ —_ 
al an er 
bf Talon i . - » 
i = eee Ww - ; fea ee 
= : ; ’ t4 “ » : 
aaa 8B a) a oO of o 9 500-0 ~ 2 Gog aU oD fo Gvucada 

> = ~ . , - 


CTU S Oe eee oo 














THE SGHOOL MANUAL? 199 


and taking the double quick step, will, open,their 
intervals to the prescribed, distance by» the means 
indicated, page 156; A, chadokmang also, fo: what i is 
prescribed, page 163, ©. | 

Intervals may be “extended..on -the- dai cetiter | 
(or any” group) of the: line, soho tidings to the same 
principles. | 

If, iny extending eevee. it be. iriketigheh that one 
company or platoon should: oceupy a line which 
had; been previously occupied by two, the men: of 
the company or platoon. which is to retire will fall 
successively to the rear as they are nitelidved ee tine 
extension of the intervals. 2 


TO CLOSE INTERVALS. —(Plate 48.) 


This movement, like that of opening intervals, 
will be executed according” to the principles: pre- 
scribed for the de loyments. 

If the line of skirmishers be halted, and the cap- 
tain should wish to close intervals to the left, he 
will command : | 


3 By sh be t eink (so many ‘daa close initarval 
Ot (or double queck—M axon). 


At the salable march, the left group will stand 
fast, the other groups will ‘face to the left and close 
to. the prescribed. distance, each group facing to the 
enemy as it attains its proper distance. | 

If the line be marching to the front, the captain 
will command :. i | 


tr; On the left gro (60 many paces), close intervals. 
om Marcu Fc or double quick—Manxcn). 


The left group, conducted by the guide, will con- 
tinue to move on in. the.direction, previously,indi- 
cated ; the other groups, advancing the right shoul- 


FOO! : THE SCHOOL MANUAL 


der, will close to the left, until the intervales are re: 
duced to the:prescribed distance.” 
‘Intervals niay be‘closed on the. righty ebaten’ (or 
pe oup), according to the same principles. © : 
en intervals ‘are to’ be closed up, in ‘order to 
reinforce a line of skirmishers, so as to cause two 
companies to cover the ground which had been:pre- 
viously occupied by one, the new company will de- 
loy so as to: finish its movement at twenty paces: 
in rear of the line it is to occupy, and the men will 
successively move upon ‘that line, as they shall be 
unmasked by the men of ‘the old'company. The 
reserves of the two companies will:unite behind’ the 
center of the line. 


TO RELIEVE A COMPANY DEPLOYED ‘AS SKIRMISHERS. 


“When a company of skirmishers i is to be relieved, 
the captain will be advised of the intention, which 
he will, immediately communicate to his first and 
second lieutenants. 

The new company will execute its deployment. 
forward, so as to finish the movement at — 
twenty paces.in rear of the line, 

Arrived, at this distance, the men of the new com- 
pany, by command of their captain, will advance 
rapidly a few paces beyond the old line, and halt; 
the new line being established, the old company’ 
will assemble on its reserve, taking care not to get 
into groups of fours until they are beyond the fire 
of theenemy.' 

If the skirmishers to be relieved are marching in 
retreat, the company thrown out to relieve them 
will deploy by the Aik: as prescribed, page 158, 

A, and following. The old skirmishers wil) continue 
- retire with order, and having passed the new pre, 
they will form 2 epee the reserve. 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. | 901)— 


ARTICLE TL. 
| _. To. Advance. 
TO ADVANCE IN < une, AND TO RETREAT IN LINE. 


When a platoon or a company deployed as skir- 
mishers is marching bythe front, the guide will be 
habitually in the center. No -particular indication. 
to this effect need be given in the commands, but 
if nthe contrary it be intended that the directing. 
guide should. be on the right, or left, the command 
quide right, or, guide left, will be given, pa Ae!y, 
after that,of forward. 

The) captain, wishing the line of skirmishers to 
advance, will, command : 


1. Forward) ’2.°M anon (or double quick—Mancu) 


This, eopnm aad, will. be repeated with the greatest 
rapidity by the chiefs of sections, and. in case of 
need, by the sergeants. This rule is general, whether 
the skirmishers march by the front or by the flank. 

(A.) At the first command, the three sergeants will 
move briskly on the line, the first,on. the right, the 
second on ‘the left, and the third in the center. 

(B.) Atthe command march, the line will move to. , 
the front, the guide charged with the direction will 
move on the point indicated to him, the skirmishers 
will hold themselves aligned on this guide, and pre- 
serve their intervals toward him. © ~~ 

The chiefs of sections will march immediately be-~ 
hind their sections, so as to direct their movements. 

-Thegcaptain will ae a general sbpanntahdciico, | 
to the movement. 

When he shall wish. to halt the skirmishers, he 
will somprsaiag | 


HALT. 


20Me .. THB “SCHOOL ‘MANUALS 


(C.) At this command, briskly repeated, the line 
will halt. The chiefs! of Sections will promptly ree- 
tify any irregularity in the alignment and intervals, 
and after taking every possible advantage which the 
ground, may offer, for protecting the men,.they, with 
the three sergeauts in the line, will genre to their. 
proper places ' in rear. | 

The capiain wishing to. march the skirmishers in 
retreat, will domiiiand : | BS 


1.. Ln retreat. \ 2+ ‘Marcon (or double gidoke-Manon).: 


At the first command, the three sergeants will 
move on the line as prescribed, page 167, Ay >» 

At the command march, the skirmishers will fee 
about individually, and marclito thé réar, conform- 
ing to the principles prescribed, page 167, Bs" 
: The officers. and sergeants will use every exertion | 
to preserve order. 

To halt the’ skirmisher 8, ie about 3 in retreat, the. 
ie) will command :_ 


HALT. 


At this ebanswnt the skirmishers will halt, and 
immediately face to the front. | 

The chiefs of sections and! the three guides att 
each conform ‘himself. to Safar is ete acca 
168, C. 


“TO CHANGE ‘DIRECTION. 


If the commander ofa line of skirmishers. ‘shall: 
wish to cause it, to change direction to the right, he 
will command: i 
1. ae wheel. | 2. Misa (or! double puck — 

Marcn). 

At the command march, the sion didi will, 
mark time in his place; the left guide will move in’ 
a circle to the right, and that: he may properly regu- 

& 


THE BOHOOU MANUAL. 208 


late his movements, will potecicnally cast his eyes 
to the right,'so as to observe the direction of the 
line, and the nature of the ground to be passed over. 
The center guide will also march in a circle to the» 
right, and in order to conform his movements to the 

eneral direction, will take care that his steps are 
only half the length of the steps of the guide on the 
left. ie ) 

The skirmishers will regulate the length of their 
steps by their distance, from, the marching flank, 
being less as they approach the pivot, and greater 
as they are removed from it; they will often look 
to the marching flank; so as te preserve the direc- 
tion.and their intervals. |. , ¥) 

When the commander of the line shall wish to 
resume the direct march, he will command: 

1. Forward. 2, Marcu. 

At the command march, the line will cease to 
wheel, and the skirmishers will move direct to the 
front; the center guide will march on the point 
which will be indicated to him. : me pete 

If the captain should. wish to halt. the line, in 
place of moving it.to the front, he will command: 

i HALT. 

At this command, the line, will halt... 

A change. of direction to the left will be made 
according to the same principles, and by inverse 
means. reer 

_A line of skirmishers marching in retreat will. 
ehange direction by the same means, and by the 
same commands, as a line marching in advance; 
fer example, if the captain should wish to refuse his 
left, now become the right, he will command: 1. 
Left wheel. 2. Marcu. At the command halt, the 
skirmishers will face to the enemv. 


& 


2046 _ ‘THB, SCHOOL MANU ADsr 


»But if, instead of) ‘halting ithe linessthexcaptaim 
should. wish»to continue: todmarchsit)iniretneat, he: 
will,; whenshe» judges: the oline: has) whedled« suffi! 
ciently; stent it sia oele thw obiog _ 10: 0dT 

ef! ot.aige ny otag o nt baa Sderr 

o18 agate - “4H Ti retell: 16} “Man ortootb lerontog 

“iit £0 obing odt to sql Toa : ant to, fia! att tad ow 

‘The captain; wishing’ fie skitinisherd-to:thdreh By 

_ the right flank, wilb ein bea te ieib tied? Yd aqete 


1 By the il hfonk, 9 Manch (or dantaguiilee. 


sib, oft ev1se9%d Pe wen Gitidsisa: edt of 


At the first command, the’  thiies Setigeunits ays)" 
place thémsélves'on the ling? mars Fit weal 

As the ‘command march, thé skirmishers will ace" 
to the right and, .movey off;...t ht guide will 
place bins lf by the side. fd ae ghee on the 

rightto Border Him, and will mareh’ on “thie point 
indiedted } “ach skirmigherowill” take eare ‘torfollow® 
exactly inthe diréetion of the one immediately yipre 
ceding him, and to preserve his distances Tirw’ ele 

‘The "skitmishéts ‘may be’ arched by’ thé! fae, 
flank, ‘aééording fo the same” gigi and bythe! 


same commands, substituti ie t for right; the 
left guide will place himself s side of the lead- 
, ing man to conduét hifh.”: ott pascntios aidt 1A 


* the’skirmishers be pena thefiaik) and 
si iene ties to halt ‘them, *he’ will’ ‘hanne . 


mand : | BBO 
i ve ite mitt 3 lagagin erodaien ~eue to aait A 

vd bak .ceom omae 9dt vd nottesib egies 

iratmasedual the skétmiahera twillclaals ands: 


face| to the:enemyy; | The oficerssand!)sérgdamts:-wille’ 

conform: to what Line been prescribed; pages 168,:C..». 
The resetve should ¢éxecute allethé movements et \ 

the line, and be held:always about.oné! hundrédiandi. 


* 


serena from iit; soras to hein, position toi second 


Fed erswe lis Thee qwitte wilt 46 900 of} 


adltnbep ote they soil 


als.0r. pte thee senefeein pelbsuisisncetiier 
the skirmishers shall mareh on the enemyyjoinm we 
treat, that they shall r ites @ ne 8, the right or lefé 
flank, that the mien” wust o the right or left, 
whatever,»may: be their cibelhiones: od Hw stiketdT™ 
If the skirmishers te marching by thesflanky andes 
thereaptain, should wish«to ¢hange: direction Seite: 
right (or left), he «will command sd: By zile nig he! 
(on beft)vaci2e Rom Y sroted beolet hire rit pled 
-crog Lhw oft fas Silt Wonser Anet-is01 of T new 
oviewi” 10) not Sa RPTCHN* TPEe aioraat et sunlit 
o) ontés Jad Five: fare Brett ott wail Dire’ ed BOOET 
inert aid aod? os Theo iningse ath togiee ampere & 


tl bb \ere Will fife ey cfthier ai a, halt, or amarchip frat ney 
ae S 7 


er “Gt joldicaog Bx dower es tovaobne bas fecha 
, tecnarg Pe PRPS Ts (AT A BART. ‘|snanee odd 4V 18s 
“Torcausethis fire to be exeeuted, the captnin will 
eommand Rear aa ‘eAthedt oft Reed shteeericos: , hurener 
-o¢ Wedd bee 3 Chminenee- Frist gost alad Hieeolit 
= igi Zea- ide eit’ + Tae ~Fnaxs Div ous bliidw bel 
Acty thi s}.comnmand, briskly repeated; the: menJofo 
the front, rank, will, commence: firing othe y will reo 
; load rapidly, sand, hold» themselves: inj readinessrtds 
tireagain.),.During,this time the- men of the: mart 
rank: will,come,to.al read yand- as+soon astheirwets 
spective file leaders -havedeaded, they: willalsoofixlw 
and; reload; ;/Dhe mennof each file will .thus; comts 








206 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


tinue the firing, conforming to this principle, that 
the one or the other shall always have his piece 
loaded. eT Mae oi rou 

Light.troops should be always calm, so as’to aim 
with accuracy ; they should, moreover, endeavor to 
estimate correctly the distances between themselves 
and the enemy to be hit, and’thus be enabled to de- 
liver their fire with the greater certainty of success. 

Skirmishers will not remain in the same place 
while reloading, unless protected by accidents in 
the ground. mo doves 2.8 Lda 
a TO FIRE. MARCHING. 

This fire will be executed by the same commands 
asithe fireiat a halt, testi ot etonaintitte oF 

(A.) At the command, conunence firing, if the line 
be advancing, the front-rank man of every file will 
halt, fire, and reload before throwing himself foix 
ward. The rear-rank man of the same file will con- 
tinue to march, and after passing ten or twelve 
paces beyond his front-rank man, will halt, come to 
a ready, select his object, and fire when his front- 
rank man has loaded; the fire will thus continue to 
be executed by each file; the skirmishers will keep 
united, and endeavor, as much as possible, to pre- 
serve the general direction of the alignment. 

(B.) If the line be marching in retreat, at the :com- 
mand, commence fering, the front-rank man of every* 
file will halt, face to the enemy, fire, and then re- 
load while moving to the rear; the rear-rank man - 
of the same file will continue to march, and halt ten 
or twelve paces beyond his front-rank man, face 
about, come to a ready, and tire, when his front- 
rank man has passed him in retreat and loaded ; 
after which, he will move to the rear, reloading 
while so moving. The front-rank man in his turn, 
after marching briskly to the rear, will halt at ten 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 207 


or, twelve paces from the rear rank, face to the 
enemy, finish loading his piece and fire, po 
to what has just been. prescribed for the rear-rank 
man; the firing will thus be continued. 
_ (B.). If the company be marching by the right flank, 
at the command, commence firing, the front-rank 
man of every file will face.to the enemy, step one 
pace forward, halt, and fire; the rear-rank man will 
continue to move forward. As soon as the front- 
rank man has fired, he will place himself briskly be- 
hind his rear-rank man and reload while marching. 
When he has loaded, the rear-rank man will, in his 
turn, face to the enemy, step one pace forward, halt, 
and fire, and returning to the ranks, will place him- 
self behind his front-rank man; the latter, in his 
turn, will act in the same manner, observing the 
same principles. At the command, cease jiring, the 
- men of the rear rank will retake their original posi- 
tions, if not already there. 

If the company be marching by the left flank, the 
fire will be executed according to the same prin- 
ciples, but in this ease it will be the rear-rank man 
who will fire first. ti | 

‘The following rules will be observed in the cases 
to which they apply. 

. Ifthe line be firing at a halt, or while marching 
by. the flank, at'the command, forward—Marcn, it 
will be the men whose pieces are loaded, without 
regard to the particular rank to which they belong, 
whe will move to the front. Those men whose 
pieces have been discharged, will remain in their 
places to load them before moving forward, and the 
firing will be continued agreeably to the principles _ 
preseribed, page 172, A. ” 
If the line be firing either at a halt, advancing, 
or while marching by. the flank, at the command, 
«mn vetreat—Maxou, the men whose pieces are loaded 


208 THE SCHOOL “MANUAT: 


will remain faceditosthe enemy; andowill fixe ii this 
edith pet bee ae reese oe eee 
etalendii ach Ged sees will Sep oni 
agreeably to the principlés-preséribedy page 172¢By 
JE the line of skirmishers: be firin nies a 
advancing, or insretreatyatthe commande by thé 
might (ox (eft) flank+-Maron, the men whivse piéées 
_ are, loaded pwillestep! one pace “out of the’ weneral 
aligninent, facecto: thé. enémyy and fire: in! this peso 
tion ¥ | theatiene whose pieces aré unloaded will faxes 
to, thé,vight)(or deft). and !marehvin ‘the direction me 
d ips he: me BET ee aghg the Fanks 
will place.themselyes, immediately Ths upon 
the; ocobellibirantens sitet of heir fon or 
ygat-rankymenyds thercasermay be. © Thelifire will 
cphtinue-acdording to: thes=principlespreséribed, 
pabe diy. Bes ss basmmoo dt LA eslqioaing optge 
iS kitmishers willbe habitiated to load their piéees' 
while marching; but sa bevenjoined to-halt’ 
alsyaysian instant, whem inthe act of charging car- 
midge andpriuiting. gaibyeoos, botsesze,od iw, oat 
adhey:should béi ee perenne a 
ing, lying down, and, sitting, and@much | liberty 
should, be illowed-im these vexereisesy in order that 
they may be executed in the manner “found tobe’ 
Mosiigonvenient. «Skirmishersishonld’ beeagtioned - 
“not tox fdrgetthat;in whatever: patitinn eatoniay 
load,itpis, important: that the piece shouldbe placed’ 
upright! before! aiamming; cin torder that’ the’ entive’ 
Sane of powder! maiyreach! thé bottom of the’ 
base: ai signet lliw yhogiedeeth, aod avail 2990ig 
odnjcommencing therire, the men'of the samie*rank! 
~ should:mot allfire at’ once, andthe men of thé same 
file should be particular thaé dne! or: the other“of | 
omnes cient od ect onl ‘i. 
ohn netreating, ithe! officers: vee the skit? 
mishers should» seize.ow every ad e whielbthe 


vis’ Berton WeARUAE = (MY 


ilu 


as possible. a 
At the signal to cease firing, the captain will see 
that the order is promptly obeyed s but the men 
who may not be loaded, will load. If the line be 
matehing, it will: continue-the movements: but the 
man, ofeach ‘file who vhappens to be in:front, will 
waitinatil:the man in'the rear shall be abreast with 
diianoyed xit stodeinriada odd yliat ot botsbio ssiw 
If a line of skirmishers be firing advancing; atthe 
command, helt, the line willre-form upon the ‘skir- 
mishers who:aré in front;when the line is retreat- 
ing, upon the skirmishers who are in the reare0.8/e 
: zi Glewes ‘should: watch withthe greatest possible 
vigilanee over a line.of skirmishers; im battle; the 
should neither carry .a rifle or fowling piece. In all 
the:tirings, theyy as well asthe sergeants; should see 
that ,orderand«silence: are» preserved; and. that the 
kirmishers'do not wander imprudently; they should 
epee eaution ‘then to’ be calm and collected $ 
ot to fire until they distinethy perceive the objects 
which stheyaimj andiare ‘sure ‘that those objects 
are within piepe range.o Skirmishers should take | 
advantage: promptly;°and with imtelligence; of all 
shelter; and: of allyaecidents of the ground; to con- 
ceal)themselves:from the view ‘of the-enemy, and to 
protect!themselves from his fire. It may often hap- 
pen ‘that ditervals are monientarily' lost when seve- 
ralanenmear each other find a°common’shelters-but 
vehen they quit-this positions: they» should immedi- 
ately resume their intervals and:their: places in line,’ 
so that=theyemay’ not, by crowding, ‘needlessly ‘ex-' 
pose themselves'to the fire‘of the enemy. (9 o 
quorg dose ai mem wot sdf’ seqqie lemma * 
bus ,tefto Yam noieso00-4a 18 .ybaor 6 01 annioo [iw 
. eteetaiedi enivom igodiiw beol 
eauas tone lliw anoiieos to sioido bus aisigas ed 


ground may present, for arresting the enemy as long 


310 THE §0HOOL MANUAL: 


~ ARTICLE IV. 
| The Ratly. 
| tO FORME COLUMN. 


A company deploy as skirmishers, is rallied in 
order:te oppose the enemy with better suecéss ; the 
rallies are made at a run, and with bayonets fixed; 
when ordered to rally, the skirmishers fix bayonets 
without command. | i | 
- There are several ways of rallying, which the 
chief of the line will adopt aceording to eireum- 
stances. | Serra n Tas 
» If the line, marching, er at a halt, be merely dis- 
turbed by seattered horsemen, it will not be neces- 
sary to fall back on the reserve, but the captain will 
eause bayonets to be fixed. If the horsemen should, 
however, advance to charge the skirmishers, the 
captain will command, rally by fours. (Plate 49, A. 
The line will halt, if marching, and the four men o 
each group will execute this rally in the followi 
manner: the front-rank man of the even-number 
file will take the position of guard against cavalry ; 
the rear-rank man of the odd-numbered file will 
also take the position of guard against cavalry, 
turning. his back to him, his right foot thirteen 
inches trom the right foot of the former, and paral- 
lel to it; the front-rank-mam of the odd file, and the 
rear-rank man of the even file, will also: place them- 
selves back to back, taking a like position, and be- 
tween the two men already established, facing to the 
right and left; the right feet of the four men will 
_be brought together, forming a square, and serving 
for mutual support. The four men in each group 
will come to a ready, fire as occasion may offer, and 
load without moving their feet. 

The captain and chiefs of sections will each eause, 





: 

SEU ERSSSSURSTAR RESET See easenasenaes 

pie. 10.50 ai fe 
; nll oak 

on | 

aan : 


” eee RY 
the ical 


is 
snus 


: |. mee! , gionina macqensnsods Jolelalale 
1 “ye To rally by es oi as . 


none we” 
; 
2 é 
’ a” t 3 














Ree 


See ee 


213 vat ROddbn! SAE ABS 


the four men who constitute his guard to form 
square, the men separating so as to enable him and 
the bugler to place ase! in the center. The 
three s rgeants \ will each tly place himself 
in the group nearest hin in athe hieese skinhis 

If the captain desires again to deploy the groups, 
he will command}deploy as es s; at which 
each group will deploy aswprescribed, page 156, C. 

Whenever the captain shall judge these squares 
too weak, but should wish to hold ‘his posite by 
strengt ening his line, he will command: 


A et ee 


At. af, command, thé"thiefs of sections will move 
rapidly on the center group of their-respective sec- - 
tions, or on any other interior group whose position 

might offer a shelter, or other particular advantage ; 
the skirmishers will collect rapidly at a run on this 
group, and without distinction of numbers. | The 


men one edit? frm, gatarg a8 hart 
is made; wilkcirm quare, as hereto- 
fore “pln stovat th ; a 
uppermbsh order to indicate the point on which 
the ralky is to be made. *"Phe other skirr mishers, as 
they artive, will Joceupy and fill the \open\ angular 
spaces between, these ‘four men, and\ successively 
rally round this first nucleus, and in such manner 
as to form rapidly «a=gompae 
mishers will take, as they- arrive, the posi tion of 
change Yayeaen the pointer the bayoret more ele. 
vated, and will cock their ° Fd this ee 
The movement ‘coneluded, rOsPRAR ranks 
will fire~as~occasion”- may~ ee ithout 
moving their feet. 

The « captain will move seth with his guard, 
wherever he may judge his presence most necessary. 

The officers and RIRePPA will be particular to 
























veircle. ‘The iskir-. 


» 
THE SCHOOL MANUALS 213° 


Paediatrician ‘is\triade in*silenceyand with: 
noth pte ‘and’ ord rel yMlap donna piecevter éach of» 
their subdivisi ons wpege all tities’ loaded; and that. 
the’ fire CT anes ont thosé” points: only: wheré! it 
will bé“most effective (org Cai ylbiget aprot Uiw 
r the resérvé’ should’ be: threatened; it oy forth 
into"a cittle around its’ chief! * «)/0"™ sid 
“Lf the” captain desires “again to. dé poy ‘the: i 
he will ¢ommand, form: \scetions ; at this; the: chief 
- of Gach! will dress his section on ‘that file of the eir- 
SP dap faced “toward the “enemy| theomen 
Grane roper places. The sections will’ then: 
d-forw a or by the flanks, on‘any file or 

a Pine! cap ta n’may “wish, as’ ‘indicated’ age 155, 
Ya foMowing , and? page 158;°D; and ‘ollowing. 

a the captain, or commander of a line) of ’skir- 
mishers, sa ac ‘of many “platoons, ‘should judge 
that the rall ly by sectio do ‘not offer sufficient re- 
sistance, he will cause’ thie’ rally’ by platoons tobe 
executed, ak for this. Purpose,” will a OTe 





a tod “RALLY | BY ‘PLATOONS... bap chs, 

This idveont will be’executed: aobeveliing to the 
age mr nciples, and’ by: the ‘same’ means, as! the 
rally ws Wottine! THE whicté of platoon will con- 
form ib what has been prescribed ‘for the chiefs of 
secti ed i 8 Mt. ets Ups 6c riot. ait 
“Tf the eiptuih, or cotiinanider of the line of skir- 
mishers, desires” again” to’ deploy: the ‘platoons, a 
will command, , form platoons: LW 

‘The ‘captain wishing’ to. rally’ ‘the: akiomishers on 
Ue reserve, will -cominand =’ el 


IGE 


‘los RALLY ON THR, RuseRyE.—(Plate 49, Osae 


“At ‘this’ conimand, the éaptain will move bridkily 
2. the reserve; the’ ‘officer’ who: ‘commands it will 
es fdimediate _— to form sqiare ; ‘for this ‘pur 






pose, he will cause the half sections on the flanks 
to be thrown perpendicularly to the rear: he will 
order the men to come|toa ready. .. Ha VED 

‘The skirmishers of each section, taking the run, 
will form rapidly into groups, and pon. that man 
of each group who is nearest.the center of the sec: 
tion. These groups will :direct themselves diago- 
nally toward each other,.and insuch manner as. to 
form into sections with the greatest possible rapidity 
while moving to the rear; the officers and sergeants 
will see that this formation is made in proper order, 
and the chiefs will direct their sections upon the re- 
serve, taking care to unmask it to.the right. and left. 
As the skirmishers arrive, they will continue and 
complete the formation of the square begun by the 
reserve, closing in rapidly upon the latter, without 
regard to their places in line; they will come to-a 
ready without command, and fire upon. the enemy ; 
which will.also be done by|the reserve as soon as it 
is unmasked by. the skirmishers, . es 

If a section should be closely pressed by cavalry 
while retreating, its chief will command, Aalt; at 
this command, the men will form rapidly inte a 
compact circle around the officer, who will re-form 
his section and resume the march, the moment he 
can do.so with saféty....., 2.0 | : 

The formation of the square in a prompt and 
efficient manner requires coolness and activity on 
the part.of both officers and sergeants, = 

The captain will also profit y every moment of 
respite which the enemy’s cayalry may leave him ; 
as soon as he can, he will.endeayor to place him- 
self beyond the reach of their charges, either by 
gaining a position where ‘he may defend himself 
with advantage, or by returning to the corps to 
which he belongs. or this purpose, being in 
square, he will cause the company to break inte 


‘ 








THR GOHOOL, MANUAL. 915 
bea eoumand at part diene; to this effect, 


mand 
oh. Form cdma. 2. Mia wok’ 


(A.) At the command march, each platoon will 
dress on its center, ¢ and the platoon which was fa- 
cing to.the rear wii face about.without command. 

e guides.will place t selves on. the right-and 
left of their respective platoons, those of the second 
platoon will place themselves at half distance from 
those of the first, counting from the rear rank, 
These dispositions. Deig made, the captain can 
move the column in whatever direction he may 
Judge proper, 

t she wishes to march it in . retreat, he will. com: 
mand ; 
Ly: In wetreat. 2 Manon (or double ipa dei 


e con gels ‘the column ‘will im-’ 
bth face ne the rear rank (the file closers of ‘ 
ae first platoon retaining their position), and move’ 
off in the appe osite direction. As soon as the column, 
is in motion, the captain will command : ena 

| 8, Guide right (or left). piste: 

He will indicate the direction to the’ leading. 
guide: the guides will march at their proper dis- 
tances, and the men will keep aligned. | 


Tf again threatened by — the, captain wi will 
command : : 












ges Form: square. ‘2. Manon. 


At the ‘command march, the column will halt; 
the m2 P latoon 7H face about briskly, and the. 
outer: sections of each platoon will be thrown 
Se rere S to the rear, 80 as to fourm the second 

third fronts of the eBADE ‘The officers and | 


ai ri” Bdbo SBR! 


sbrgenn ts Will ‘promptly rectify’ ‘any “itr malar 
i may be committed. | a Saree 
If he should: wish to march the alumn in ve 


vance, the captain will command : sr te hE A} 
iTHICD 8 & | Fe rapine 


Bt eew Adis Form. column. Qe Marcu.» i 0.gaenb 


Which Will bé Uxeented ‘ay’ preséribed, page! 181) 
A’ The ‘column being’ ‘formed; ‘the: captain will 
command : . 


if someiaih “Has ale ie aoliaig 


1:3 Forward. 2. ay ete finn aie die a 
cas 9 38 ‘Guide left(or: bightjsin eaod. 


AL the asisooe ‘command, the column wil move 
forward, and at the third command, the men i 
take the touch’ of elbows to the side of the guide. § 

If the c ope should wish the column to gain’ 
ground. 'to the: right or. left; heswill<do so. by rapid: 
wheels.to the By BER osite the, ‘whener and for the 
purpose will. change, il e guide * enever it may 
necessary. 

f a. company be in ‘colutin’ ay platoon “at half 
distance, right in front, the capt titi ca “deploy t te 
first platoon’ as skirmishers by the means anol 
explained ; but. if it»should, be his wish to deploy 
th, second platoon f forward on the center file, leay- . 
ing 4 the first, platoon. i in reserve, he will ‘command <. 


1. Second platoon—as abinmthers, : 23 On. thasoen: ; 
‘ter file++take qntervals. . Maron: (atedewble 


quick—Maxcn). : baractim 


At the firstconamand, the chief.of the first Sabin 
will caution his platoon to stand fast; the chiefs of 
séctions of the’ second platoon’ will place ‘thémsel ves. 
before ‘the ‘center of” their sections °the fifth sé 
geant will place himself ¢ one” pace in tonto arte 
center of the second p lat of Ylisinoibaegieg 


oon. 
“At the ani Com nial the ‘ender bf the es sec: 








rat BOHOoL MANUAL. | OT 


titi, seénd plod, will, command? ‘"Seéetionrig tt 
face § the ch et es the left oy eed ‘Section tet, ite 
“AE the! 60: marc ese sectid ‘will move 
off briskly eSB YURI S Gronenaal and’ Having vA! 
masked the first,,.platoon, the chiefs, of sections wiil 
respectively command: By the deft Jtank—Maxon, 
and’ By the Fight fank—M sana ‘and’ p ioe as 
these "sections: ‘arrive on we aligtime ‘of thé first’ 
latoon, ‘they “will command + agit ipmishers~— 
ARCH, as “The groups will then ‘dey ploy’ aécording to. 
preséribed néiples, ¢ nthe ri it y fhe ‘of “the left’ 
seetion, which will be“ irécted fifth sergeant 
on the: ‘point indicated.” 
“If the’eaptain’ should’ Vida qe de layne nnide? 
i ‘flank, the second ‘platoon ‘will be moved to 
the! 


front: DY | the Méutis' above ‘stated; ‘aid halted” 


after passing somé ‘steps’ beyond ‘the alignment ‘of: 


ihe first platoon } thes eployment will then’ be made * 
by the flank aéeording’ to the bee preserived. : 


od fiw (oli yes Lhe, Assembly. ; Lopeuan 


A company deploy’ as” ais eaianely will By 
sembled when'there is ‘no longer danger of its bein 
disturbed : 7 thévassembly_ will be made e habitually i 
qi hiek food, SIOOS OMT ikQT-3 0 


Se 


; 


The ¢ eae wishing to appa the, skirmishes" 


on the't @ 


91it ovr 


will command : mn 
alt” of 59 \ASSEMBLE, ox: ares ‘RESERVE, gnemtes 9810 


Kea 
hd {? 
in, 


»v io" emit esl mo 


ot hilo dormmand, the: ‘skirmishéts’ ‘ill lp 


by erotps! of tears the frotrank  tieh wi 


‘place 


tliemsel ves behind their year -rank’ men?’ and each ” 
vroujy of fours will direct itself-on the restive, where’ 


each will take its proper place! in the’ratiks. “ Whert 
the company is re-formed, it will rejoin the batta:ion 
to which it belongs. 


It may be also proper to assemble the skirmishers 


a 


218 THE SCHOOL MANUAL, . 


on the éenter, or on, the right or left of the line, 
either marching or at.a halt. | 

If the captain should, wish to assemble them on 
the center while marching, he will command: 


ASSEMBLE ON THE CENTER. 


At this command, the center guide will continue 
to march directly to the front on the point indicated ; 
the front-rank man of the directing file will follow 
the guide, and be covered by his. rear-rank man ; 
the other two comrades of this group, and likewise 
those on their left, will march diagonally, advanc- 
ing the left shoulder and accelerating the gait, so as 
to re-form the groups while drawing nearer and 
nearer the directing file; the men of the right sec- 
tion will unite in the same manner into groups, and 
then pen the directing file, throwing forward the 
right shoulder. As they successively unite on the 
center, the men will bring their pieces to.the right, 
shoulder. ; 

To assemble on the right, left (or any file), will be 
executed according to the same principles. | 

The assembly of a line marching in retreat will 
also be executed according to the same principles, 
the front-rank men marching behind their rear-rank 
men, : | 
To assemble the line of skirmishers at a halt, and 
on the line they occupy, the captain will give the 
same commands; the skirmishers will face to ‘the 
right or left, according as they should march by the 
right or left flank, re-form the groups while march- 
ing, and thus arrive on the file which served as the 
point of formation, As they successively arrive, 
the skirmishers will support arms. 








a 
v4 4 bas : 

: Pa e ‘Saisie 
| punition n cheats 





a 


ark seh, Si ae a, 








f =a) 
CR no 
fi eT 

4,5 








NIViNQAQON 


"HUANKIT GNV YZUZLINOH 




















“pf SoH0or) ANTE. 221 


at) at esoiq. ot frouky ealiinr elt to stoitiaoquedT 
AWOL e Bf at WNesiee 
to ISS ¢ spit { ‘ 2D ES ¥% tise adit orsnee ft ope AAT ASE LES oat: 
ott te $HOT, OL it al ants Yen 3! ta en ae (BOS ast ort 
abuty, Owielnm soorrie oft | bas gprs 733: evs ents 18 


- “MANUAL 1 PUR TIGHT ‘ARTILLERY. sn 


abet Se HOSTEHEG Wee. Te ay AES vb ath ry 
baa ft Ded: obi. @ olvot Shiite odd aunts 

sock, oF or instruction inthe manual of lightartille ry; 
thespiece’ selected is the light, 12-pdr. howitzer, u 
for mountain service, on account of. its. simplicity, 
and. as embracing ‘alk the, pringiples,r bai for 
serving: la light field: piece... Dt, is generally, trans- 
ported by: males: The piece,and ithe shafts may be 
packed upon one mule, the carriage! (Mpen, anather, 
and the ammunition chest upon a : third. The crr- 
riage is adapted’ for: draughts) onions 

__dn,case the ieces are served bya fully organized 

ny) a jin per or short light pole, with’a cross 

Bee OF hi at tia did, i8'stibstituted for the shufts, 
A rope, attached'to the axle-tree’ anid runnin' ethrotie’ 
ite ae ae ae cross-piece,: enable the: ve tach wens ‘to 

dia ge “hteoming : Into battery; the rop @ 

AP HeOT nd ict in’ a ee foMtiser 9 a1i0 

2. The. mule that draws the piécé, or” carries) 1° 
when packed, “js Called the eed the mule 
that carries the carriage, when packed; the carriage — 
mule ; and the mule on which the ammunition chests 
are packed, the dimmiumition mule. 0" 

3. The piece is m battery when the shafts are de- 
tielicl aie it is inaproper position to: be'fired). The 
front inthis dase is the direction toward which the 
itiuzzle”p oints.” ‘The frotit, when ‘the ‘shafts are av. 

tached, eae direction toward which'the shafts point. 
1 é right-of the pieces ‘both. cases, is the right-of. 
she Cantioneer when facing to the front. “> ba ddgis 








222 ‘THE SCHOOL , MANUAL. 


The position of the mules when the piece is in 
battery, is as follows: . 

The ammunition mule fifteen yards in the rear of 
the piece, the shaft mule two yards in the rear of the 
ammunition mule, and the carriage mule two yards 
in the rear of the shaft mule, all facing toward the 

1ece. A ie 
. 4, Inthe order of march, with the howitzer mount- 
ed on its carriage, the shaft mule w hitched in, and 
the carriage and ammunition mules follow ; the first 
two yards from the piece, and the second two yards 
from the first. TOI GO sO)RV IOs MAI OHOLN 
5. Ln the order of march with the piece and car 
riage packed wpon the mules, the shaft mule leads, 
and the other two follow; the distance between each 
being two yards. («i 


FORMING THE DETACHMENT. 


3 2 


posted as follows: 
: “POSTS OF THE DETACHMENT. 


if. In aed 5 Nos. 1 and.2.about one yard out- 
side of the wheels, and in line with the axle-tree, 
No. 1. being.on the right, and No. 2 on the left; the 
nner at the end of the trail; No. 3 oppesite the 
ob of the cascable, wavering din 1; No.4.on the 
right, and-No. 5 on the left of the ammunition mule; 


TH SCHOOL MANUAL. 9293 


all facing to the front.. The chief of piece is opposite 
to the trail, outside of and near the left cannoneers.. 
8. In battery, without mules. Nos.4 and 5are on 
the right and left of the ammunition chests, facing 
tothe front. = = ro (ORL 1 Bate 
9. In the order of march, shaft mules hitehed tn. 
Nos. 1 and 2 opposite to the muzzlé; the gunner 
and No. 3 opposite to the trail; and Nos. 4 and 5 
opposite to the saddle of theammunition mule; the 
gunner and even numbers on the right, and the odd 
numbers on the left; ali facing’ to the front, and 
covering ‘each other’in lines one yard from the 
wheels. The chief of piece is on the left of the driver 
of the shaft mule. mud 
10. In the order of march, miles packed. Nos. 1 
atid 2 at the shaft mule; the gunner and No. 3 at the 
carriage mule ; and Nos. 4 and 5 at the ammunition 
mule; the gunner and even numbers. on the right, 
and odd numbers on the left; all opposite to the 
saddles, one yard from the mules, and facing to the » 
front. Thechief of piece is on the left of the driver 
of the shaft mule. ar aoe 
11. There is one driver to each mule. He is on 
the left of the mule, and holds the reins with the ) 
right hand, six inches from the mouth, the hand 
high and firm. | : 


SERVICE OF THE PIECE. 


12. The piece is in battery, the men at their posts. 
(No. 7.) 

The shafts are placed on the ground, one yard 
and a half from the line of the right wheel, and par- 
allel to it, the cross-bar opposite to the trail, the 
shafts pointing to the rear, | Ms 

The chests, when the ammunition mule is absenf, 
are on the ground, fifteen yards in rear of the trail, 


2D: THE SCHOOL, MANUAL 


their sides:parallel to, the axis of the: piece, backs,to-, 
gether, the turn-buekles outside. » fis). phy odd o3 
13. ,At,the:command  Taxn, Hquirmenys,ithe gun- 
ner distributes the equipments. »No., 1; withthe ase; 
sistance of No. 3, takes out the sponge. The gunner; 
equips ‘himself with, the belt, containing, the 
id. priming Wire,,and, with; iehace goon nda the 
finger-stall, wearing the last ouitanangeat finger ot 
the Jeft hand... : No. 3 wears the, tube: po ot 
‘ag, friction, tubes and the Janyard..., ried d . 
wear bricoles hung, from #he left; shoulder,to; the, 
a ght side. )Nos.. 2, and.5 acmubermapiemern 
fromthe, Higbtshoules tothe leftside, 517” sloodw 
 * olttat tiede eft Qo 
Fnaayr. ake ey (pas COBEN Ry RSH SAY CO OE 
9947 rikahig wy! detail; the! institietor (gives alle 
HO gommande” t6 © bus b 20V baw: : olan? sgRitise 
‘The* con wianids: Jaret Load by detaily Loan, -N Bon 
4 9118 oak 2OT'3s 4/8 Raw, 213 > Reapys rire sande 
Oaleeraatne | Te, aa ieran © ay ‘1 oft Brey Sito ,aoibl i 
.W Hien tt eediai dali rene piece is notexettted! 
detail, the commands of the near eeeret 
Loan; Commence Firré@! and’ ‘CnAsn? Freie ;- 
Continiexcr ‘Pind! and® Cexsk Frenvc! if neat? 
a jimand CosatiNc# Firing, the aétion is.continued™ 
without further commands From the instiructoruatil! 
the command Crase Firine. 
The last comniand’ uae setaBbs the chief of 
SENG ARIAT pions a af sonig od 
DUTIES OF HE 1B CANNONERES. ‘ my 4 ) 
big y orto “| bithoro ods nO Debs Tt atte a of 
1b. Duties of the Gunner.=mln, action; they g 
ner gives orrepeats the, commands.of, sent 
the command or signal to commence, fir 
dimond Lemmacgiance theta reese 
knob, of the pe 0 places, sonnet kne¢ upon. “ia — 







ie 


pomd near, and.on, the lett of the. Hee 7 place 

ausse, when; it halt need nee Fh Pall Re SHI 

right _ hand, to gs 4 it ke A 

time tends vent with i agen er me e left 
gts 


hand, the thumb, on.th 
>A8,so0n as the piece is. Toaded; De 
moves the hausse; then Pein pick ¢. eae 
| Bion thes sword) Reapx,, aie »stepp est « lear..of, f the 
wheel, to the,.side. whence, he can, best Pe erye the, 
effect of the Aes Blves » Bop e command, Fv, Hie. 
; cones Ss. action in.theosame,,manner,, without 
fur er commands sian the Yinml an the firing, ; 
is.ordered. to, cea a= SyBiv TOSTOME HITS 
“ab caiSoos anal ctor, foctead. ob giving, Abe, coms; i 
mand \Comatexon, Fartve,: gives), that..of .Loap, the. 
gs orb len and } ederinasthe, same, duties |i 
ust deseril at jhe, Nos uot, command 
Tee untibs Tod ake ARE BAY Ligetetd 
>W hen,the Haig oboe eae sh re commands, ‘the, 
ganner, performs the same, datios, but. Nay oui, re, 
peating the.dommandsejosisod Thats of 
A624 Duties of AV 04 1 Until the couunsid Loavy 
he stands square to the,trorite ding with the axle, 
tr os ahaa ye sale oe einsthe 
| nan hand; and trailing it) at, an,ang #i0les Bho jint.gdl 
or the convenience, Af; dnstruction, the. “ae ns 
rare, divided. Into motions. ;. prgioe.. 503.34 
Firsimotion<di the command Loan, No. i taces. 
to ae left, steps obliquely to his right with me r aah q 
| opteraud poaligs tery Ante. PSrDeAAi Gnas 
me e right jtoe, the,el te Are to th 
the; toound petioaece at! the gine of OW: odd ae ag 
plants eg ee: ery 
in, Jine.with:the; as th 1d inclines the sponge.across| 
as oe to the left, the right opposite to the mea 


body os 483 O€ a ori} 20418 ; we HR Ay at Hs 
\ Phir ne He place s. the. right foot, wae Qn 


e os 





236 THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


inches to the right of the left, heels on the same liné$ 
brings the sponge into a horizontal position, and ex- 
tending the hands toward the ends of the staff, back’ , 
of the right hand up, that of thé left down, rests 
the sponge-head against the face of the piece; the 
knees straight, the feet turned out equally, and the 
body inclined forward. ~~ 2 SASH RN Ghd 24TH 
Fourth motion.—He introduces thé sponge, drop 
the left hand by the side of his thigh, and ikoraeelie 
sponge to the bottom of the chamber. — a 
17. At the command Sponex, he carefully sponges 
out the chamber. ISTE ASS 
Second motion.—He draws out the sponge, press- 
ing it upon the bottom of the bore, seizes the staff 
near the sponge-head with the left hand, back down, 
and rests it against the face of the piece. 
Third motion—He' turns the sponge over by 
bringing the hands together at-the middle of. the 
staff, and giving it a cant with each, throws the 
sponge over; at the same time turning the wrists so 
as to bring the staff horizontal. He then extends’ 
the hands toward the ends of the staff, back of the 
-ert up, that of the right down. , 
Fourth motion.—As soon as the charge is inserted, 
he introduces the rammer-head into the muzzle, and 
joins the left hand to the right. 6) OFAT TO The. 
18. At the command Ram, he sends the ¢harg 
carefully home, throwing the left hand over the 
piece. pepe alge 
Second motion.—He throws out the: pp bee | 
the right hand, letting it slide through thehand ae 
far as the middle of the staff, when he graspsitfirm: | 
ly, and seizing it close to the rammer-head with the 
left hand, back up, rests it against the faceof the 
feet OF ee ene 
, Third motion.—He raises the sponge to the height 
of his breast, and steps back, right foot first, to his 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. _ 227. 


~ 


position opposite to the axle-tree ; quits the. staff 
with the left hand, and throwing the sponge upper- 
most, holds it at a trail in the right. He remains 
facing the piece until the command Loan, when he 
steps up and performs the duties just described. 

When the loading is not by detail, No. 1 goes 
through all his duties at the command Loan. “3 

At the flash of the gun, or command Loan, he 
steps up and again performs his duties as before, and 
so on, until the command Orasr Freie is given. 
At this command he resumes his post, faces to the 
tront, first sponging out the piece if it has been com- 
menced. | ee 

19. Duties of Nos. 2 and 5.— Until the command 
Loap, Nos. 2 and 5 stand square to the front, the 
former in line with the axle-tree, the latter on the 
left.of the ammunition mule, or chests. a 

At this command, No. 2 faces about and goes to 
the ammunition chest; and No.5, having received 
a round of ammunition from No. 4, carries it to the 
piece; placing himself opposite to No. 1, and in line 
with the wheel, inserts the charge as soon as No. 1 
has sponged, then steps back to the post of No. 2, 
opposite to the axle-tree, and there remains facing 
the piece until it is ‘fired, when’ he returns to the 
aminunition chest; No. 2, having received a round 
of ammunition, carries it to within five yards of the 
wheel, where he remains until the piece is fired; he-* 
then moves forward and executes the remainder of “ 
the service as just described for No. 5. 

Nos. 2 and 5, in moving to and from the piece, 
go. at aun and pass each other by the right. 

In inserting the charge they should be careful to 
keep. the seam down, and to place the fuse in the 
axis of the bore. | | 

At the command Cyass Freing, they resume their “~ 
posts, facing to the front. ~~’ | " 


298 THE SCHOOL MANUAL, 


20. Duties of No. 8.—No. 3 holds the handle of’ 
the lanyard in the right hand, the cord passing be- 
tween the fingers, the hook between the forefinger — 
and thumb. At the command Loan, he takes a fric-' 
tion tube in the left hand, and passes the hook of the 
lanyard through the eye of the tube from right to. 
left, continuing to hold the hook between the thumb 
and. forefinger. At the word. Ruapy, he faces the 


_ piece, and steps up, keeping outside of the wheel; 


inserts the tube, steps back with the right foot, breaks 
to his rear a full pace with the left foot, and holds” 
the lanyard slightly stretched, the handle at the 
height of the knee, back of the hand up, the left 
hand. against the thigh. At the command Firg, he 
gives a smazt. pull upon the lanyard, being careful 
to keep the hand low, and then resumes his post. 
_ At the command Crasz Firing he winds the lan- 
yard upon its handle, and if dry, puts it in the tube 
pomeh,.s a... | 
21. Duties of Wo. 4.—No. 4 attends at the am- 
munition chest, serves out ammunition, and prepares. 


and inserts fuses. 


CHANGING POSTS. 


29. In order to instruct the men in all the duties 
at the. piece, the instructor causes tlfem to change’ 
posts by the following commands: 4 


1. Change Posts. 2. Marca. 


At the first command, the cannoneers on theright 
of the. piece face about; take off their equipments, . 
and place them on the piece or ammunition chests. © 
At the second command, all step off, each taking the © 
post and equipments of the one in his front; No. 2 
passing around the muzzle to gain the post of No. 1, . 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 999° 


and No. 4 around the ammunition chest to take that 
of. No. 5. | 

23. During the intervals) of rest, the instructor 
will explain to the men the nomenclatures of the 
piece and carriage, and the names and uses of the 
implements and equipments. : 


SERVICE OF THE PIECE WITH) DETACHMENTS OF DIF 
FERENT STRENGTH. 


24. Twomen. The gunner commands, tends vent, 
points, pricks, primes, and fires. No. 1 sponges, 
serves ammunition, and loads. . | ! 

Three men. The gunner commands, tends vent, 
points, pricks, primes, and fires. No. 1 sponges. 
No; 2 serves ammunition, and loads. | 

Four men. The gunner commands, tends vent, 
points, and pricks, No, 1 sponges. No. 2 serves 
ammunition, and loads. No. 3 primes and fires. 

Five men. No. 4 attends at the chests, and serves 
ammunition to No,.2, oceasionally alternating with 
him. . The.other numbers serve as with four men. 

Sie men. No. 5 alternates habitually with No. 2.- 
No. 4 remains.at. the chests. The other. uwmbers 
serve as with four men. __ ‘ oi ais | 


280 


‘SIGNAL DRILL: WIPHOUT THE MUSKET. 


Signal 


THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


i , oo 





. Rise up and face. 

. Form groups of four. 

. Double quick—march. 
- Form company at open ranks. 
. Dress by the right.” ie 
. Front. ~ 

. Close onsh2labh, 


Right ‘dress. 
Prontcrsth: 
In Bt a 


. Attention. 
Right—backward drei: | 
. Front. , 
. By platoons, right $a covaron: 

. By platoons, Jeft into line—march. 

. By company, right whéel—march.. A 
. Left into line—march.” ! 
. By the right ‘of platoons’ to the ear 


into column.” 


. March. 

. Left into line-—-march. 
. Right—face. 

. Mareh. 

; By file. 

. Halt. 

. Front—face. 

. Dress. 


. Front. 
. To the rear open order. 


. March. 


. Dress. 


(0). 
(P) 


THE SOHOOL (MANUAL. 231 


Signal 31. Front. . b 62 laasie 
32. Arms—up. (O) 
“« 33. Arms—down. >! ‘ . 
“34: Arms—forward. 
“« 35. Arms—down. 
“362: Arms—to the rear. 
“ = 87. Arms—front. 
« ~~ 88. Arms—to the side.’ 
“c 639. Arms—down. «< 
“ §6=©40. Salute. 
“ = 41. Close order—march. 


“42, In place—rest. on,..08 » (HD) 
«48. Attention. 
“44, Right—face. ai ~ (O) 


6 | 45. March—dismiss. 





SIGNAL DRILL WITH: THB. MUSKET. 





Signals 1 to 11 the same as manial without the 
musket. 
Signal 12. Prepare to take arms, gud 
13. Take— £¢ (K) 


“6 14. Arms. nif (L) 
“« ~§6-15. Shoulder“arms: | 
“16. To the rear open order. ' (M 
“ = =17. March. . a. Ny 
“18. Dress. | -2et8+ | } 


“.  19.. Fronty1ant, 

e 20. Order—arms: 

“ 21. Shoulder—arms, 
« §622. Trail—arms298) 

“23. Shoulder—arms., . 

«24. Chargl baronet. 


232 


Signal 25. 
(‘ 26. 


66 


Shoulder—arms. 0° 
Unfix—bayonets..«» 
. Shoulder—arms..—° © 
. Right shoulder shia 
. Shoulder-—arms.— -» 
. Left shoulder shift—arme, 
. Shoulder—arms. 

. Support— arms. 

. In place—rest. 

. Attention. 

. Shoulder—arms. 

. Present—arms..’ 

. Shoulder—arms. | 
. Fix—bayonets. 

. Shoulder—arms..:' 
. Load. 

. Handle—cartridge. 
. Tear—cartridge. 
nical ad 
. Draw—rammer. 

. Ram—cartridge. 

. Return—rammer. 
. Cast—abont. 

. Prime. 

. Shoulder—arms, 

. Ready. 

. Aim. 


Recover—arms. 


. Aim. 

. Fire. 

. Shoulder—arms. 
. Close order—march, 
. Order—arms. 
. Stack—arms. 
. Right—face. 
3 Ser 


£0) 


_ THE’ SCHOOL MANUAL. 233 


ARM MANUAL. 


. (In order to accustom the pupil more readily to 
' the position of the soldier, and at the same, time to 
render him more supple for acquiring a proficiency 
in the manual of arms, the following exercises 
should be practiced. Formed in one rank, at one 
pace apart, the instructor will give the command: 


ARMS—UP. 
eet One time and two motions. 

First Motion.—Bring the forearms to a vertical 
position, the fingers closed, and hands against the 
right and left breasts. ; 

Second Motion.—Extend the arms vertically over 
the head, open the fingers, and place the palms 
together. Ce 


ARMS—DOWN. 
“One time and two motions. 
_ First Motion.—Bring the arms ‘to the first posi- 
tion of arms up. (2 ane 
Second Motion.—Drop. the hands with force to 
the sides. Pes | | 
i = - ARMS—FRONT. 
One'time and two motions. - 
first Motion.—As in arms—up. 
. Second Motion.—Extend the arms horizontally in 
front of the body, the palms of the hands touching. 


_, ARMS——DOWN. 


, _.< One time and two motions. 
As’before.... 


934 are THE SCHOOL MANUAL. 


_ ARMS—TO THE REAR. 
One time and motion. 
Carry the hands sores 4 the body, the palms } 
dotnet 3 


‘ARMS—FRONT. 
One time and motion. 
Carry the hands quickly to the side. 


ARMS-—-TO THE SIDES. 


One time and motion. BG) * 


_ Extend the arms horizontally. to, the right and 
left. 


As before. : 
_.. SALUTE. 
One time and four motions. 

First. Motion.—Extend the:arm.. horizontally to 
the right, palm down. 

Second Motion.—-Carry the hand to: the visor of 
the cap. 

Third Motion.—Carry thie arm back to the hor 
zontal position. 


i aie Motion,—Drop the hand quickly to the 
side 


et et we memes 


NOTES ON DRILL. 


(A.)—The instructor canadopt any method of 
facing the class. or groups best suited to the con- 
dition of the school-room and benches. They may 
be faced by the left, and marched into line by the 


THE SCHOOL MAN NUAL. 235 


left, forming the company on the right or eft 
guide, who will be previously established as a 
base. For exhibition, the formation made by suc- | 
cessive groups of four, entitled comrades, would be 
the best adapted and most pleasing. | 

(B.)\—At the second signal, the company will 
march and form groups of four in double file, with- 
out regard to size. i eect et 

(C.\—At the third signal, the march will im- 
mediately be made, on'a trot, the elbows bent, with 
forearm to side, to the spot designated. 
«(D.)—At this signal each group will march into 
line, the front rank forming ‘on the guide, and the 
rear rank forming eight steps to the rear in another 
* (E)—+At this signal the head is thrown obliquely 
to the guide or base, and¢the line is established, 
keeping the head in this position. - 

(F'.)—At the sixth signal bring the head and eyes 
quick to the front. 

_ (G.)—March forward to within thirteen inches 
of the front rank, and correct the alignment. | 

(H.)—Cross the hands in front, across the thighs, 
and bend slightly the left knee, the right leg 
straight. i 

(I.}—Resume the position of a soldier. At this 
part of the drill, if the musket is not used, the sig- 
nals can be proceeded with by using the company 
drill with the arm exercise. 

(K.)—Dividing this command gives the recruit - 
an opportunity of seizing the stock before the final 
execution of the movement. 

.)—This perfects the movement. 

M.)—“ To the rear open order,” gives time for 
the sergeant or a front rank man to step to the rear 
to said the rear rank, which is done at— 

(N.)—When the next signal is struck or sounded. 


236 THE, SCHOOL MANUAL. 


,§O.)—In. facing to the right, the, doubie file 
movement may be executed, by numbering: the 
front and rear. man of each file, commencing with 
1, 2—1, 2—1, 2, and soon... In facing hy, the, right, 
No. 2—being the second, fourth, sixth, etce., tile— 
after facing, will step to the right. of No. 1. In 
facing to the left, 7. 1 will, after facing, stand 
fast, while No. 2 will step to his left. In, facing, to 
the front, the files will resume:their proper position. 
If the double file be found too difficult. or intricate, 
the two ranks can.be taught with the same signals, 
__ (P.)—The direction for filing will be signaled by 
the instructor, as may suit the position the company 
“maybe pecs ints ¥ wt stain 
(R.)—The instructor will always be guided in. his 
pane between the signals, bythe ability of; his 
class. .,. may i Fests met ig 


DEPOT OF EQUIPMENT, 


ee Ge - 


TIFFANY & CO., 


Nos. 550 & 552 Broadway, New York, 
No. 79 RUE RICHELIEU, PARIS, 


IMPORTERS ‘AND MANU ACTURERS, 
Would call the attention of the Military Public to their stock of 


| Oo o'4,'> : a : yor ~*~ ; 

° e 
AMilitary and Naval Gears, 
Comprehending the whole detail of a Campaigner’s furniture, 
guaranteed to bein all respects of the most.substantial character 
and_the last authorized style.« The Officers of the National 
Guard will here find an especial attention given to the necessi- 


ties.of their organization, this large assortment of Military Fur 
niture including not only, 


FIELD AND STAPE SWORDS, 
Le 4 REVOLVERS OF FOREIGN AND DOMESTIC MAKE, 


Shoulder Straps and other Embroideries, Knapsacks and 
Havresacs, Canteens, Epaulettes, Chapeaux and 
Caps, Field Glasses, Arms of - Precision of 

poems _ every description, “Camp. Chests: 
-  » —— © and Equipage, | : 
But a well i aaptad collection of Regimental Stands of Colors, 
Cavalry and-Artillery Guidons, National and State Ensigns, é&c., 
carefully made from the best Lyon’s Banner Silk, of régulation 
size and design, or of any original device that may be ordered. 
‘Tiprayy & Co. give particular attention to orders from the in- 
terior, returning descriptive lists or‘elaborate designs in answer 
to requests, with due promptness. ‘Their. manufacturing and 
artistic resources enable them to produce speedily 


PRESENTATION SWORDS, 
: For Officers of both Services, 


Of every degree of richness, As specimens of their production in this line, 
they are happy to refer to the large number of Memorial Swords ordered from 
them by States, Associations and individuals, including the beautiful testimonial 
of the Empire State to Capt. Worden, of the Monitor—the Sword given to Gen, 

Halleck, by the Ladies of St. Louis’: the Superb» presentation from the men of, 

the West.to Gen. Eremont ;. the se: veral Swords awarded by New York City to 
Gens. Corcoran, Coggswell’ and others # the ¢haste tribute of Rhode Isl ud to 

Gen, Buruside, and the equally choice gifts to many other heroes of the war, 

In the latest Military Equipments, the adaptations and improvemeigts sug: 
gested by active service, and the results of snch tuition as the great camps ot” 
Chalons and Aldershott, T. & Co. are confideiit in assuring the public that their 
foreign connection, secured by a permanent I ris establishment, enables them 
wo assert, for'themselyes a superlative position. 








PLAN OF ENCAMPMENT 


FOR & REGIMENT OF INFANTRY. 























~ WOM ADVANCED GUARD. 
MULL PRISONERS. 
i, ia Kx B 
Wexe Siuxe, 
|s 
. + io 5 ~ 
Coron Lane. oe a a ACKS oF Apis. Ser 
718 Oa Do wo Do- oa OOoOaea ff 
Ha eee 
- @ 
oo oa og 68 O86 fo oo Ge oo 
: KAT GHERS. : : 
a wm a ia | wg @ i a 
ST: 
- Non-Com? Stare: Potice Guarv. Surzes. Non-Com?Srare 1_™ 
a Xxiao ° oo ~ o- . 
Q 
Y Officers. Ow 
a0 O88 AD mo no oo as Hoh an aac 
o 
Ast SuaG Man OFM® £'Co ur ds Suns” N 
i a i ae Aa ‘fo’ oe 
. ite) 
| BAGGAGE Taav, wo 
a a ee) ee ee Race 


Orficers Sinks, 
way (pa (ay 

















400 Packs 








“THE CAMP, 


Came is the. saab wate the sei are dstablishedd in 
tents, in huts,,or in bivouac. Cantonments are the in- 
habited places. which troops occupy for shelter when 
‘not put in barracks. The camping sore is a detach- 
ment detailed to prepare a camp: | 
_ Reconnoissances should precede thie! cateb lishhaoit of 
the camp... For-# camp of troops.on the march, it is 
only necessary to look to the health and comfort of the 
troops, the facility of the communications—the conve- 
nience of wood and water, and the resources: in provi- 
sions and forage. The ground for an intrenched camp, 
or a camp to.cover a country, or one designed to. de- 
ceive the enemy as to the strength of the army, must 
be selected, ane: the coma a for the: ee in 
view. » |. 

The ‘Adiobn asin of a Paina consists 08 the re 
eimental quartermaster and, quartermaster-sergeant, 
and a corporal and two men \per company. The gen- 
eral decides whether the regiments camp separately or 
together, and whether the. police guard shall accom- 
pany the camping — or. a “ot escort shall we 
Sent... (tnt asoegq boibsasd 
The ground selected foe an-encanpric pees on 
the march or for a more permanent camp, should be 


2940 _ APPENDIX—THE CAMP. 

such as will enable, as near as possible, the following 
order to be carried out. Of course circumstances will 
compel a variation from it at times: 


CAMP OF INFANTRY. 


Each company has its tents in two files, facing on a 
street perpendicular'to the color line. The width of | 
the street depends on the front of the camp, but should 
uot be less than five paces.* The interval between the 
ranks’ of tents is two paces ; between the files of. tents 
_of adjacent companies, two _—s ; specialties rig wniete 
twenty-two paces. | 

The color line is ten paces in front of the front Féonk 
of tents. The kitchens are twenty paces behind the » 
rear rank of company tents; the  on-commissiotied 
staff and sutler, twenty paces in rear of the ‘kitchens ; 
the company officers, twenty paces farther in rear, and 
the field and staff, twenty: so as in rear pf the st al 
officers. . TOE 

The company officers are ih rear of their re 
companies; the captains on the right. 

The colonel and lieutenant-golonel are near the ‘cen- 
tre of the line of field and staff; the adjutant, a major 
and:surgeon, on the right ; the quartermaster, a 9 
aud assistant-surgeon, on ‘the left. 

The police guard is atithe centre of the line’ of the 
non-commissioned staff, the tents facing to the’ aa 
the stacks of arms on the left. 

»(The:advanced post of the police guard is about two 
hundred paces in front of the color line, and opposite 





*The pace is thirty inches, or two anda half feet. 


APPENDIX——THE. CAMP. 941 


the centre of the regiment, or on the best: ground; the 
prisoners’ tent about four paces in rear. Ina regi- 
ment of the second line, the advanced post of the police 
guard j is two hundred paces.in rear of the line of its 
field and. staff. 
~The horses. of the staff officers and of the baggage 
train, are twenty-five paces in rear of the tents of the 
field.and staff; the wagons are,parked on the same 
line, and the men of the train camped near them. 

The sinks of the men. are one hundred and fifty paces 


in front of the color line; those of the officers one hun- | 


dred paces in rear of the train. ..Both are concealed by 
bushes, . When convenient, the sinks, of the men may 
be placed i in rear or onaflank. A portion of the earth — 
dug out for sinks to be thrown back occasionally. 

The front of the camp. ofa regiment of one thousand 
men in two ranks will be four hundred paces, or one 
fifth less paces than the number of files, if the:camp is 
to have the same front as the troops in order of battle. 


But the front may be reduced to one hundred .and | 


ninety paces by narrowing the company streets to five 
paces ; and if it be desirable to reduce, the front still 
more, the tents of companies may be pitched in single 
file, those of a division facing on the same street. 


CAMP OF eta eae 


. the cavalry, each coriander hn one file of tema ; 
the tents opening on the. after tpeing the left of the | 
camp. ) 

The horses of. each company.a are ‘placedhts in a hate 
file, facing the opening of the. tents, and. are fastened 


242 APPENDIX—THE CAME: 


to pickets planted firmly in the ground, from ‘three’ to 
six paces from the tents of the troops. | ) 

The interval between the file of tents should be such, © 
that the regiment being broken into column of compan- 
ies, each company should be on the column extension 
of the lineson which the horses aré to be picketed. 

‘The streets separating the squadrons are wider than 
those between *he companies by the interval separat- 
ing squadrons in line; these iitervals are kept free 
from any obstruction throughout the camp. , 

_ The horses of the rear rank are placed on ape lett of 
those of their file-leaders. | 

. Thechorses of the lieutenants are ‘placed on the right 
“of their platoons; those of sisies Api ge on 1 the wens of 
the company. BO fi 

Each. horse occupies a space of about two paces. 
The number of horses’ in the company fixes the depth 
of the camp; and the distance between the files of the 
tents; the forage is placed between the'tents. © 

The kitchens ‘are fren? paces in front of each. file 
of tents. LB GM =~ 

| The roti. cohinsisbotiod! officers are in the tents of the 
frontirank..Camip-followers, téamsters, etc., are in the 
rear rank. © The police guard in the rear rank, near the 
centre of the regiment. 

The tents of the lieutenants are thirty paces in rear 
of the file of their company ; the tents of the captains 
thirty paces in rear of the lieutenants. 

The colonel’s tent’ thirty paces in rear of the cap 
3 ‘tain’ s, near the centre of the regiment ; the lieutenant 

colonel on his right; the adjutant: on his left; the ma- 
jors on the same line, opposite the second company on 


APPENDIX—THE CAMP. O42 


“the right and ler the surgeon on the left of the ad- 
jutant.* 

The field and staff have their horses on the left of 
their tents, on the same line with the company horses ; 
sick horses are placed in one line on the right or left 
of the camp. The men who attend them have a sepa- 
rate file of tents ; the forges and wagons in rear of this 
file. The horses of the train and of camp- -followers are 
in one or more files extending to the rear, behind the 
right or left squadron. The advanced post of the po- 

lice guard is two hundred paces in front, opposite the 
centre of the regiment; the horses in one or two files. 

The sinks for the men are one hundred and fifty 
paces in front, those for officers one hundred paces in 
rear of the camp. . 


/ CAMP OF ARTILLERY. | 


The artillery is encamped near the troops to which 
it is attached, so as to be protected from attack, and 
to contribute to the defence of the camp. Sentinels 
for the park are furnished by the artillery, and, when 
necessary, by the other troops. 

For a battery of six pieces the tents are in three 
files: one for each section ; distance between the ranks 
of tents fifteen paces ; tents opening to the front. The 
horses. of each section are picketed in one file, ten paces 
to the left of the file of tents. In the horse artillery, 
or if the number of horses make it necessary, the 


+ ee ew 





* When there is but one major to a regime nt, the post of the colo- 
nel will be in the centre of the regiment, on the line of the field and 
staff; and that of the lientenant-colonel in the right wing, in place 
of the senior major. 


244 APPENDIX—THB. CAMP. 


horses. are in two files on the'right and left of the file 
of tents. The kitchens are twenty-five paces in front 
of the front rank of tents. The tents of the officers are 
in the outside files of company tents, twenty-five paces 
in the rear of the rear rank ; the captain on the right, 
the lieutenant on the left. 

The park is opposite the centre of the camp, isk 
paces in rear of the officers’ tents. 


DUTIES IN CAMP AND GARRISON. 


The duties in ening’ and garrison are to be conducted 
as far as practicable, in the same manner and on the 
same principles. 7 % 

The Reveille is the signal for the men to rise, and the 
sentinel to leave off challenging. 

The Troop is to sound or beat at — o ‘clock in the 
morning, for the purpose of assembling the men for 
duty and inspection at guard mounting, 

The Retreat is to sound or beat at sunset, for the 
purpose of warning the officers and men for, duty, and 
for reading the orders of the day. 

The Tattoo is to be beat at — o’clock in the evening, 
after which no soldier is to be out of his tent or quar. 
ters, unless by special leave. — 

_ Peas-u pon-a- -trencher, the signal for a breakfast, is,to. 
sound or beat at —.o’clock in the morning. 

Roast Beef, the signal for dinner, is to.sound or beat 
at — o'clock ; at other times it is the signal. to draw 

provisions. 
The Surgeon’s call is to sound or beat at — o'clock, 
when the sick, able to go out, will be:conducted to the 
hospital by the first’sergeants of companies, who will 


= 


APPENDIX—-THE CAMP. 945 


hand to the surgeon a report of all the sick in the com- 


pany other than in hospital. The patients who cannot 


attend at the dispensary will be immediately after, if 


not before, visited by the surgeon. 
The General is to beat, only when the whole army is 
to march, and is the signal to strike the tents and_ pre 


“pare for the march. 


The Assembly i is the signal to form by company. 

To the color is the signal to form by battalion. 

The March is for the whole to move. 

The Long Roll is the signal for getting under arms» 


in case of alarm or the sudden approach of the enemy. 


The Parley is to desire a conference with the enemy. 

There should be daily, at least three stated roll calls ; 
viz.: at reveille, retreat, and tattoo, ‘They will be. made 
on the company parades by the first sergeants, super- 
intended by acommissioned officer of the company. . The 
captains should report the absentees, without leave, to 
the colonel or commanding officer. | 

Immediately after revedle roll call, (after stable duty 


in the cavalry,) the tents or quarters, and the space 
- around them, will be put in order by the men of the 


companies, superintended by the chiefs of squads, and 
the guard houseor guard tent by the guard or-prisoners, 

The morning reports of companies, signed by the 
captains and first sergeants, will be handed to the ad- 
jutant before eight o’clock in the morning, and will be 
consolidated by the adjutant within the next hour, for 
the information of the Colonel; and if the consolida- 
tion is to be sent to higher authority, it will be signed 


by the colonel and the adjutant.. - 


GUARDS. AND GUARD-MOUNTING. | 


On a march continued from day to day, the cere: 
‘mony of guard-mounting is dispensed. with ; the men 
being notified the night before for the next ay s guards 
and the guards are formed, immediately after the army 
is in camp. On all other occasions the following forms 
are observed : 

At the first call for ouagladsoadiae the men warned 
for duty turn out on their company parades for inspec- 
tion by the first sergeants; and, at the second call, re- » 
pair to the regimental or garrison parade, conducted 
by the first sergeants. Hach detachment, as it arrives. 
will, under the direction of the adjutant, take post on 
the left of the one that preceded it, in open order, arms 
‘shouldered and bayonets, fixed ; the supernumeraries 
five paces in the rear of the men of their respective 
companies ; the first sergeants in rear of them, The 
sergeant-major will dress the ranks, count the files, 
verify the details, and when the guard is formed, re- 
port to the adjutant, and take two paces on the left of 
the front rank. 

The adjutant then commands Front ; when the offi 
cer of the guard takes post twelve paces in front of 
the centre; the sergeants, ‘in one rank, four paces. in 
the rear of the officers ; and the corporals, i in one rank, 
four paces in the rear of the sergeants, all facing to 
the front. The adjutant then assigns their places in 
the guard. » | 

The adjutant will then command, 


APPENDIX—GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 247 


1. Officers and non-commissioned. 2. About--Face. 
officers. |. 8. Inspect your guards—Marcu. | 


The non-commissioned officers then take their posts. : 
The commander of the guard then commands : aL 


1. "Order —Anms, ee 2. “Inspection of ARMS; 


and thspects his guard. When there is no commis-) 
sioned officer on the guard, the adjutant will “gee 
it. During inspection the band will play. 4 

The inspection ended, the officer of the ouard tikes | 
post as though the guard were ia company of. a bat- 
talion, in open order, under review ; at the same time, 
also, the officers of the day will take post in front: of 
the centre of the guard; the old officer of the day three’ 
paces on the right of the new htaesiesd of sity day, one © 
pace retired. iv | : O48 

The adjutant will then 1 fone 


7 Parade—Resy. 2. Troop —Beat of; ; 


when the music, beginning on the. right, will beat down | 
the line in front of the officer of the guard to the left, ! 
and. back to its place on the right, where it. will cease 
to play. fare 7? 
The adjutant then commends 
seg Attentions i, Siege) 12 Sotho hiy iden 
3. Close order~—MArcn. » 


At the word “ Close order,” the officer will face about ; 
at.‘ March,” resume his post in line. The A deatent 
then commands : Sought dangle 


By, datgpbe Present Ass ; & | | 
at which he'will ‘face to: the: new officer of ihe tabsd Sar 


948 APPENDIX—-GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING.!* 


__ lute, ‘and-repart, Sir, the guard is formed.” The new. 


officer of the day, after acknowledging the salute, ‘will 
direct the adjutant to march the guard in review, or, by 


flank, to its. post. But if the adjutant be senior. to, thery 


officer of the day, he will report without saluting 
with the sword then, or when BERLE the aad in 
review: | 


‘In review, the fuiba mitrot whi thie: ofiieelt of the’ 
day, according to the order of review, conducted by © 


the adjutant, marching on the left of the first division ; 
the sergeant-major on the left of the last division. 


When the column has passed the officer of the day, 
the officer of the guard marches it to its post, the ad-.. 
jutant and sergeant-major retiring. » The music; which | 
has wheeled out of the column, and taken post oppos 


site to the officer of the day, will cease, and» the old: 


officer of the day salute, and give the old or standing | 


orders to the. new Officer of the day. The sSupernumera- 
ries, at the same time, will be marched by the first ser- 


eeants to their respective vives hic parades, anid ‘itt 


missed. ~ 


In Bad weather, ‘or at night, or’ after datiptihdgs 


ye 


marches, the ceremony of turning off may bys dispétiséd ‘ 


with, but not the inspection. 
Grand guards and other brigade guards\are) organ- 
ized and mounted on, the brigade parade by the staff 


officers of the parade, under the direction of the field - 


officer, of the day of the brigade, according to the prin- 


ciples here prescribed for the police guard of a regi- 


ment. The detail of each regiment is assembled on 
the regimental parade, verified’ by the adjutant, and 


marched to the brigade parade: by the senior officer..oi,. 


APPENDIX—-GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 249° 


the detail. After’inspection and review; the officer of; — 


the day directs wie ee ignomie: to i a 
posts,’ ' 

- The officer of the old guard, rata his guard pa- ~ 
raded, on’ niin approach of the new guard, commands : 


e Present —Aums. . 

* .. The new guard will march, in quick) time, past .the 
old guard, at shouldered arms, officers saluting, and 
take post four paces on its right, where, boing alligned 


with it; its commander will order: 
Present—ARnMs. 


The two officers will then approach each other and 
salute. They will then return to their respective 
guards and command : i ) 


ry ‘Shoudder Anas. , 5 2, os Mabe me ! 


The officer of the new guard will now direct the de- 
tail for the advanced guard tobe formed, and marched 
to its post, the list‘of the ‘euard made and divided into” 
three reliefs, experienced soldiers placed over the arms 
of the guard and at the remote and responsible posts, . 
and the young soldiers in posts near the guard for in- 
struction - in, their duties, and will himself proceed to. 
take possession of the guard- house or guard- tent,, and _ 
the articles and prisoners in charge ofthe guard. 

agg. the time of relieving the sentinels and of 
calling in the Small posts, the old ¢ommander will give 
to the ‘new all the informatign ane instruction relatin g j 
to his’ post. 

The first relief having been ddbiendeed and svderiéd 
two paces to the front, the corporal of the new guard 


, 


950. APPENDIX=-GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING.: 


will take charge of it,,and., go to-relieve,the sentinels, . 
accompanied by ‘the corporal of. the old»;guard, who) 
will take command of the old sentinels. when the whole., 
- are relieved. | | i. 

‘If the sentinels are, numerous, the. sergeants. are..to 
be employed, as well as the corporals, in relieving 
them. : oa 

The relief, with arms ata support, in two ranks, will 
march by a'flank, conducted by the corporal on the side 
of the leading front-rank man; aud the men will ‘be 
numbered alternately in the front’ and rear’ rank, the 
man on the right of the front rank being No. 1. Should 
an officer approach, the corporal will command : Carry 
arms, and resume the support arms when the officer is 
passed. - 

The sentinels at the guard- hones or guard-tent, will , 
be the first relieved’ and left behind ; the others are 
relieved insuccession.;.. : 

When the sentinel seey’ my relief. aauieos cine he . 
will halt: and face. to it, with. his arms. ata shoulder. 
At six paces, the:corporal will command :, . 

1. Relief. 2 AAyr; 
when the relief will halt and carry arms: — The: corpo- 
ral will then add, “No. :,” or “ No. 2,” or “No. 3, " 
according to the nuinbet of the post: : , 
Arms—Pors. 


The two sendinola will, with arms at port, Fo ap- 
proach each other, when the,old sentinel, under the di- 
rection of the corporal, will whisper the instructions “4 
to the new sentinel... This done, the. two sentinels will 


shoulder-arms, and the.old.sentinel, will pass, in quick, . 


APPENDIX—-GUARDS AND ccARb-MGUNTDNG 251 


time, to ‘ple place i in rear of the relief. The corporal 
will then command : 


vd. Sian post ident 2. Forward. 3. Marc; 


and the relief proceeds in the same manner until the 
whole are relieved. ; 

The detachments and sentinels from the old guard 
having come in, it will be marched, at shouldered arms, 
along the front of the new guard, in quick time, the 
new guard standing at presented arms ; officers saluting, 
and the music of both guards beating, except at the 
outposts. | 

On arriving at the regimental or garrison parade, 
the commander of the old guard will send the detach- 
ments composing it, under charge of the non-commis- 
_sioned officers, to their respective regiments. Before 
the men are dismissed, their pieces will be drawn or 
discharged at a target. On rejoining their companions, 
the chiefs of squads will examine the arms, etc., of 
their men, and cause the whole to be put away in good 
order. 

When the old guard has marched off fifty paces, the 
officer of the new guard will order his men to stack 
their arms, or place them in the arm-racks. 

The commander of the guard will then make himself — 
acquainted with all the instructions for his post, visit 
the sentinels, and question them and the non-commis- 
sioned officers relative to the instructions they may 
have received from other persons of the old guard. 

Sentinels will be relieved every two hours, unless the 
state of the weather, or other causes, should make it 
necessary or proper that it be done at shorter or longer 
intervals. 


he 


252. APPRNDIN—-GUAIDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 
Each relief, before mounting, is inspected by the _ 
commander of the guard or of its post. The corpora) ‘ 
reports to him, and presents the old relief on its return. © 
The countersign or watchword is:given ‘to: such per- 
sons as are entitled to pass during, the night,. and. to, 
officers, non-commissioned officers, and sentinels of the 
guard. Interior guards receive the countersign, only 
when ordered by the commander, of the troops. 
._ The parole i is imparted to such. officers only as ; have) : 
aright to visit the guards, and to make the gr and . 
rounds, and to officers commanding guards... , 
As soon as the new guard has been marched off, “the | 
officer of the day will repair to the office of the. com- 
manding officer and report for orders. | , ts 
The officer of the day must see that the. oflicer of. the : 


guard is furnished with the parole and pQUngsRe? be-. Me 


fore retreat. F 
The officer of the day visits the , guards nt Res the 
day at such times as he. may, deem necessary, and, i+. 
makes his rounds, at night, at. least once after. ‘ARPINB.s 
o'clock. me 
Upon being relieved, the officer of the day will ane 
such remarks in the report of, the officer, of the guard». 
as circumstances require, , and present, the same at, 
headquarters... ». ), “ai 

Commanders of guards leaving Tie posts to, att 
their sentinels, or on. other gh are. to. mention, their ., 
intention, and the probable time. of. their absence, to, ;,, 
the next in command. pis : 

The officers are to remain constantly at their guards: 
except while visiting their sentinels, or necessarily en- 
gaged elsewhere on their proper duty. ...,, 


APPENDIX——-GUARDS AND GUARD- MOUNTING. , 253 


N either officers nor soldiers are to take off their 
clothing or accoutrements while they are on guard. 

The‘ officer of the guard must see that the counter- 
sign is duly communicated to the sia a little be- 
fore-twilight. | 

When a fire breaks out, or any alarm is raised in a 
garrison, all guards are to be immediately under arms. 

Inexperienced officers are put on guard as supernu- 

meraries, for the purpose of instruction. 
Sentinels will not take orders, or allow themselves 
to be relieved, except. by an officer or non-commis- 
sioned officer of their guard or party, the officer of the 
day or the commanding officer ; in which case the or- — 
ders will be immediately communicated to the com- 
marder of the guard by the officer giving them. 

Sentinels will report every breach of orders or regu- 
lations they are instructed to enforce. 7 

Sentinels must keep themselves on the alert, uNeRY: 
ing every thing that takes place within sight and hear- 
ing of their post. They will catry their arms habitu- 
ally at support, or on either shoulder ; but will never 
quit them. In wet weather, if there be no sentry-box, 
they will secure arms. 

No sentinel shall quit his post, or hold conversation 
not: necessary to the discharge of his duty. 

~All persons, of whatever rank in the service, are re- 

yuired to observe respect 1 F sentinels. 

In case’ of disorder, a sentinel must call out, The 
Guard ! and if a fire takes place, he must cry “ Fire!” 
adding the number of his post. If, in either case, the 
danger be great, he must spec 23% his piece before | 
paneer! out. J , 





954 APPENDIX-—GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 


‘It is the duty of a sentinel to repeat.all calls, made 
from posts more distant from, the..main,, body, of, the 
guard than his own, and no. sentinel, will be posted so. 
distant as not to be heard by the guard, either directly 

or through other sentinels. |, .. 

' Sentinels will present arms to pase oa field. offi- 
cers, to the officer of the day, and to; the commanding 
officer of the sg -To all other officers. site will PATE 
ATMS» _ 

When a sentinel, in his. sentry;box, sees,.an officer 
approaching, he will stand at. attention, and,.as the. of- 
ficer passes, will salute. him, by bringing the. left hand: 
briskly to. the musket, as high as. the. right.,shoulder. 

The sentinel, at any. post of the guard, when he sees. 
any body. of troops, or an, officer entitled to compli- 
ment, approach, must call, ‘Turn out the guard !”? and 
announce who. approaches. 

- Guards do not. turn out, as a, matiter, of, compliment, 
after sunset ; _but sentinels will, when officers in uni-. 
form. apiikdselk pay them proper .attention, by, facing’. 
tu the proper front and standing. steady at shouldered 
arms. This will be observed until the evenins.is so far 
advanced that the sentinels begin challenging. 

After retreat, (or the hour appointed by the com- 
manding officer,) until broad daylight, a sentinel chal- 
lenges every person who» approaches him, taking at 
the same time, the position of arms port. He will sut- 
fer no person to come. nearer than within reach of his 
bayonet, until the person has, given the countersign. 

A sentinel, in challenging, will call call. out, «Who 
goes there$ 2” Tf answered, “ Friend, with the» counter- 
sign,” and he be instructed to pass persons with the 





APPENDIX——GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 255 


countersign, he will reply “ Advance, friend, with the 
countersign.” If answered, “ Friends,” he will reply, 
« Halt, friends ! Advance one with the countersign If 
answered, ‘ Relief,” Patrol,” or + Grand rounds,” he 
will reply, ‘ Halt! Advance, sergeant (or corporai) with 
the. countersign,” a and satisfy himself that the party is 
what it represents itself to be. Ifhe have no authority 
to pass persons with the countersign, he will cause 
them to stand, and call, ‘ Corporal of the guard!” 

In the daytime, when the sentinel: before the guard 
sees the officer of the day approach, he will call, « Turn — 
out the guard! Officer of the day!’ The guard will be 
paraded, and salute with presented. arms, 

_ When any person approaches. a post of the guard at 
night, the sentinel before the,post, after challenging, 
causes him to halt, until. examined by a non-commis- 
sioned officer of the guard. | If it. be the officer of the 
day, or any other officer entitled. to inspect the guard, 
and to make the rounds, the non-commissioned officer 
will call, “ Turn out the guard! when the guard will 
be paraded at shouldered arms, and the officer of the 
guard, if he thinks necessary, may demand the coun- 
tersign and parole. , 

‘The officer of the day, wishing to make the rounds, 
will take an escort of a non-commissioned officer ‘and 
two men. When the rounds are challenged by a sen- 
tinel, the sergeant will answer, “Grand rounds !” and 
the sentinel will reply, “ Halt, grand rounds! Advance — 
sergeant, with the countersign /” Upun which the ser- 
geant advances and gives the countersign. The senti. 
nel will then cry, ‘* Advance, rounds! and stand at a 
shoulder till they have passed. 


056 00> APPENDIX——PICKET GUARD. 


/ When the sentinel before the guard challenges, and 
is answered, “ Grand rounds,” he will reply, “ Halt, 
grand rounds! Turn out the guard; grand rounds !” 
Upon which the guard will be drawn up at shouldered 
arms. The officer commanding the guard - will then 
ordersa sergeant and two men to advance 5. ‘when 
within ten pacés the sergeant challenges. “The ser- 
gveant of the grand rounds answers, “ Grand rounds ! Y 
The sergeant of the guard’ replies, ’ “ Advance, sergeant, 
with the countersign!” The sergeant of the rounds ad- 
wances alone, gives the countersign, and returns to his 
round; The sergeant of the guard calls to his officer, 
“ The countersign is right!” on which the officer of the 
guard calls, “Advance rounds !? “The officer of the 
rounds then advances alone, the guard standing at 
shouldered: arms. The officer of the rounds passes 
along in frént of the guard to ‘the officer, who keeps 
his:post.on the right, and gives him the parole, He 
then examines the guard, orders back his escort, and, 
taking a new one, proceeds in the’ same manner to 
other guards. : 

All material instructions given to a sentinel on ‘post, 
by persons entitled to make grand rounds, ought to be 
promptly Dom mae ae to the commander of the 
guard. i 9 
Any general officer, or the commander of a ‘post. or 
garrison,:may visit the guards of his command, and 
go.the’ grand ‘rounds, and ‘be > received in the same 
manner as prescribe for the officer of the day, 


‘PICKED Guard!” © ‘a 


The picket guard is stationed at some advantageous 


APPENDIX—PRISONERS. '. OT 


point, in advance of the main body. for the purpose of 
watching the enemy, to intercept the passage of cou- 
tiers, or small parties, to give notice of the approach 
of any, considerable force, and to intercept them, if 
possible, by such a show as will cause sufficient delay 
to enable the fact to. be communicated at headquarters. 
The strength of a picket guard depends upon the po- 
sition they are sent to occupy, aud the proximity of 
the enemy. The point occupied should be susceptible 
of some defence. The picket should be relieved every 
day; if not, the fact Bhould be known when the guard 
is posted. 

All out guards stand to ams at i dhi on the ap- 
proach of patrols, rounds, or other parties ; the senti- 
nel of the arms will-call them out. 

The sentinels and videttes are placed on points from 
which they can see furthest, taking care not to break» 
their connection with each other, or with their post. 
They are concealed from the enemy as much as possi- 
ble by walls or trees or elevated ground. It is gener- 
ally of more advantage not. to. be seen than to see far. 
A sentinel'should always be ready to fire, and when 
once satisfied of the presence of.an enemy, he should 
fire, although all defence on his part were useless, 
since the safety of the post may depend upon it. 


PRISONERS. 


The prisoners under charge of a guard should not . 
be allowed to hold extended communication with each 
other, or with the men’on guard. They should be 
forced to maintain the utmost decorum, and=a distur-— 
bance of any kind should be checked at once by the 


958 APPENDIX -~- PRISONERS. 


application’ of the most eificiént means. On the march 
the prisoners, are placed im charge of the old picket 
guard, with bayonets fixed and arms loaded. They 
march in the centre of the regiment. On reaching 
camp, they. are turned over to the new eicyi as soon: 










































































































































































as posted,” 
FORM OF GUARD REPORT. , | 
Report of a Guard mounted>at ,on the ——, and relieved | 
_ on dap rit ‘Tehi 
aoe. é | ' . Annies in | a 3 
EE Pl atk = Cuksan: $8 % = 
s be q cA 2) <4 moO Pes | 
4 A < RB o a 3 
ElaelS eS) ahalle FA Ee 
Bo) Shel gol Bag S a cass 
= fo} ~ x S Lad < . F 
Ai#@lolalaleal|< BE < 
kar ee ag | 
DETAIL. i. 
‘LIST OF PRISONERS. 
b & 
& a CONFINED. 
No. |NaMEs| a : CHARGES .| SENT REMARKS. 
es S$ |wHin.| By f°” 
§ ea WHOM. 
i Ny 
je AY 
7 ft F. 
2 
3 
4 
5 
A. B.C., 
Lieutenant 1st Regt ment, 
, : Commanding the Guard, 


































































































; LIST OF THE GUARD. 
Reliefs, when posted. Qa 
24 , : Warne Zz 7 
ie - POATAD. < 
ist RELIEF. 2p RELIEF. 8p REvi=r. a 
a , ° art 
From -—— TO—— AND 70 ——.|| FRoM —— TO ——— AND —— TO——. From —~ 10 —— AND —— TO —. ; 
No | Name | Oo. Rt Name.) Co. Rt. Name. |: Co. Rt. | 
| sep. [2 &. Ist. he F D. 3d. ar & a, Sth. |/G?v Houxx 
2 E. FE. Bh. 4th Ki. dus E. » 2d. Q. R - H. 9th. || MaGazrne, | 
3 G. H. C. 6th. M.N. F. 5th. Ss. T. iG 10th. (Y’r. STOKE 
1 Sergeant W. V., Uo. A., Regiment. 1 Sexo't Gp. 
2 Corporal W. X., Oo. B, “6 Corr’, - “4 
3 Corporal Y¥. Z., Co. O:, “ | ts 








DICTIONARY. 





A. 


ABATIS (french).—Rows of felled trees, sharpened to a point, 
used for defense. 

ABSENCE, with Leave.—Permission given to be absent from 
post or service. 

ACCOUTREMENTS.—Black leather belts. — 

ADJUTANT.—An officer selected-by the colonel to assist him.. 

ADJUTANT-GENERAL.—The ati assistant of a command- 
ing general. 

ADOBE,.—Unburnt brigks, Land to build defenses in New 
Mexico. 

ADVANCED.—Any portidn of an army which is in front of 
the rest. 
ADVANCE GUARD.—A detachment of troops which pre- 
cedes the march of the main body: 

AFFAIR.—Any slight action or engagement. 

ALARM-POST.—Place-appointed-forevery regiment or de- 
tachment to assemble in case of sudden alarm. 

AMBULANCES.—Flying hospitals, used on the battle-field. 

AMBUSCADE.—A body of men -lying in wait to surprise an 
enemy 

AMMUN ITION.—Gunpowder, rcientiibe and pyrotechnic 
compositions used in the army. 

APRON.—A piece of sheet lead uséd fo cover the vent of a 
cannon, 

ARM.—Infantry, arbllery, and cavalry are arms of the service. 

ARMISTICE,.—A temporary truce, or suspension of hostilities. 

ARMORER.—tThe person who makes, cleans, or repairs arms, 

ARMORY.—A manufactory or place of deposit for arms. 

ARMY.—It is an assemblage of agents-and instruments proper 
and necessary to carry on war abroad, or suppress insurrec- 
tion and repel invasion at home. 

ARMY REGULATIONS.—A book so called, published in the 
name of the President of the United States. 

ARSENAL.—A place of deposit for ordnance and ordnance 
stores. 

ARTICLES OF WAR.—Rules made to govern all attached 
to an army. 


id r 


DICTIONARY. 261 @ 


ARTIFICERS.—Military workmen; two allowed to each com- 
pany of artillery. | 

ARTILLERY.—An arm of the service ee to use mount- 
ain, field, and heavy ordnance... 

ASSAULT.—An attack on a garrison or an army. 

ASSEMBLY.—Drum beat.to order troops to assemble. 

ASSIGNMENT.—The senior officer who commands detach- 

. ments on the march. 

ASTRAGAL.—Small convex molding used in ‘ordnance. 
ATTACK.—To combat with force. 
ATTENTION.—Cautionary command addressed to troops. 
AWARD.—tThe decision of & court-martial. — 


BAGGAGE. —Equipments of an army to be transported. 

BALKS are joist-shaped spars, with rest between the cleats 
upon the saddle of two pontons, to support the chess or 
flooring of a bridge. | 

BALLISTICS is that branch of gunnery which treats of the 
motion of projectiles, 

. BAND.—Enlisted soldiers, forming a band of musicians under 
the direction of the adjutant. 

BANQUETTE is the step of earth within the parapet, for sol- 
diers to stand on to fire over it. 

BARBETTE.—Guns are said to be in barbette when they are 
elevated, by raising the earth behind the parapet, or by 
placing them on high carriages, so that, instead of firing 
through embrasures, they can be fired over the crest of the. 
parapet. | 

BARRACKS are buildings erected for lodging troops. 

BARRICADES are obstructions placed in highways or build- 
ings to form a taggotony fort. 

- BARRIER.—Carpentry obstructions in fortifications. 

BASE OF OPERATIONS.—tThat secure line of frontier from 
which forward. movements are made, supplies furnished, 
and upon which troops may retreat. 

BASTION.—A work consisting of two faces and two flanks, 
all the angles being salient. 

BAT-MEN.—Men who take charge of the baggage of officers 
and companies. : 

BATARDEAU (is a strong wall of masonry built across a 
‘ditch, to sustain the pressure of the water. 

BATTALION. —An aggregation of from two to ten companies 
in the United States service. . 

_ BATTERY.—Two or more pieces of artillery in the field. 


262 | DICTIONARY. 


BATTERY (en-barbette). bis leraink on carriages over 
the parapet. 

BATTER (ambulant). —Heavy neg mounted on traveling 
“@arriages; © 

BATTERY (covered). —Intended for ‘vertical fire, and .con- 
cealed from the enemy. © 

BATTERY ° (breaching). Joint batteries uniting their fire, 
against any object. 2 

BATTERY (counter).—One ‘batery opposed: against another. 

BATTERY. (coast).—Direct battery. 0° 

BATTERY (cross).—Forming’# eross fire on an Object. 

BATTERY (oblique).—Forming an angle of 20°.or more. _ 

BATTERY (raised).—One whose terre-plein is elevated con- 
siderably above the ground. . 

BATTERY (sunken).—Where the sole of the embrasures is 
on a level with the ground, the gum platforms being: below it: |. 

BATTERY ‘(enfilading).—When the: shot*or-shell sweeps the 
“whole length ofa line of troops, or part»of a-work.) © 

BATTERY (horizontal). —When the terre-plein i8 level with 
the ground. °° 

BATTERY (open). —Without epaulment: or coverings, exposed. 

BATTERY (a crémaillére).— With salient! angles; for obtaining 
an oblique as well as direct fires” » 

BATTERY (reverse).—That which: fires upou the rear. of a 
work. 

BATTERY (richocet). — Whose projectiles being- fired at lot 
angles, graze and bound without being buried. 

BATTERY (masked). —Artificially Momnpated until required to 
open upon the enem 

BATTERY WAGON:—A wagon accompanying each. field 
battery. 

BATTLE. ~<A contest between two forces, a 

BAYONET.—A spear attached to the: of. a mhiasktot| 

BAYONET-SWORD.—A sword: attach to the barrel of a 
rifle or rifle musket. ' 

BERME.—A. narrow path round fortifications; between. the 
parapet and the ditch, to prevent the earth from falling in. 
BILLET.—Compelling citizens, by law, to feed and quarter 

troops; billeting troops upon citizens, 

BED.—Straw and bedsacks used. by soldiers; bed for & mortar ; 
bed of a gun-lock. 

BLAOKING.—A preparation for coloring: belts, harness, eto., 
composed of three ounces of molasses, one ounce of: ivory 
black, one ounce muriatic acid, one ounce sulphuric acid, 
and a spoonful of olive oil. « 


DICTIONARY. 263. 


- BLACKING (liquid, for eerg aig eee parts of white wax, 


4 


seven and.ashalf parts: essence:of turpentine, one. and:a half 
parts of. ivory black.» The wax ‘cut in: small? pieces, rand put 
inva glazed, vessel. Spread. the turpentine over it, and leave 
it for 24 hours,:: Thenmix it’ by degrees. 

BLINDAGE’— Avsiege work constructed as a dialed against a. 
cross or ricochet fire of: artillery; also to guard ogsisink the 
effect of shells: — 

BLOCK-HOUSE.—A redoubt of logs ee common. defense 
‘against Indians; 9 5° . 

BOARD.—Any organization. of officers for 2 special garieemc, 
as Ordnance Board: 

BOMB.—The shell:thrown: by. a thortar is called’a bomb-shell ; 
the shelters made for magazines, etc., should: be bomb-proof. 

BOMBARDMENT. —A show er of shells and osher incendiary 
projectiles. 

BOOKS ecahneciat ve nie perienal orders 2, regimental 
order; 3, letter-book ; 4, index of letters ; B, size or descrip- 
tive book; 6, monthly returns. 

BOOKS (company). 1, dhesid ptivecl ; 2, - ie 3) 
order-book. } 

BOOM.—Is.a frame of ence stretched : across a river, some- 
times sunk, to prevent the entrance of a hostile fleet. 

BOOTY. —What isJawfully taken in capture. | | 

BOUNTY.—A:(\payment as a prominin, given to soldiers. to 
enlist or re-enlist. - 

BAYAU.—A small trench leading to a magazine. 

BREACH.—Rupture made in a fortification. 

BREACH OF ARREST.—An officer leaving- his confinement 
before he shall be set at:liberty.>. — 

BREAK GROUND.—To: commence the siego ofa placa: by 
opening trenches. 

BREASTWORK.—A hastily-constructed parapet. — iA 

BREEOH.—The mass of solic metal behind the bottom ‘of the 
bore of a@gun... °. 

BREVET.—A commission in the army at large. 

BRICOLES.—Harness for men to drag guns with, when horses. 
can not be used, Kighteen feet long. 

BRIDGE.—Portable: structures: to apnmdy troops over rivers, 
creeks, and ravines,» 

BRIDGE (ponton). — Floats, made boat-shaped, of wood, 
copper, tin, or gutta percha, 

BRIDGE-BOAT.—Are boats: chained: tozether by their sides 
~ to afford.a passage across.a.river; jill S by side.) 

Blaise oe G. naror: swift: 7 ng made of. boats, secured 


064 DICTIONARY. 


BRIDGE (timber). —A structure of timber, the upper portion 
overhanging, to admit of a single stick to complete. 

BRIDGE-HEAD (la téte du pont).—Is a small fort, constructed — 
to cover-a bridge, to protect a retiring army 

BRIDOON.—The snaffle and rein of a railifery bridle. 

BRIGADE.—Two regiments of infantry or cavalry. 

BRIGADIER-GENERAL.—Rank next below ‘major-general, 
commander of a brigade. | 

BRIGADE-MAJOR.—An officer appointed to assist the gen- 
eral commanding a brigade in all his duties. © 

BUNK.—A word used in the army, a place for. bedding. 

BUREAU.—Departments in the war department. 

pie rr :—Funeral honors paid to deceased officers and sol- 

iers. 

BUSHING A GUN is drilling a hole in a gun, and eaeting 

a piece of metal for a new vent. 


c. 


CADET.—A warrant officer. Students at West Point Military 
Academy are cadets of the engineer corps. 

ere —A wagon attached to a battery to carry powder 
an 

OALIBER.—The caliber of, bullets is determined by the num- 
-ber required to weigh a pound. The caliber of guns is 
designated by the weight of the shot; siege and sea-coast 
howitzers, columbiads, and mortars, by the number cf inches 
of their respective diameters. 

CAMONFLET.—A small mine of about ten pounds of powder. 

CAMP.—The temporary repose for troops. 3 

Se 1 ea .—The pediog of a year that an army keeps the 

el 

OANISTER.—For field service, consists of a tin cylinder 
attached to a sabot, and filled with ethene shot.. For 
siege and garrison guns, the bottom is of cast iron, and the 
cover of sheet iron, with a handle made of iron wire. 

CANTEEN.—A small tin, India-rubber, or wooden vessel, 
used by soldiers to carry ‘water, liquor, etc., in. 

CANTONMENTS.—Troops quartered in towns and villages. 

yet th —The line drawn bisecting the salient angle of a 

ork. 

GAPITULATION. — Articles of agreement, by which besieged 
troops surrender at discretion, or with the honors of war. 

OAPONNIERE.—A passage from ‘a fort'to an outwork. 

OAPS.—Percussion caps for small arms are formed by a. ma- 
chine which cuts a star or blank from the sheet of copper, 


- DICTIONARY. 265 


and transfers it to a die, in which the cap is shaped. by 
means of a punch, The powder with which caps are 
charged consists of fulminate of mercury, mixed with half 
its weight of saltpeter. 

CAPTAIN.—Rank in the army between major and. first. lieu- 
tenant, charged with the arms, accoutrements; ammunition, 
clothing, or “ther warlike stores belonging to the troops or 
company under his command. 

CARBINE.—A cavalry weapon, in weight and length: between 
rifle and. pistol, and usually breech- -loading. 

JARCASS. — Combustible composition, . encased in globes, 
formed. with iron, hoops, canvas, and cord, of an oblong 
shape, and thrown from mortars, used in bombardments and 
firing shipping. 

OARPENTRY.—That part, of roof and bridge work ‘linia 
guished from joiners’ work, being put together by using 
axe, adze, saw, and chisel. 

CARTE-BLANCHE.—A blank paper sent to a person to fill 
up with such conditions as he thinks proper to insert. 

CARTEL.—An agreement between two hostile powers for a 
mutual exchange of prisoners. | 

CARTRIDGES.—Powder and projectiles. 

OCASCABLE.—A part of the gun in rear of the base ring. 

CASEMATE.— Vaulted ehamber, with embrasures for guns. 

CASE-SHOT.—Small | balls inclosed in a case or envelope, 
which, broke by the discharge, or by a charge of powder 
within them, scatter the balls. | 

CASHIERED. "Dismissal from the service by the sentence of 
a court-martial. 3 

CASTRAMETATION,.—The art of encampment. 

CASUALTIES.—Applied to all soldiers who desert, die, or are 
discharged. 

CAV ALIER.—A fortification of more than ordinary height. 

CAV ALRY.—Mounted troops, 

CAVALRY TACTIOCS.—Instruction for. mounted. troops. 

CHAIN-BALL.—A chain attached to a conical shot, to compel 
its movement point forward, 

CHAIN-SHOT.—Two shot chained together, used for cutting 
masts, rigging of vessels, ete. 

Nero K.—A communication between two parties to 

ght 

CHAMADE.—A signal for parley, by beat of drum. 

CHAMBER (of a mine).—A cell of cubical form, to receive 
‘the powder. 


- QHAMBER (of guns).—Chambers of howitzers, columbiads, 


266 DICTIONARY. 


and mortars, is the smallest part of the pore, and contains 
the powder. 

OHAPLAIN.—Minister of the Gospel attached ‘ti an army. 

CHARGE:—The impetus of an army on the attack. The 
attack of cavalry. Written documents preferred before a 
court-martial. 

CHARGER.—The horse rode by an officer in the field or in 
action. 

CHASE.—The conical part of a piece of ordnance, in front of 
the reinforce. 

CHASSIS.—A traversing carriage. A T rail for casemate and 
barbette guns to travel on. | 

CHEMIN’ DES RONDES.—A slope in front of the parapet. 

CHESSES.—Platforms which form the flooring of bridges. 

CHEVAUX-DE-FRISE.—A temporary structure to stop 4. 
breach or impede the advance of cavalry. - 

OIRCUMV ALLATION.—Works made by besiegers around a 
besieged place. 

CITADEL.—A small fort, a refuge for the garrison. 

COEHORN MORTAR.—Brass 24-pounder mortar, weighing 
164 pounds. 

COLONEL.—Rank in the army between brigadier-general and 
lieutenant-colonel. ~— 

COLORS.—The insignia of the regiment. 

COLUMBIAD.—An American cannon, invented by Colonel 
Bumford, of very large caliber, used for throwing solid shot 
or shells, which, when mounted in barbette, has a vertical 
field fire from 5° depression to 39° elevation, and a horizon- 
tal field of fire of 360°; 10-inch weighs 15, 400 pounds, and 
is 126 inches long; 8- inch weighs 9, 240 pounds, and is 124 
inches long. | 

COLUMN OF ATTACK.—The attack of troops when moving 
in column. 

COLUMN IN ROUTE.—The march of troops on die high- 
roads, when the cadenced step is not used. 

CLOSE COLUMN.——-A company or division being in rear of 
and within five paces of another. 

COLUMN OF DIVISION.--One division being in rear of an 
other. 

COLUMN AT HALF DISTANCE.--When the division or 
company are in rear of and at half their front distant. _ 

COLUMN OPEN.—When the division or company is in the . 
rear of and at its full front distant. 

en —The power invested by virtue of orders and 
oflice 


DICTIONARY. | 267 


COMMAND-OF-FIRE. — When a fort is higher than the 


COMMANDER: IN- CHIEF. —The supreme and hich officer. 

COMMANDER-OF-THE-ARMY.—An officer delegated with 

ower of chief command, 

COMMISSARY OF SUBSISTENCE. An officer of the. mb 
sistence department. 

COMMISSION— Authority from. & supreme officer by virtue 
of a written document. ... 

COMPANY,—An organization of: military goramartded by 2 
captain. 

CON! SCRIPTION.—Foxced method of raising armies. 

CONTRACTS.—Agreement for purchases and sales in the army. 

CONVOYS.—Armed vessels accompanying unarmed transports 
and merchant vessels, transportation of supplies,.ete.,. for 
troops. 

CORDON.—The coping of the escarp or inner, wall of the ditch. 

CORPORAL.—Grade between private and sergeant. 

CORPS.—A regiment isa corps—an independent CAIPABY is 8 
corps. 

COUNCIL OF ADMINISTRATION.—A doard appointed by 
Government under the actof July 5th, 1838, to employ per- 
sons to act as chaplain and schoolmaster, 

COUNCIL-OF-W AR.—<An assemblage of the chief officers of 
the army. 

COUNSEL.—AIl writers admit it to be the omstom to allow a 
prisoner to lave counsel. . The laws of the State of New 
York give a prisoner the right of counsel. . 

OOUNTER- BATTERY.—A number of guns placed, behind a 
parapet. | 

COUNTERFORTS. —Buttr esses by which the saneimont walls 
ure backed. 

COUNTERGUARD.—A work composed of two faces, forming 
a salient angle, placed before a bastion, 

COUNTERMINES.—Galleries excavated by dofendens to ap 
_proach the mines and destroy the works of besiegers, 

COUNTERSCARP. —The outer boundary of the ditch. 

COUNTERSIGN.—A ‘particular word used between guards 
and sentinels, . ° 

COUNTERSLOPE. pg within the fort, to revet the parapet. 

COUP D’GIL.—Distinguishing at a glance the weak points of 
the enemy. 

COUP. DE MAIN.—A sudden and. vigorous attack. 

COURT-MARTIAL.—A body of officers cnet to investi- 
gate charges against an officer. 


- Ey ee 


268 eee ‘DIOTIONARY. 


COURT OF INQUIRY.—An sedi tia ab of officers to inquire 

~ jnto the nature of transactions or accusations against officer 
and soldier. . 

COVERED WAY.—A space between the counterscarp and 
the crest of the glacis in permanent works. 

COW ARDICE.—Desertion in the face of the enemy, 

ORATER' OF A MINE.—The excavation formed in the 
ground by the explosion of the powder. — 

CREMAILLERE.—An indented or zig-zag outline. 

CRENNELATED.—Loop-holed. : 

CRIMES.—Disorders and neglects; prejudice to good order 
‘and military discipline. 

CROTCHETS.—Openings cut in the glacis at the head of the 
traverse. 

CROWNING.—A lodgment prepared by besiegers upon the 
ae of the glacis, to ; make themselves master of the covered 


CROWN-WORK. —Similar work to horn-work, with two 
fronts instead of one. 

CROWS’-FEET.—tron-pointed stars, or ‘stout nik strewed on 
the ground, and ‘so fixed as ‘to impede the movement™of 
cavalry. 7 

OUNETTE. —A narrow ditch in tho‘middle of a dry ditch, to 
keep it drained. 

CURTAIN,.—That part of a rampart which lies between two 
bastions, and’ which joins their two flanks.’ 

-OURTAIN ANGLES.—That formed by" the meeting of the 
flank and the curtain. 

CUSTOM OF WAR.—Common law of the army. 


D. 


DAM.—An impediment formed of stones, gravel, and earth. 

DEAD ANGLE.—An angle or piece of ‘ground which can not 
be seen. 

DEBLAI.—The earth which is excavated from the ditch to 
form the remblai. | 

DEOISIONS.—The result of investigations, when reported. 

DEFENSE.—Resistance to attack. Evidence presented by 

risoners on trial.. 

DEFILADING. —Raising the paraiets of a fortress or tield- 
work. » 

DEFILE. —Any narrow passage, as a ford, a bridge, a road, 
* mountain’ passes, ete. 

DEMILUNE.—A work constructed to cover the curtain ma 
shoulders of the bastion. 


- DIOLIONARY. . 269 


DEPARTMEN T., nore heeaiell of an army distinct within itself, 
yet connected with the army proper.” 

DEPARTMENT OF WAR, peueennaree all war and army action 
emanate. 

DEPLOYMENT. 2<Mtorenianté of tr wore from column into line 
of battle. 

DEPOT.—A pigee. for the reception of arms, ammpnition, and 
ordnance stores. 

DERRIOCK.—A shawser spars, in an oblique position, to raise 
heavy weights with. 

DETACHED" BASTION. —Separated from ‘the enciente by a 

- ditch. ~~. 

DETACHED WORKS. —Works constructed beyond the range 
of musketry. 

DETACHMEN TA“ bod y of troops, or an entire corps, 
charged particularly with functions which are dependent for 
their duration upon circumstances, in’ war or actual service. 

DETAIL FOR DUTY.—Roster or table, for the regular per ; 
formance of duty either in camp ‘or garrison. , 

DIMINISHED ANGLE.—That formed ‘by the exteri ior side 
and the line of defense in fortifications. | 

DISBURSING OFFICERS.—Officers appointed by aw to 

make contracts and payments. 

DISCHARGE.—<A document in wipro absolving the soldier 
from the service. 

DISCIPLINE.—The’ morale of an army.  T he prOUer execu- 
tion of military law and regulation.» 

DISEMBARKATION. —The- landing’ of troops’ from ships or 
tvansports, — - 

DISMISSION. —Diser eof discharge ofan officer or soldier. 

DISMOUNT.—To relieve guard; to assign cavalry to infantr y 
duty; to take a gun from its carriage. - 

DISOBEDIENCE: OF ORDERS. cue: violation or retusal’ to 
-obey ‘the order of a superior. ~ 

DISPART.—Difference of the semi- diameter of ile base: Ting 
and swell of the muzzle ofa gun.’ 

DISTANCES.—A computation of time and travel! 

DISTRIBUTION.—A. division or allotment to ookpa 

DITCH.—Excavation around a fort, in front of it. | 

DIVISION.—Two brigades, “Ina regiment, two companies. 

DOMICILE.—The last residence of asoldier ere his enrollment. 

DRAGOONS.—A species of mounted troops. © 

DRAG-ROPE ~<A four-inch rope, with a hook and: handles to 
extricate gun-carriages from difficult positions. 

DRILL.—The maneuvers and tactical exercise of troops. 


270 DICTIONARY. 


DUTY.-—Special labor « assigned to arsobe The tour of duty is 

_ from the eldest: downward. Brigade duties are those per- 
formed by one regiment in common with another. Regi- 
mental duties are those performed by the officers and eo 
nies of a regiment among themselves, 


EL 


ECHELON.—An Srecmmednelh of battalions or companies, su 
that each has a line of battle in advance or rear ne its neigh- 
boring battalion. 

_ELEVATION.—Shows the height or depth of a Wore and 
ae its length, when the plane of projection, is peraie to its 

ace. 

EMBARKATION.—The transportation of troops into tran- 
sports and gun-ships. 

EMBRASURE.—An opening cut through the face of a fort or 
parapet, to point guns through. 

ENCIENTE.—The body of the place, or the first belt of ram- 
parts and parapets that inclose the place. 

ENFILADE.—To sweep, the whole length of the face of any 
work or line of troops, by a battery on the prolongation of . 
that line. 

ENGINEER CORPS.—A cor ps under the direct control of 
the President. . Their duty is planning, constructing, ao 
repairing all fortifications and other defensive work. 
time of war, they present plans for attack and defense of 
military works: lay out and construct field defenses, redoubts, 
intrenchments, roads, ete. 

ENGINEERS (topographical), —A corps for making surveys 
for defenses and positions for fortifications. 

ENLISTMENT.—A. voluntary obligation of a soldier with 
government for a term of years. 

ENSIGN.—Lowest grade of commissioned officer. 

ENTANGLEMENT,.—Abatis, so called by cutting at the base 
and throwing the branches of trees to the ground. | 

EPAULMENT.—An elevation thrown up to cover rae from 
the fire of an enemy. 

EPAULETTE Badge of rank, worn by officers on the 
shoulder. 

EPROVETTE.—A pendulum for proving samples of powder. 
The apparatus shows the initial velocity of a ball fired from 
a cannon or musket. 

EQUIPAGE. (camp and garrison). —Tents, aie utensils, 
axes, spades, etc. 


DIOTIONARY, 271 

EQUIPMENT. ~The dong ee dress of a soldier, miluidiig 
arms, accoutrements, ete. — 

ESCALADE.—To climb the walls of a fort, with the aid of 
ladders. - 

ESCARP.—Is the tis of the ditch next to the place. 

ESCORT.—Honors paid by troops at a ope, to the colors, 
and to distinguished persons. ~~ | 

. ESPLANADE.—Empty space for exercising troops in fortified 
laces’, <- 

ESPRIT DU CORPS.—Military pride of organizations. big > 

EVACUATE.—To withdraw from a town or fortress. | : 

EVIDENCE.—That which makes clear the truth of the fact 
or point in issue. 

EXPEDITION.—An enterprise undertaken either by sea or . 
land against an enemy. 

EXPENSE MAGAZINE.—<Are small powder magazines, con- 
taining ammunition, etc., made up for present use. : 

EXTERIOR. SIDE. —The side of the polygon, upon which . 
a front of fortification is formed. | 


EK. 


FACE OF A GUN.—The superficies of the metal at the ex- 
tremity of the muzzle. 
FACES OF A BASTION.—The two sides extending from the 
salient to the angle of the shoulder. 
FACES OF A SQUARE. —The sides of a battalion when 
formed in square. 
FACINGS.—The movements of Soldiers to the right, left, 
right about, left about, ete. 
_ FARRIER. —Attached to cavalry regiments, 
_ FASCINES.—Long cylindrical fagots of brushwood for sup- 
4 porting earth-work for temporary forts. 
* FATIGUE DUTY.—-An extra duty assigned to soldiers, for 
which they are allowed an extra gill of w hisky. 
: FAUSSE BRATE.—Is a second enceinte, exterior to and par- 
___ allel to the main rampart, considerably below its level. 
_ FIELD.—The scene of a campaign or battle. 
_ FIELD-DAY.—Instruction of regiments in the field, in the | 
_ __ exercises and evolutions. 
FIELD-WORKS.—Temporary earth-works to protect troops. 
_ FIELD-MARSHAL.—The highest military rank, PAGED that 
of captain-general. 
: FIELD-OFFIOERS.—Colonel, lieutenant- colonel, and major. . 
FILE.—Two soldiers, a front and rear rank man. 
FIRE (irect).—Perpondicular to the face of the line or work. 


a ee a ie 





27 2 DICTIONARY. 


FIRE fenfilade), —Parallél't yes rth yr of the line or work. 
FIRE _(oblique).—At an angle withthe line. or work. 
FIRE (plunging).—Firing from a higher position, than the ob 
ject aimed at. 
FIRE (ricochet).—Firing miss “& ‘slight elevation, and Witt: 
small charges, so:as to bounce the shot... — ... + _ 
FIRE (vertical).—Mortars fire the shell vertical or with : a curv ge 
FIRE-BALL.—Made of pyrotechnics, loaded witha shell. 
FIRING.—Discharge of fire-weapons.. |... yr 
FLAG.—The insignia of the United States, consisting of this 
teen horizontal stripes of bunting, red and white alternated. 
the Union to, be a star for each State on a blue field. | 
FLAG OF TRUCE,—A flag sent. by an enemy, as a peaceful 
mission. | 
FLANK.—tThe right or left:side of a body of men or valed: ye 
FLANK OF A BASTION.—That side which. connects the 
face and curtain. NM SEDI 
FLECHE.—A simple species of field: work. agian? 
FOOT.—In military, implying infantry soldiers... - | 
FORAGE.—Food required to subsist the horses of the 4 ani 
FORAGING.—A body of troops detailed to procure food for 
horses. 
FORCES.—Any body. of troops. | yr) At 
FORDS.—Passages selected to cross ee rivers, and streams, : 
FORGE,.—A portable furnace, for smiths’ purpose, attached to 
a battery. ’ 
FORLORN HOPE,—A force who volunteer for a desperate 
enterprise. 
FORT.—An inclosed work of the higher class of field-works, 
FORTIFICATIONS.—Applies to all constructions of earth- 
work for permanent or temporary defense. They are of three. 
kinds—irregular, when the ground will not admit. of regu. _ 
larity in their plan of construction; natural, when the 
topography of ground assists in_ its defense ; ‘and regular, . 
when they are “constructed on a regular polygon, all the 
corresponding parts being equal with each other. | 
FORTRESS.—-A fortified city or town. — 
FOUGASS.—Charges of powder placed i in @ pit | in the gr ound ( 
over which.an enemy must pass. rfl 
FRAISES.—Palisades placed horizontally or obliquely at thie 
edge of a ditch on either side. , 
FRICTION PRIMER. —A tube charged with powder, with a. 
cup in the top, containing friction powder, composed of two’ 
arts chlorate of potassa and one part solution of antimony, . 
Exploded by means of a slider pulled with a ‘lanyard, . 


ce 


DICTIONARY. 273 


FURLOUGHS.—Leave of absence granted to officers and sol- 
diers for a given time. 

FUSE.—Means used to ignite shells. They are classed. a as time, 
concussion, and percussion fuses, : vO 


G. 


GABLONADE.—A work constructed with gabions. 

‘; ABIONS.—Cylindrical baskets of various dimensions, open 
at both ends, used to make embrasures and parapets to tem- 
porary field-works. 

GALLERY.—In forts, a passage to the mine where the powder 
is kept. 

GARRISON. —A strong military headquarters. , 

GENERAL OFFICERS.—AI officers above the rank of colonel, 

GEOMETRY.—The science which teaches the dimensions of 
lines, — 

GIN.—Similar to der rick, a spar, used for hoisting heavy 
weights, 

GLAGCIS. —The slope from the parapet of a fort to the sur- — 
rounding country. 

GLANDERS.—A virulent disease among horses. 

rer hegte — An. open space of earth-work, in the parapet of a 
ort 

GORGE OF MOUNTAIN.—A passage or defile between two 
mountains or hills. 

GRAND DIVISION.—-A division of two nempenie in bat-. 
talion maneuvers. 

GRAPESHOT,—Cast-iron balls, put together by means of Hae 
cast-iron plates, two rings, one pin, and a nut. Grapeshot 
are used with 8-inch howitzers. 

GRAPPLING-IRONS, — Four. or six branches. bent, and» 
pointed with a ring at the root, with a rope attached; they 
are used for grappling. 

GRENADE.—A shell thrown by hand or in baskets from. stone 
mortars, A hand grenade is a small shell, about two and a 
half inches in diameter, has. a short. fuse, ‘js set on fire, and 
can be thrown ubout twenty yards. | : 

GREN ADIERS.—Right flank company of a regiment. 

GROOVES.—Spiral slits cut in rifles, rifle muskets, and can- 
non, to insure accuracy in the aim, and force in the propa: 
sion. 

GUARDS.—Are special forces for special duty. They consist 

of advance and rear guard, outpost and picket guard, quarter, 
camp and gurrison, and general officers’ guard. A tour of 
guard duty is about ércente tour hours, 


27 4 , | DICTIONARY. oo, 
ion waite Roo tiG. of oebaa pores ; 9 aek 

GUIDES. tex ond to. spill an army through - a ‘country, 
The direction of the march in the battalion. . 

GUIDONS.—The colors of a’ cavalry Wotandily. ofan mde 

GUN-COTTON.—Cotton steeped.in sulphuric and nitric acid. 

GUNNERS. —Soldiers who manage field and heay, y ordnance; 
each piece has. one’ man called a ‘gunner, who gives all the . 
commands, 

GUNNERS CAL IPERS. Made’ of brass, with steel points, . 
to prove the diameter of guns, shot, ete. 

GUNNERS’ PEINCERS.—Irén pincers. with steel jaws, to 
draw nails with. yn 

GUNNERS’ QUADRANT. —A grail! aint used for iighting the 
eu. | % 

GUNPOWDER. A Gomibustible ingredieit, made of 76 parts 
saltpeter, 15 of charcoal, and 10 ot sulphur. _Tt_ is, made 
coarse or fine by passing it thr ough’ sieves. seit 

GUNS.—Long cannon without chambers, 1 


we 


HAIL.—Challenge by a sentiy, “Who goes there?” 

HALT.—A rest during a march, a word of command. |. — -) 

HANDSPIKE.—A wooden_ spike used for moving gun- car- 
riages. 
HAVERSAOR: Bag usually made of rubber, to car ny, al 
diers’ rations in. Fees 

HELMET.—Defensive armor or covering for the head. 

HOLSTERS.—Cases attached to the pommel of the saddle, to 
hold pistols. 


HONORS.—Salutes ‘and other’ respects paid to distinguished Ri 


persons and prominent officers by virtue of rank. 

HONORS OF WAR.—Credit given to a defeated army, who 
honorably defended themselves, and capitulated. 

HORSE EQUIPMENTS. — Ev erything appertaining: ‘to the 
equipping of a horse for military use. — 

HOSPITAL.—An institution for the treatment of sick and 
wounded soldiers. 

HOT SHOT.--Shot heated’ in a furnace, and discharged at 
ships and houses for combustion. 7 hey are covered with & 
wid made of clay or hay while in the gun, 

H#OUSTINGS.—Cloth covering for saddles. 

HOW I'FZER.—A chambered cannon, 

HUSSARS.—Light cavalry. 

HUTS.—Quarters constructed by eiodpe wit todatad for the 
winter, 


abe 
te > 


DICTIONARY. 275 
Le 

10K Water frozen. Two inches ‘thick will bear infantry ; . 
four inches thick, cavalry or light guns. 

INDEMNIFICATION. — Reparation for losses incurred by 

' damage in military or other movements, 

INFANTRY.—A military force, which by formation in lines 
has fitted it for action on all kinds of grounds, and the sys- 
tem of massing, the condensation of ranks, and formation by 
size, have given it a perfec ensemble. 

INITIAL VELOOITY. —Th o force with which a projectile 
leaves the piece. - 

INLYING PICKET.—A body of infantry or cavalry in a 
campaigu, held always ready to march, 

INSPEOTOR-GENERAL.—A special Adparelnane in the United 
States Army, with the rank of colonel. ~ 

INSURRECTION.—A resistance to the laws of the country. 

INTRENCHED CAMP.—A position occupied by troops, and 
fortified for their protection. 

INTRENCHMENT.—A ditch or trench with a parapet. 

INVEST.—To besiege and take a town or te 


Be. 


JUDGE Aer OCe “Military arte in the army. 
i. is; 

KNAPSAOK. —A square frame, covered with deaths or can- 
vas, carried on an infantry soldier’ s back, containing his 
clothing. | 

LANOE.—A sharp steel blade, sight inches long, attached to 
a, staff with two iron straps, and held by a leather loop; it 
is used by mounted troops. 

LAW.—Is.a rule of. action prescribed by a superior power. | 

LAW (martial). —Paapelein. of the civil and the substitute. of 
military power. 

LAW (military).—To be applied to all who are attached.to the 
army. 

LIEUTENANT.—Rank next below captain. 

LIEUTENANT-COLONEL.—Rank next. below. colonel. a 

LIEUTENANT-GENERAL.—Special rank above | a» major- 
general, only conferred on General Scott for able and distin- 
guished Services. 

LIMBER.—The fore nee ut @ eperaisan to-which the pave 
are attached, . 


f * 


276 DICTIONARY. 
LINES.—A.connected series of feld-works, whether continuous 

or at intervals. | 
LINES CREMAILLERE. = Alternate short. ‘and long fives, at 

right angles to each other. 
LINES. OF BASTION.—Are ‘formed. of a succession of Das-. 
 tion-shaped parapets, each consisting of, two faces, and two 
flanks connected together. 

_LINSTOCK.—A pointed, forked staff, used for lighting fort fires. 
LOAD.—Command in infantry and artillery instr uction, | 
LODGMENT.—The occupation of an enemy’s position, 
LOOP-HOLES.—Apertures formed in. a wall or stockade, for 

firing musketry, © 
LUNETTES, irafedans having flanks baneliel 4 to their Se 


Mm. 


MAGAZINE. Receptacle for powder. | : 
MAJOR.—Rank below lieutenant-colonel.. 4 
MAJOR-GENERAL.—Rank ; between Diigo general and 
lieutenant-general. . . 
MALINGERER.—A soldier who flan iimness to avoid his duty. 
MANEU VER.—Movements in infantry, caxaley, ssieghlen etc. 


WaT 


MANUAL,—Exercises of arms... 
MARCH.—The command for troops to move. | 
MARKER.—Soldier who marks the direction of the line. 
MARTELLO .TOWERS.—Circular stone Labor Placed on. 
the sea-coast. for. defense... re 
MEDICAL DEPARTMENT.—In connection with hospital. 
MILEAGE,—Traveling allowance or: -tgansportation of baggage. 
MINE.—Powder placed in subterranean cavities. 
MINUTE-GUNS: —Guns fired at intervals of ‘a’ ‘eainuite, are sig 
nals of distress. ] 
MORTAR.—Large chamber of. iron, to hres shell, 
MOUNTED ARTILLERY.—A species of guns, called howit. 
zers, for throwing light shot and eanister. ~~~ 
MUSTER.—A report made by commanding officers of regi- 
ments and companies, as to the absence and peer cag 
members. 
N. 


ON-COMMISSIONED OFFICER. —Gandes batireon private 
and ensign. SN Be ox) mo heristiwoo yao: fe CaN 

OBLIQUE.+-<‘ diagonal jorcengiiine Bixeation|:) 3 2 od ~ ASML 

OBSTACLES.—<Articles natural and artificial, placed « 80 a8" ‘to 
impede the advance of troops. 


‘DICTIONARY. 27 


ae 


OFFICER.—All above the rank of a warrant officer. 
OPERATIONS.-—The action,and movements of an army, or a 
- detachment. — 

ORDERLIES,—Non- commissioned officers and soldiers, ap. 
~~ pointed to wait on general and other officers. ~ 
ORDERLY SERGEANT.—The first sergeant of a company 
ORDERLY BOOK.—A book for sergeants to insert the gen- 

eral and regimental orders from time to time. 
ORDERS.—Direetions, verbal or written, by a superior officer. 
ORDNANCE DEPARTMENT. —Having charge of all the 

ordnance issued by governinent. ‘ee 
OUTPOSTS. 7 EOGPA in. 1. advance of the main body. 


P. 


PACE.—tThe length of an. infantry soldiasis s step is crenie- 

eight, inches, 

PALISADES —Pointed sticks at the foot ofa slope to a fort, 
to keep the enemy out. 

PARADE.—<An assemblage of treops in a revular and pee 
scribed manner... 

PARAPET.—The depth of thé wall. of a, fort. 

PARK.—Where wise horses, Wagons and cattle are an 

. incam 

3 ROLE Ak word. given to sentinels to detect one who has 

.. obtained the countersign. by fraud. Pledge of honor required 
of liberated prisoners. 

PASS.—A straight, difficult, narrow passage, which, well de- 
fended, shuts. up. the entrance to a country. 

PATROL.—A. small party detached from a guard to obtain 
information from thecenemy. ~ 

PIONEERS,—Soldiers with saws, axes, and spodes; detailed 
for felling trees, making roads, ete... 

PIV OT.—That officer or soldier upon whom the company 
wheels. 

PLATFORM.—There are, six sleepers, eistiean: deck planks, 
seventy-two dowels, and twelve,irow eyebolts used for the 
platform of a siege mortar. : : 

PLATOON,—The half of a company. 

POINT BLANK.—Is the second point at which the ihe. of 
sight intersects the trajectory of the projectile. [sion. 

POINTING.—To give a gun the direction, elevation, or depres- 

PONTON.—Three rubber cylinders connected together, used 
as floats, weighing 260 pounds, for making portable Pager 

POST.—The fixed position of a force. - | 

PRIVATE. —Term bpsas to a common soldier. _ | 


278 : DICTIONARY. 
PROTBOTILES (for unrified ordtianiée). Ark gold shot and 


PROLONGEStout hempen rope, used to connect the lnnette 
of a field-carriage with the limber, when the piece is fired. 
PROVOST-MARSHAL,—An officer appointed in every army 
“in the field, to secure prisoners confined on charges of a 

seo nature. ign 


: QUARTERS, —The place where troops are 5 fed and lodged, 
QUOIN.—A wedge used to elevate or depress a gun. 


R. 


RALLY.—To re-form disordered troops. ° 

RAMPART.—A broad embankment round a fortified a 

RAMROD.—A rod of iron attached to a musket, for forcing 
home the charge. | 

RANGES. —The distance that a gun or fiitigket will cary. | 
tANK.—A range of subordination; a degree of dignity. . 

RATION.—The food which is allowed a soldier for each meal. 

REAR RANK.—tThe hinder rank. 

REAR GUARD.—A detachment of troops in rear of an 
arm 

REOOIL.—The motion which a cannon takes backward When 
fired. 

RECONNOISSANCE.—Cantious advances, in order to ascer- 
tain the strength of the enemy, or to discover them. 

are .—Small works with two faces, terminating in a salient 
angle 

REDOUBT. —Are square, polygon, or circular field-works. 

REDUCE.—To compel a surr ender. 

‘REGIMENT.—A body of troops organized by law, consisting 
of ten companies. 

RELIEF.—A species of duty in a guard, so as to prevent the 
etn force being on duty. The guard is divided into three 
reliefs, 

Sabana Ot —Demand made by the proper officers for 

~~ sup 

RESERVE. -—A select body of troops, for support when needed, - 
or to rally upon. 

RETREAT. —Retrograde movement before the enemy ; 7a dram 
beat at sunset. 

REVEILLE.—-Drum-beat and roll-call at daybreak. 

REVERSE.—Opposite to direct. _. 

REVETMENT.—To tie fast; the inner bank of a send le 


DICTIONARY. ee 


REVIEW.—A display of troops before a general office or 
illustrious personage. _. 

RIFLED ORDNANCE.—Guns, muskets, etc., of the new 
pattern are rifled, by having a winding groove cut in the 
chamber or barrel, to give velocity and accuracy to the 
shot. 

RIFLE PITS. ~—Holes, or short trenches, for men. to hide from 
view. 

ROSTER.-—List of officers for duty. 

ROUNDS.—The tour of duty an officer sige in viene his 
guards, outpost and advanced guard. 

LOUT.—To defeat and throw into confusion. 

ROUTE.—Open road; the march of troops. | 

RUFFLE.—A. low, vibrating sound on a drum, not so loud as 
a roll. | 


Ss. 


SABER.—An ofiicer’s and mounted troops’ sword. 
SABOT.—A, block of wood fixed to a solid shot or canister. 
SAFEGUARD.—Protection to loyal persons, . 
SALIENT.—Angle of a fort projecting toward the country. 
SALLY.—A movement made by a strong detachment. 

SALLY PORTS.—Openings made in forts for the free egress 
of troops. 

SALUTE.—A discharge of artillery as a compliment, beating 
of drums, presenting of arms, or drooping of. colors. 

SAND-BAGS.—Bags filled with earth, from twelve to fourteen 
inches wide, and thirty inches long. 

SAPPERS. aA company attached to the engineer corps of the 
army. 

SASH.—A mark of distinction worn, by officers. round fhe 

waist... ; 
SCOUTS. r ioreamigi sent in advance, or/on the dipoles, to on 
information. | 
SENTRY.—A special enard, to watch all who may be moving. 
SERGBANT.—Non-commissioned officer above corporal. 

SHELL.—A hollow shot, with a hole to receive the fuse. 
SHOT.—Made of cast iron, used as a projectile, when great 

range, accuracy, and penetration are required. 

SIEGES.—An army engaged in attacking a fortified city or 

town. 

SIGHT.—A small piece of brass or iron, fixed on a gun at.its 

muzzle, to serve as a point of direction. | 

SIGNAL.—To make signs; to attract the attention of ong 

party by understood signs. 


ot 


280 DIOTIONARY. 


SIGNAL-OFFICER.—One attached to the staff of the army, 
who has charge of all signal-books. 

SKIRMISH.—A loose, desultory engagement. 

SLING-OARTS.—Two wheels, an axle-tree, and tongue, used 
to transport guns. 

SOLDIER.—Whoever belongs to ti ~nilitary service of the 
State, and receives pay, is a soldier. 

SORTIE.—An attack by a besieged garris» 

SPHERICAL-CASE SHOT.-—Oonsists 0. ‘in shell of cast 
iron, containing a number of musket-bal. 1d a-charge of 
powder sufficient to burst it. The kind useu ve rial i 
and contain 90 bullets. 

SPIKE:—To drive a nail or file in the vent of a cannon. 

SQUAD.—A small party of men. 

SQUADRON.—Two companies or troop of cavalry. 

~ SQUARE.—A body of infantry, so formed as to repel an attack — 
of cavalry. 

STAFF.—tThe assistants of a general officer and a colonel of a 
regiment. Department officers. ° 

STANDARD.—Banners and flags used and honored by regi- 
ments. 3 

gah A .—Trunks of trees used as a snbstitiite for field- 

- works 

STORM.—To make a vigorous assault. [march. 

STRAGGLERS.—Individuals who wander from the line of 

STRATAGEM.—A scheme or. plan devised to deceive the 
enemy. [guns. 

STRATEGY.—Movements beyond the reach of the enemy’s 

SUPERNUMERARY.—Substitute officers, graduates of the 
Military Academy. . 

SUPPLIES.—AIl siaek pertain to fooding, clothing, tranaport- 
ing, and equipping the army. 

SURGEON.—A staff officer of the even’ department. | 

SUTLER.—An attache of the army, with regulations to sell 
small wares to soldiers. 

SWORD.—A weapon used by officers. 


T. 


TAOTICS.—The handling of troops in presence of the enemy, 

TAMBOUR.—A stockade or timber wall, with loop-holes for 
musketry. 

TAMPION or TOMPION.—A wooden plug used to eee the 
bore of ‘a field-piece. 

TAN G.—The projection of a musket-barrel which secures it 
. te the stock. ; | 


DICTIONARY. | 281 


TARGET.—A mark to fire at, to test the skill of-a soldier. 

TATTOO.—Drum beat at night. 

TEAMSTERS.—Persons attached to an army as non-combat- 
ants, used as drivers. 

TERRE-PLEIN.—A level space on the ramparts. 

TETE-DU-PONT.—A field intrenchment covering a bridge. 

TIER SHOT.—Grapeshot so called. 
TIGE ARMS.—Arms with a stem of steel in the middle of the 
breech-pin, around which the charge of powder is placed. 
TOPOGRAPHY.—tThe art of representing and describing the 
actual condition of a country by surveys and maps. 

TRAIL HANDSPIKE.—A rod used: for moving field-carriages. 

TRAIN.—Teams and artillery, with their horses. 

TRA VERSES.—Portions of parapets, which cross the breadth 
of the covered way. 

TRENCH.—An opening in the ground about three feet deep, 
ten feet wide, made by besiegers against a fortification. 

TRESTLE.—A horizontal beam, supported by four legs. 

TRIGGER.—An appliance to a musket, which, being pulled, 
causes it to explode when loaded. 

TROOP.—A company of cavalry. 


Uw. 
UNDRESS.—Not full uniform; known as fatigue dress. 
- UNIFORM.—Prescribed dress, 
UNMILITARY.—Contrary to rules of discipline. : 


Vv. 


VAN-GUARD.—Advanced guard. 

VEDETTES.—Sentries on outposts, so placed that they car 
best observe the movements of the enemy, and communicate 
by signal to their respective posts and with each other. 

VENT.—The opening or passage in firearms by means of 
which the charge is ignited. 

VETERAN.—An old soldier. 

Ww. . 

WAD.—Ring-wads, made of rope yarn, increase the accuracy 
of the fire. 

WARRANT.—A writ of authority. -Warrant officers are such 
as are immediately below commissioned officers, exercising 
their authority by warrant only. Cadets are warrant officers. 

WINDAGE.—The true difference between the diameter of the 
piece and the ball. 

WINGS.—The right and left divisions of an army; the right 
and left of a regiment or camp. 


Pat PAH 80: pines A! MU 
: Se a ae > bl Tey 


Ss Jaya | 
ANTE ee a Liege 
RAR 





woe 


~* 


ion Se 


Fea at, = 








YB. 47980 











aireess Vid 
PS 
1b 64. 


THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 

















a 
eb s ok 


eh ye NUS tgs 

Pia sn gr ay eset a eT mere Me obey, pest writen ee so se 

GB TE gir gf ry : t 6 3 mae R >: SOR 3 ah 

; a pine " y * 

: yt ae 

i : atthe gps 

+ or. " 3 7 itt 

. ay ag : Fs TF ge EY og A 
o) waiting at 
Bi 

fy rae . J a tee 1 3 

ait! nit he SE ap te 


“4, 


OTE tt ; af 
yd Sak si 3 : F 
ogi egy Stag Soy” * : Syste Magy ite: ger? a Bast ate el cette ar ance ne ade “gl eof ad ae 
PN Pe PR Pe Sc is i ie Pe A ha PY 
7 . : a ; n ‘| ks ope: Firs, ate " an® Pe ale ‘ = 
b 4, ay 


Sit 
NT ist ee ey} : uh tpt Mee ” se shay 
, rae ae Bere 
~ Ate Os if é 7 i ‘ay. ou oi 2 } 
2 insta Wrgerth pare ier aes doc odes ae Fy cata peat Sacre est, } eee 
ig A! wt CE aS We Ee Oe EY 
ae Spple tesio ss ee 7 we saat ; 
Pre AR ee a ae, 


nd a a 
wet 3 


pitti tt! ithe, (ited Peet 
hate ea rahe 


rear 
‘nf iy Epa 5 
er ‘ ~ ¢ Dh 3 ahs * sith ; ; 
# ite af a WM sf cbse Tit pee ; PRIS ae eo ; ee std ao jie rm ae 
RNR OR A CATA NLA AU | Mento 


iy te 


ha 
. i *? 
» ” 


‘ “” 4 aha 


as: | SLT Bika tee SF BS RF ant i we a 
aa ea he 7) ri “ iy partake 2 mi 
Sit ne oat be sf at a m : eid 
lf Pr reacs “a ots “F pasts CBS 33 i; 
” Lap ules ws |'abee. > rs ay . * : J 
* ye ae l bee «ee . ‘ sti ay 





